®
Parallels Plesk Panel
Copyright Notice
Parallels Holdings, Ltd.
c/o Parallels International GmbH
Vordergasse 59
CH-Schaffhausen
Switzerland
Phone: +41-526320-411
Fax: +41-52672-2010
Copyright © 1999-2011 Parallels Holdings, Ltd. and its affiliates. All rights reserved.
This product is protected by United States and international copyright laws. The product’s
underlying technology, patents, and trademarks are listed at http://www.parallels.com/trademarks.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows NT, Windows Vista, and MS-DOS are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Mac is a registered trademark of Apple, Inc.
All other marks and names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective owners.
Contents
Preface
8
Typographical Conventions ........................................................................................................... 8
Feedback ....................................................................................................................................... 9
Operating Inside Parallels Containers
10
What's New in Parallels Panel
12
Panel 10.4 ................................................................................................................................... 12
Panel 10.3 ................................................................................................................................... 15
Panel 10.2 ................................................................................................................................... 16
Becoming Familiar with Panel GUI
17
Service Provider View: Server Administration Panel .................................................................. 21
Service Provider View: Control Panel ......................................................................................... 23
Power User View ......................................................................................................................... 24
Simple View ................................................................................................................................. 25
My Account and Webspaces
27
Changing Your Password and Contact Information .................................................................... 28
If Your Panel Works with Customer & Business Manager ................................................ 28
Switching to My Webspaces ....................................................................................................... 29
Server Configuration
30
Obtaining and Installing a License Key ....................................................................................... 31
Upgrading the Trial License Key ....................................................................................... 32
Installing Additional License Keys for Parallels Plesk Panel Add-ons .............................. 33
Upgrading Your License Key ............................................................................................ 34
Rolling Back to Your Previously Used License Key .......................................................... 34
Securing Your Parallels Plesk Panel ........................................................................................... 34
Restricting Administrative Access to Parallels Plesk Panel .............................................. 35
Securing Communication to Server with SSL Encryption ................................................. 36
Hosting Multiple SSL Sites on a Single IP Address (Linux) .............................................. 39
Securing Sites with a Single SSL Certificate (Windows) .................................................. 39
Configuring Server IP Pool .......................................................................................................... 41
About IP Addresses: IPv4 and IPv6 .................................................................................. 41
Requirements for Operating on IPv6 ................................................................................ 41
Allocation to Resellers and Hosting Customers: How This Is Done in Parallels Plesk Panel
.......................................................................................................................................... 42
How to Perform Operations on the Server IP Pool ........................................................... 43
Configuring DNS Services ........................................................................................................... 45
Setting Up Websites Preview ...................................................................................................... 50
Configuring Panel in Different Network Environments ................................................................ 50
Configuring the Panel to Run Behind a Firewall ............................................................... 51
Running Panel Behind a Router with NAT ........................................................................ 52
Preface
4
Using the Built-in Firewall (Windows) ............................................................................... 54
Configuring Port Range for Passive FTP Mode (Windows) .............................................. 58
Setting Up Mail Services ............................................................................................................. 59
Setting Up Spam Protection .............................................................................................. 63
Setting Up Virus Protection (Linux) ................................................................................... 72
Setting Up Virus Protection (Windows) ............................................................................. 74
Selecting Webmail Software ............................................................................................. 74
Configuring Mailman Mailing List Software (Linux) ........................................................... 75
Preventing Your Customers From Sending Mass E-mail (Linux) ..................................... 75
Connecting Database Servers .................................................................................................... 76
Adding Database Servers ................................................................................................. 77
Connecting to External Databases (Windows) ................................................................ 79
Activating Third-Party Services ................................................................................................... 80
Adobe ColdFusion (Linux) ................................................................................................. 81
Google Services for Websites ........................................................................................... 82
UNITY Mobile Services for Mobile Sites ........................................................................... 86
Miva E-commerce Applications (Windows) ....................................................................... 87
Miva E-commerce Applications (Linux) ............................................................................. 87
Modules and Add-ons (Linux) ........................................................................................... 89
Configuring ASP.NET (Windows) ................................................................................................ 91
Configuring IIS Application Pool (Windows) ................................................................................ 93
Configuring E-mail Notifications .................................................................................................. 94
Setting Up Help Desk .................................................................................................................. 97
Optimizing Apache Web Server (Linux) ...................................................................................... 98
Configuring Customer Acquisition Scenarios ............................................................................ 101
Customizing Web Presence Builder Trial Mode Notifications ......................................... 102
Server Administration
105
Appearance and Branding ......................................................................................................... 106
Appearance ..................................................................................................................... 106
Branding .......................................................................................................................... 112
Web Server ................................................................................................................................ 112
Adjusting Session Preferences ....................................................................................... 113
Statistics and Monitoring ........................................................................................................... 113
Configuring Statistics ...................................................................................................... 114
Logging Actions Performed by Your Customers in the Panel ......................................... 115
Viewing Statistics ............................................................................................................ 118
Tracking Server Health with Health Monitor ................................................................... 121
Monitoring Connections to the Panel and FTP Services ................................................ 124
Event Tracking........................................................................................................................... 127
Adding Event Handlers (Linux) ....................................................................................... 128
Adding Event Handlers (Windows) ................................................................................. 129
Removing Event Handlers .............................................................................................. 130
Third-Party Components ........................................................................................................... 131
Viewing and Selecting Software Components Used on the Server ................................ 132
Database Servers ...................................................................................................................... 132
Applications ............................................................................................................................... 134
How Apps Become Available to Your Customers ........................................................... 137
Managing Apps with Application Vault ............................................................................ 139
System Time and Services ........................................................................................................ 143
Adjusting System Date and Time .................................................................................... 145
Mail ............................................................................................................................................ 145
Monitoring Mail Server Message Queue and Troubleshooting Mail Congestion (Linux) 146
Scheduling Tasks ...................................................................................................................... 147
Scheduling Tasks on Linux-based Servers ..................................................................... 148
Scheduling Tasks on Windows-based Servers............................................................... 150
Additional Administrator Accounts (Windows) .......................................................................... 152
Creating Additional Administrator Accounts .................................................................... 152
Preface
5
Modifying Additional Administrator Accounts .................................................................. 153
Suspending and Activating Additional Administrator Accounts ...................................... 153
Removing Additional Administrator Accounts ................................................................. 154
Backup and Restoration ............................................................................................................ 155
Configuring Global Backup Settings ............................................................................... 156
Configuring the Panel for Using FTP Repository ............................................................ 156
Backing Up the Entire Server .......................................................................................... 157
Backing Up Individual Accounts and Sites ...................................................................... 157
Scheduling Backups ........................................................................................................ 158
Restoring Data From Backup Archives ........................................................................... 159
Downloading Backup Files from Server .......................................................................... 160
Uploading Backup Files to Server ................................................................................... 160
Removing Backup Files from Server .............................................................................. 160
Backup Logs.................................................................................................................... 161
Remote Access (Windows) ....................................................................................................... 162
Sharing Files and Folders ......................................................................................................... 163
Setting Up File Sharing ................................................................................................... 164
Using File Sharing to Share and Access Files ................................................................ 165
Panel Updates and Upgrades ................................................................................................... 183
Changing Updater Settings ............................................................................................. 187
Reporting Installation and Upgrade Problems ................................................................ 187
Mass E-mail Notifications .......................................................................................................... 188
Creating, Editing and Removing Message Templates .................................................... 189
Sending E-mail Notices ................................................................................................... 191
Managing Panel from Mobile Devices ....................................................................................... 193
Migrating Data from Other Hosting Platforms ........................................................................... 195
Importing Data From a File ............................................................................................. 197
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
200
Understanding Plans and Subscriptions ................................................................................... 201
Allocation of Resources and Services ............................................................................ 203
Relations Between Subscriptions and Service/Add-on Plans ......................................... 203
Syncing Subscriptions and Plans. States of Subscriptions ............................................. 205
Properties of Plans and Subscriptions ...................................................................................... 207
Hosting Plans and Subscriptions .................................................................................... 208
Reseller Plans and Subscriptions ................................................................................... 230
Serving Non-Technical Customers............................................................................................ 233
Serving Customers .................................................................................................................... 234
Managing Service Plans ................................................................................................. 235
Subscribing to Hosting Services ..................................................................................... 237
Changing Services Provided to Customers .................................................................... 239
Managing Customers ...................................................................................................... 241
Managing Service Subscriptions ..................................................................................... 244
Employing Resellers .................................................................................................................. 247
Creating Reseller Account/Subscription ......................................................................... 247
Changing Reseller Subscription ...................................................................................... 248
Adding Services to Your Offerings ............................................................................................ 250
Using Customer & Business Manager
252
Business Manager Navigation Menus in Panel ......................................................................... 254
Business Manager Controls for Linked Objects ........................................................................ 256
Adding Subscriptions, Plans, and Customer Accounts to Business Manager .......................... 258
Glossary
260
Preface
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
6
261
Administrator information updated ............................................................................................ 263
Service stopped ......................................................................................................................... 263
Service started........................................................................................................................... 263
Service restarted ....................................................................................................................... 264
IP address created .................................................................................................................... 264
IP address updated ................................................................................................................... 264
IP address deleted..................................................................................................................... 265
Session settings updated .......................................................................................................... 265
Customer account created ........................................................................................................ 265
Customer account updated ....................................................................................................... 266
Customer account deleted ........................................................................................................ 266
Customer account status updated ............................................................................................. 266
Customer's interface preferences updated ............................................................................... 267
Customer GUID updated ........................................................................................................... 267
Reseller account created ........................................................................................................... 267
Reseller account updated .......................................................................................................... 268
Reseller account deleted ........................................................................................................... 268
Reseller account status updated ............................................................................................... 269
Reseller's interface preferences updated .................................................................................. 269
Reseller's IP pool updated ......................................................................................................... 269
Disk space limit for reseller account reached ............................................................................ 270
Traffic limit for reseller account reached ................................................................................... 270
Disk space limit for subscription reached .................................................................................. 270
Traffic limit for subscription reached .......................................................................................... 270
Default domain (the first domain added to a subscription/webspace) created ......................... 271
Default domain (the first domain added to a subscription/webspace) updated ........................ 271
Default domain (the first domain added to a subscription/webspace) deleted ......................... 271
Subscription owner changed ..................................................................................................... 272
Default domain, status updated ................................................................................................. 272
Default domain, DNS zone updated .......................................................................................... 272
Default domain, GUID updated ................................................................................................. 273
Subdomain of created .............................................................................................................. 273
Subdomain of a default domain updated .................................................................................. 274
Subdomain of a default domain deleted .................................................................................... 275
Default domain, alias created .................................................................................................... 275
Default domain, alias updated ................................................................................................... 275
Default domain, alias deleted .................................................................................................... 276
Default domain, alias DNS zone updated ................................................................................. 276
Reseller account limits updated ................................................................................................ 277
Subscription limits updated ....................................................................................................... 277
Panel user logged in .................................................................................................................. 278
Panel user logged out ............................................................................................................... 278
Mail account created ................................................................................................................. 279
Mail account updated ................................................................................................................ 279
Mail account deleted.................................................................................................................. 279
Mailing list created ..................................................................................................................... 280
Mailing list deleted ..................................................................................................................... 280
Hosting settings created ............................................................................................................ 280
Hosting settings updated ........................................................................................................... 281
Hosting settings deleted ............................................................................................................ 282
Standard or frame forwarding hosting created .......................................................................... 283
Standard or frame forwarding hosting updated ......................................................................... 283
Standard or frame forwarding hosting deleted .......................................................................... 283
Web user account created ........................................................................................................ 284
Web user account updated ....................................................................................................... 284
Web user account deleted ......................................................................................................... 285
Preface
Web application installed ........................................................................................................... 285
Web application reconfigured .................................................................................................... 286
Web application uninstalled ....................................................................................................... 286
Web application upgraded ......................................................................................................... 286
License key updated ................................................................................................................. 287
License key expired ................................................................................................................... 287
Database server created ........................................................................................................... 287
Database server updated .......................................................................................................... 288
Database server deleted ........................................................................................................... 288
Database created ...................................................................................................................... 288
Database deleted ...................................................................................................................... 288
Database user account created ................................................................................................ 289
Database user account updated ............................................................................................... 289
Database user account deleted ................................................................................................. 289
Parallels Plesk Panel component updated or added ................................................................ 290
Reseller plan created ................................................................................................................ 290
Reseller plan updated ............................................................................................................... 290
Reseller plan deleted ................................................................................................................. 291
Service plan of reseller created ................................................................................................. 291
Service plan of reseller updated ................................................................................................ 291
Service plan of reseller deleted ................................................................................................. 291
Service plan of administrator created ........................................................................................ 291
Service plan of administrator updated ....................................................................................... 292
Service plan of administrator deleted ........................................................................................ 292
FTP account created ................................................................................................................. 292
FTP account updated ................................................................................................................ 292
FTP account deleted ................................................................................................................. 293
Server health status changed .................................................................................................... 293
7
8
Preface
Preface
In this section:
Typographical Conventions ............................................................................... 8
Feedback .......................................................................................................... 9
Typographical Conventions
Before you start using this guide, it is important to understand the documentation
conventions used in it.
The following kinds of formatting in the text identify special information.
Formatting convention
Type of Information
Example
Special Bold
Items you must select,
such as menu options,
command buttons, or
items in a list.
Go to the System tab.
Read the Basic Administration
Titles of chapters,
sections, and subsections. chapter.
Italics
Used to emphasize the
The system supports the so
called wildcard character search.
importance of a point, to
introduce a term or to
designate a command line
placeholder, which is to be
replaced with a real name
or value.
Monospace
The names of commands,
files, and directories.
The license file is located in the
http://docs/common/licen
ses directory.
Preface
Formatting convention
Preformatted
Type of Information
Preformatted Bold
What you type, contrasted
with on-screen computer
output.
# cd /root/rpms/php
CAPITALS
Names of keys on the
keyboard.
SHIFT, CTRL, ALT
KEY+KEY
Key combinations for
CTRL+P, ALT+F4
which the user must press
and hold down one key
and then press another.
On-screen computer
output in your commandline sessions; source code
in XML, C++, or other
programming languages.
9
Example
# ls –al /files
total 14470
Feedback
If you have found an error in this guide, or if you have suggestions or ideas on how to
improve this guide, please send your feedback using the online form at
http://www.parallels.com/en/support/usersdoc/. Please include in your report the guide's title,
chapter and section titles, and the fragment of text in which you have found an error.
CHAPTER 1
Operating Inside Parallels Containers
The following operations are not available from the Panel when it is operating inside
Parallels Containers:


Adding to and removing IP addresses from the server's network cards.
Changing host name.

Setting system date and time.
After adding IP addresses to the Parallels Virtuozzo Containers hardware node, you
need to use the Reread IP function in Server Administration Panel (in Tools & Settings > IP
Addresses) to update the Panel's IP pool.
When installing the Panel inside a Parallels Container, you need to configure the
Offline Service parameter for the Container to ensure that the both Parallels Plesk
Panel web interface and the Parallels Power Panel, used for managing Containers, are
accessible.
By default, the Container is configured so that the following parameters are enabled for
the Offline Management service: VZPP-plesk (redirection of connections on the port
8443) and VZPP (redirection of connections on the port 4643). You need to disable the
VZPP-plesk service. You can do this on Parallels Virtuozzo Containers for Linux and
Windows by using the Parallels Management Console utility.
 To configure the container using the Parallels Management Console:
1. Open the Parallels Management Console.
2. Connect to the Parallels Containers hardware node.
3. Click Virtuozzo Containers.
4. Select the Container, right-click it, and select Properties from the context
menu.
5. Go to Network > Offline Management, and disable the VZPP-plesk service.
 To configure the container using the command line tools on a Linuxbased hardware node:
1. Connect to the hardware node over SSH.
2. Issue the following command:
vzctl set CT_ID --offline_management yes --offline_service vzpp --save
 To configure the container using the command line tools on a Windowsbased hardware node:
Operating Inside Parallels Containers
11
1. Connect to the hardware node over Remote Desktop.
2. Issue the following commands:
vzctl set CT_ID --offline_management yes --save
vzcfgt set CT_ID offlineservices vzpp
After configuring the Container, you will be able to access the Container management
functions from the Panel (at Tools > Manage Your Container [in the Server Management
group]).
CHAPTER 2
What's New in Parallels Panel
Each Panel release introduces new features, and we incorporate some of them, those
that address Panel administration, into this guide. This chapter lists the new features
since Panel 10.2. The features are grouped by release and are accompanied by short
descriptions and links so that you can easily acquaint with them and read more as
needed.
Panel 10.4
Simple view for customers
Shared hosting providers can offer customers simpler interface by hiding unnecessary
interface elements of Control Panel. Learn more (on page 233).
Simple view for administrators
VPS and dedicated server providers can offer power users simpler interface by hiding
unnecessary elements in the user interface. Alternatively, Panel administrators
themselves can switch to Simple view voluntarily and choose only tools they would like
to use. The view is activated in Settings > Interface Settings or in the initial
configuration wizard. Learn more (on page 25).
Customers can control user access to subscriptions under their hosting account
Customers can specify that a certain auxiliary user can log in only to a certain
subscription in case the customers have multiple subscriptions on the same hosting
account. This feature also eases migration from earlier Panel versions. After the
migration, administrators have no need to activate former domain administrator
accounts as they are already active and limited to a certain subscription. Learn more in
the (Advanced) Configuring Access to Hosting Account section of Control Panel User's Guide
that is available at http://www.parallels.com/products/plesk/docs/.
Customizable PHP configuration
Since Panel 10.4, PHP settings are exposed to Panel GUI and both administrators and
resellers have the ability to adjust them individually for each hosting plan or
subscription. Moreover, customers (if allowed) can adjust their PHP settings preset
individually for each of their websites and subdomains. Learn more about custom PHP
configuration in the section Customizing PHP Configuration (on page 223).
Managing hosting from Server Administration Panel
What's New in Parallels Panel
13
Panel 10.4 adds new interface option that allows administrators to manage hosting
services right in Server Administration Panel. In earlier Panel versions, administrators
could manage hosting only from Control Panel opened in a new window. Learn more
about Panel GUI options in the chapter Becoming Familiar with Panel GUI (on page 17).
Access to Panel tools and settings from a single page
It is easier for administrators to locate certain Panel tools or settings as all of them are
now available from the single Tools & Settings page. In earlier versions, Panel settings
and tools were located on separate pages (Settings and Tools & Utilities) confusing
administrators in their effort to find a certain Panel option. Read more about carrying
out administrative tasks in Server Configuration (on page 30) and Server Administration (on
page 105).
Quick search of Panel tools and objects
Administrators and customers can quickly find any Panel object (say, a subscription,
domain or mail account) or navigate to any Panel page (say, to the service plan or
spam filter settings and so on) by using the search bar. The search bar is located in the
top right corner of Panel. Learn more about the Panel GUI in Becoming Familiar with Panel
GUI (on page 17).
Panel update and upgrade improvements
Panel 10.4 introduces a number of features that make keeping Panel up-to-date even
easier:

Administrators can view the information about current Panel version and available
updates and upgrades on the Home page.

Administrators can set up Panel to notify them when upgrades to the next version
become available.

For convenience, now we add a quality tag to every Panel version: Testing,
release, or stable. For example, administrators can consider upgrading to the
testing Panel version, if they want to try new Panel features before an official
release. On the contrary, to get the safest solution, administrators can wait until
Panel enters its stable phase (it may take a couple of months after the official
release).
Learn more in the section Panel Updates and Upgrades (on page 183).
Backup Manager improvements
We added a number of new features to the Backup Manager tool that make it even
handier:

It is easier for administrators to find out the type of user who created a backup
(administrator, customer, or reseller), as it is shown in the separate column at the
backup tasks list (Tools & Settings > Backup Manager).

Panel users can now easily find out the reason of why a certain backup has failed.
Panel shows the detailed error description in a separate field of a backup task.

Panel prevents backup failures due to insufficient disk space in two following ways:
14
What's New in Parallels Panel
a
Administrators have the option to start a backup only if a Panel server has
enough free disk space to store it (the option is available in Tools & Settings >
Backup Settings). Be aware that this option significantly increases the backup
time as Panel additionally has to calculate the size of the future backup. Note
that on Windows platforms, Panel does not directly calculate object sizes but
takes them from the database. As object sizes in Panel database are updated
only once a day, the overall calculated backup size can differ from its real value.
b
Another option in Tools & Settings > Backup Settings is to start a backup only if a
Panel server has the specified free disk space. This option is convenient when
you approximately know the size of the future backup and do not want Panel to
waste time and resources on calculating it.
Learn more about saving and restoring Panel data in Backup and Restoration (on page
155).
Migration tools improvements
Panel meets customers' needs and introduces long-awaited features in migration tools:

It is now easier for Linux hosting administrators to keep Migration Agent up to date.
The tool downloads and applies available updates automatically when
administrators open Migration Manager.

Windows hosting administrators have no need to search documentation for the
Migration Agent download link. Now it is available directly in Tools & Settings >
Migration Manager.

It is now easier for administrators to decide what objects should be transferred
during the migration of only selected objects. Before starting the migration, Panel
shows what objects from a source server already exist on a destination server.

Full server migration is more flexible now. Administrators have the option to not
transfer a Panel license during the entire server migration.

Administrators can now easily find out the reason of why a certain object was not
migrated. The full error description is now available in the log field of a migration
task.
Learn more about Panel data migration in Migrating Data from Other Hosting Platforms (on
page 195).
Refined overuse settings
We redesigned the settings to make it clear that there are three options: Do not allow
overuse, allow only disk space or traffic overuse, or allow overuse of all resources. For
more information about resources overuse, see Resources (on page 210).
Usability improvements, the Domains page
This release introduces the list of minor yet important improvements to the Domains
page (Server Administration Panel). These improvements address the needs of
administrators and resellers. The list is as follows:

Each domain name now contains a link to an associated subscription which helps
administrators and resellers promptly find a subscription that contains a given
domain name.
What's New in Parallels Panel
15

The page shows extra information like the hosting type and domain aliases which
gives the complete picture of a subscription organization.

The page provides facilities to find a domain, a subdomain, a domain alias, a
customer account, or a company by name.

Administrators and resellers can instantly view the content of each website from the
list.
Learn more about hosting services management in Managing Subscriptions (on page
244).
DNS templates for subdomains
Administrators can create a template of a DNS record for subdomains. This record will
be added to all subdomains on a domain. The template is created using the
<subdomain>.<domain> wildcard. Learn more about DNS configuration.
Mail improvements
It is easier for customers to control disk space occupied by each mailbox as it is shown
right on the Mail tab.
Adding files to archive in File Manager
Customers can add files and folders to archive using the new Add to Archive button in
the File Manager tool (in Control Panel, the Websites & Domains tab).
Panel 10.3
APS 1.2 support
Some apps support new exciting capabilities of the APS 1.2 engine:

Create or remove app user accounts right from Panel.


Associate app user accounts with Panel user accounts.
Configure server-wide settings of apps right from Application Vault.

Install apps that link to external services and do not require hosting accounts to
operate.
For more information on managing APS apps, refer to the section Managing Applications
(on page 134).
File sharing
Panel allows you and your webspace users to share files with each other or anyone on
the Internet. Learn more in the section Sharing Files and Folders (on page 163).
View selector
16
What's New in Parallels Panel
Now you can switch between Service Provider and Power User views at any time
through the Panel GUI. In earlier Panel versions, this operation was accessible only
through the command line. Learn more in Becoming Familiar with Parallels Plesk Panel (on
page 17).
Panel 10.2
IPv6 Support
Parallels Plesk Panel now supports operation on IPv6 addresses. Administrators and
resellers can offer service plans on IPv4 and IPv6, or create dual-stack subscriptions
(on one IPv4 + one IPv6 address). To learn more, see the section Configuring Server IP
Pool (on page 41).
Server name indication extension on Linux-based Panel servers
Parallels Plesk Panel for Linux allows authentic SSL certificates to be used for sites
hosted on shared IP addresses. This was achieved with the added support for the
Server Name Indication (SNI) extension to the Transport Layer Security protocol. To
learn more, see the section Hosting Multiple SSL Sites on a Single IP Address (Linux) (on
page 39).
Customer accounts without subscriptions
When creating a new customer account, you can now choose whether to create a
subscription with a website for that customer. Creating accounts without subscriptions
can be useful if you do not need to set up a website for a customer at the moment, and
want to transfer a subscription from another customer account, or set up a subscription
later.
To learn more, see the section Subscribing to Hosting Services (on page 237).
My webspaces
Now it is easier for administrators to create their own hosting accounts with the Panels
that also serve hosting customers and resellers. Switching to Power User view that is
intended for creating and managing administrator's own hosting accounts no longer
means you have to give up hosting reselling anymore. Learn more about this view in
sections Switching to My Webspaces (on page 29) and The Power User View (on page 24).
CHAPTER 3
Becoming Familiar with Panel GUI
As Parallels Panel is the turnkey solution for providing hosting services, its interface
has to satisfy the needs of both hosting providers and their customers. For this
purpose, Panel GUI is divided into two panel types:

Server Administration Panel.
The administrator (you) uses this panel for providing hosting services to customers
and maintaining the server. Say, here you can create new hosting plans and
customer accounts, configure server-wide settings of system services, and so on.

Control Panel.
Your customers use this panel to manage hosting services. Say, here they can add
domains and mailboxes, manage website content and so on. In addition, you can
also use this panel to access customer accounts, or to manage your own hosting
accounts - webspaces. Learn more about webspaces in the chapter My Account and
Webspaces (on page 27).
Interface Views
Panel is employed by a number of various user groups and each group uses a specific
set of Panel tools depending on business needs. Say, this is convenient for hosting
administrators to have separate interfaces for server and hosting accounts
administration, while web design studios do not need server administration at all as
they focus on websites development. To better meet the needs of end users, Panel
offers two interface views: Service Provider and Power User. These views define what
panel type you use, what tools are present in that panel, and how they are organized.

Service Provider view.
This view is convenient for reselling hosting services. It has all means to create and
manage customer accounts, subscriptions, and service plans.

Power User view.
This view is the best if you use Panel solely for personal needs, such as for
maintaining a company portal or a mail server. In this view, both server
administration and hosting services management take place in Control Panel. As
this view does not assume a reselling service to others is needed, it does not
provide facilities to manage hosting plans, subscriptions, resellers, and customers.
Also, as the server administration functions are included into Control Panel in this
view, the Server Administration Panel becomes unavailable.
You can change the Panel view any time from Tools & Settings > Interface Management.
Simple View
Power User view has a subtype, Simple View, that serves two main purposes:

Simplify user experience of managed hosting administrators.
18
Becoming Familiar with Panel GUI
Some administrators carry out only basic administration tasks (monitoring system
services, administering user accounts, and so on) leaving more complex tasks,
usually server and services configuration, to the support service of a service
provider. This group of people wants to have only tools they really need and hide
the other tools.

Make Panel safer and more comfortable.
Administrators can voluntarily revoke some of their permissions to hide the tools
they do not need in everyday operations and return to the full-featured Power User
view only if they need some system tuning (for example, turn on server backups).
Read more about this view in the Simple View section (on page 25).
Hosting Operations in Server Administration Panel
By default, when you want to perform an operation in a certain hosting account (say,
create new mailbox), you open this account with the link on the Domains or Subscriptions
pages. The account is opened in a new window.
Since Panel 10.4, there is no need to open hosting accounts in separate windows. This
may be convenient when you want to perform a series of hosting operations on a group
of accounts or you are just accustomed to carry out all hosting tasks from a single GUI
as in previous Panel versions. You can set Panel to perform all hosting operations in
Server Administration Panel at the Tools & Settings > Interface Management page. Once
you activate the option, Panel will open hosting accounts in the interface identical to
Control Panel but exposed on the current page of Server Administration Panel.
The following diagram summarizes the information about the views.
Becoming Familiar with Panel GUI
19
20
Becoming Familiar with Panel GUI
Quick Search for Panel Tools and Objects
Panel 10.4 introduces the search feature that lets administrators promptly locate a
certain Panel tool or object by typing its name or words from the description in a search
bar. The principles of how the search works as well as its limitations are given in the
following list.

The feature covers only objects and actions in Server Administration Panel and
Control Panel.

A search criteria is the exact match of a substring in a name or description of a tool
or object. No word forms are supported.

The search uses synonyms for certain elements (say, IPv6 for IP addresses
management) to improve the results set.

Customer accounts, subscriptions, and other Panel objects automatically receive
higher position in search results than operations over them so that administrators
can easily and subtly locate the accounts.

Search results are limited to 10 items with the option to refine search.
Next in this chapter, we will discuss the panel GUIs in detail.
In this chapter:
Service Provider View: Server Administration Panel.......................................... 21
Service Provider View: Control Panel ................................................................ 23
Power User View ............................................................................................... 24
Simple View ...................................................................................................... 25
Becoming Familiar with Panel GUI
21
Service Provider View: Server
Administration Panel
When you log in to Parallels Plesk Panel as administrator, it shows a Home page with
a summary on allocated and used resources.
The top banner area provides the following links:

A link with your name. Click this if you need to update your contact information.

Log out. This is where you close your session when you have finished working with
the Panel.

Help. This provides context-sensitive help with a search function.
The navigation pane on the left provides access to the following sets of functions:

Home. This is where you start working with the Panel. Most of the operations you
might need to perform are accessible from this area.

Customers. This is where you perform operations on user accounts. Customers are
end users of hosting services; they cannot resell hosting services. You can
accomplish the following tasks from this area of the Panel:


Create, modify, suspend, activate, and remove user accounts

View traffic usage reports
Resellers. This is where you perform operations on reseller accounts. Resellers can
use hosting services and resell the services to end users. Resellers cannot create
reseller accounts for other users. You can accomplish the following tasks from this
area of the Panel:

Create, modify, and remove user accounts for resellers and their customers.

View traffic usage reports

Domains. This is where you can view information about hosted websites and their
domain names, and go to the Control Panel for managing them.

Subscriptions. This is where you manage customer subscriptions to your services.
Subscription is a way a customer obtains services and resources provided by a
service plan.

Service Plans. This is where you manage your service plans. Service plan is a set of
resources and services provided to hosting service customers by means of
subscriptions. There are also service plan add-ons that extend the amount of
resources and services provided with a subscription.

Tools & Settings. This is where you configure and manage system services, global
settings related to hosting services, and Panel branding.

Modules. This link is available only on Linux-based hosting servers. Click it to install
or manage additional modules that add useful functions to Parallels Plesk Panel.
These modules are Firewall, Counter-Strike Game Server, and VPN.

Profile & Preferences. This is where you set interface language and skin, and update
contact information.
22
Becoming Familiar with Panel GUI

Change Password. This is where you change your password for logging in to the
Server Administration Panel as administrator.
Note: The number and location of these icons and links in your Panel depend on the
number of available services, installed applications, and functions provided in
accordance with your software license. For this reason, some of the functions and
items described in this guide might not be available to you. If you want to use the
functions that are currently missing in your Panel, then upgrade your software license,
install the necessary software packages, or contact your hosting service provider for
assistance.
If the Customer and Business Manager component is installed, the navigation pane
also includes the following groups of links:


Business Operations. Manage customer accounts and service subscriptions.
Business Monitoring. View accounting reports and work with invoices and payments.

Business Setup. Set up Customer and Business Manager for serving your
customers.
To learn more about working with Customer and Business Manager, refer to the
chapter Using Customer and Business Manager (on page 252).
To see information about a tool or an item on the page, hover the cursor over an item,
without clicking it, and a small hover box appears with supplementary information
regarding the item being hovered over.
The main working area on the right provides access to the tools available for the
current section of the Panel selected in the navigation pane. Additional operations are
accessible from the More Actions menus.
To navigate through Parallels Plesk Panel, you can use a path bar: a chain of links that
appears in the right part of the screen, below the banner area.
To return to a previous screen, use the shortcuts in the path bar, or the Up Level icon in
the upper-right corner of the screen.
To sort a list by a certain parameter in ascending or descending order, click on the
parameter's title in the column heading. The order of sorting will be indicated by a small
triangle displayed next to the parameter's title.
Becoming Familiar with Panel GUI
23
Service Provider View: Control Panel
Control Panel provides access to the following functions:

Home. Provides access to the most frequently performed operations. The most part
of administrative tasks can be performed using the links on this page:

View statistics on resource usage by websites.

Host a new website and fill it with content using the integrated Web Presence
Builder visual editor.

Manage files.

Secure sites with SSL encryption.

Set up e-mail addresses.

Manage user roles and user accounts.

Select and install applications on websites.

Users. Provides access to functionality for creating, modifying, deleting user
accounts and user roles.

Mail. Provides access to functionality for creating, modifying, deleting e-mail
addresses and mailing lists.

Websites & Domains. Provides access to functionality for registering domain names,
creating, modifying, deleting websites, setting up hosting features, databases,
subdomains, domain aliases, viewing website visits statistics, and managing files
published at the websites.

Applications. Provides access to functionality for installing, configuring, and
removing web applications that add useful features to your sites, such as blogs,
photo galleries, online stores, and other applications.
Statistics. Provides reports on disk space and traffic used by websites.


Account. This is where you view information about your hosting package, change
your contact information and password for access to the Panel.
Note: The number and location of these icons and links in your Panel depend on the
number of available services, installed applications, and functions provided in
accordance with your software license. For this reason, some of the functions and
items described in this guide might not be available to you. If you want to use the
functions that are currently missing in your Panel, then upgrade your software license,
install the necessary software packages, or contact your hosting service provider for
assistance.
Above the tabs, the following links are located:

Link with your name. Click this to specify your contact information, e-mail address,
and set a new password for accessing the Panel.
Log out. This closes your session when you have finished working with the Panel.

Help. View the context-sensitive help articles.

24
Becoming Familiar with Panel GUI
Power User View
Control Panel in Power User view provides access to the following functions:

Home. Provides access to the most frequently performed operations. The most part
of administrative tasks can be performed using the links on this page:

View statistics on resource usage by websites.

Host a new website and fill it with content using the integrated Web Presence
Builder visual editor.

Manage files.

Secure sites with SSL encryption.

Set up e-mail addresses.

Manage user roles and user accounts.

Select and install applications on websites.

Users. Provides access to functionality for creating, modifying, deleting user
accounts and user roles.

Mail. Provides access to functionality for creating, modifying, deleting e-mail
addresses and mailing lists.

Websites & Domains. Provides access to functionality for registering domain names,
creating, modifying, deleting websites, setting up hosting features, databases,
subdomains, domain aliases, viewing website visits statistics, and managing files
published at the websites.


Applications. Provides access to functionality for installing, configuring, and
removing web applications that add useful features to your sites, such as blogs,
photo galleries, online stores, and other applications.
Statistics. Provides reports on disk space and traffic used by websites.

Server. Provides controls for setting up the Panel and managing services.

Webspaces. Provides access to functions for setting up and managing webspaces.
Each webspace is associated with one main domain name, one IPv4 and one IPv6
address or either of them, and is suitable for hosting multiple websites. You might
want to create separate webspaces for hosting websites with SSL protection on
dedicated IP addresses.
Note: The number and location of these icons and links in your panel depend on the
number of available services, installed applications, and functions provided in
accordance with your software license. For this reason, some of the functions and
items described in this guide might not be available to you. If you want to use the
functions that are currently missing in your Panel, then upgrade your software license,
install the necessary software packages, or contact your hosting service provider for
assistance.
Above the tabs, the following links are located:

Link with your name. Click this to specify your contact information, e-mail address,
and set a new password for accessing the Panel.
Becoming Familiar with Panel GUI
25

Log out. This closes your session when you have finished working with the Panel.

Help. View the context-sensitive help articles. There is no dedicated guide for this
view; however, when you click this link, the relevant help topics will be shown either
from Administrator's Guide or Control Panel User's Guide.
Simple View
Simple view, available in Tools & Settings > Interface Management, is designed to simplify
user experience for administrators so that they can see only the tools they need when
working with Panel. If you go to Tools & Settings > Simple View Settings page (the
Administrative Tools tab), you can select the tools the administrator will see this view.
The view settings can be unavailable if a service provider decided to lock Simple view.
Locking Simple View and Hiding Simple View Settings
To lock Simple view means to limit the selection of Panel features available to the
administrator and disallow any changes to the features list. Thus, when Simple view
gets locked, it is impossible to switch to any other view from GUI (or API RPC) or
change the Simple view settings. Generally, if you are a service provider, you can use
this feature to separate Panel administration into two parts:

Day-by-day operations. These operations are performed by the person who
purchased web hosting, the Panel administrator.

Complex configuration and maintenance. These operations are accomplished by
the support team of the service provider. Such operations may include configuration
of network, DNS, web server and so on.
If a Panel administrator needs a certain feature and is unable to find it, the provider's
support team turns this feature on by unlocking Simple view, modifying the view
settings, and locking the view again.
Simple view is locked only through a command-line call of the poweruser utility:
poweruser --on -simple true -lock true
The lock is removed by calling poweruser --on -lock false.
26
Becoming Familiar with Panel GUI
Simple View and Webspaces
The specifics of Simple view is that you can perform mass adjustment of permissions,
hosting parameters, PHP settings, and other webspace parameters on all webspaces
you created in this view. This is possible because each webspace you create in this
view derives from the artificial Simple service plan that is not visible in the plans list.
The settings of this plan are available in Tools & Settings > Simple View Settings. When you
change the settings, the changes (if possible) are automatically applied to all
webspaces under the Simple plan.
Another point that deserves attention is that the Simple plan has a special permission,
Ability to create, remove, and switch among webspaces. If this permission is cleared, it
is not possible to create webspaces in Simple view.
If you need to adjust simple view settings through the command-line, use the admin
utility. Learn more about the utility options in Parallels Plesk Panel 10.4 for Linux (Windows):
Reference for Command Line Utilities.
CHAPTER 4
My Account and Webspaces
As a Panel administrator, you are free to change own account information and
password any time. In this chapter you will learn how to do it and also how to restore
password if you have lost it. Besides, this chapter explains how to create and manage
webspaces (own hosting accounts).
In this chapter:
Changing Your Password and Contact Information ........................................... 28
Switching to My Webspaces.............................................................................. 29
28
My Account and Webspaces
Changing Your Password and Contact
Information
 To change your password:
1. Click the Change Password link in the navigation pane.
2. Enter your old and new passwords.
3. Click OK.
 To update your contact information:
1. Click the Profile & Preferences link in the navigation pane.
2. Update your information as required, and click OK.
 If you forgot your password:
1. In your web browser’s address bar, type the URL where your Parallels Plesk
Panel is located.
2. For example, https://your-server.com:8443.
3. Press ENTER. Parallels Plesk Panel login screen will open.
4. Click the Forgot your password? link.
5. You will be prompted to specify your login name and e-mail address
registered in the system. Type your login name into the Login box, type your
e-mail address registered in the system into the E-mail box, and click OK.
6. If your password cannot be sent by e-mail because it was stored by the
system in encrypted form, you will be prompted to set up a new password
using a secret code that will be generated for that purpose and sent to your
e-mail.
7. Once you received the e-mail from the password reminder, click the link in
the message body. A new browser window will open.
8. At this step, specify your login name and a new password.
The Secret Code field of the form should be automatically filled by the system, and if it is
not, copy the secret code from the message you received to the clipboard and paste to
the form.
9. Click OK to submit.
The instructions on how to restore your password will be sent to your e-mail address.
If Your Panel Works with Customer & Business Manager
My Account and Webspaces
29
For the Panel to work fine with Customer & Business Manager, you will have to actually
change two passwords. The first is that you and Business Manager use to work with the
Panel, and the second is a global password you use to log in to both Business Manager and
the Panel.
 To change your password if you employ Business Manager:
1. Change your password in the Panel by following instructions from section
Changing Your Password and Contact Information (on page 28).
2. Update this password in connection settings of Business Manager.
a. Click Business Setup > All Settings.
b. Click Hosting Panels.
c. Select the ID of the group where the Panel resides (PleskUnix or
PleskWin).
d. Click Edit.
e. Change the password to the one you specified at step 1.
3. Set this password as global account password.
a. Make sure you are in Business Manager and click the Profile link in
the upper-right corner of the page.
b. Repeat the password you specified at step 1.
Switching to My Webspaces
Parallels Plesk Panel is acquired either to sell hosting services or to meet personal needs
(create a company portal, set up a mail server and so on). Previously, if you wanted to run
own services while continuing to selling to others, you (as the Panel administrator) had to
subscribe to a hosting plan as if you were a customer. Once you had your own subscription,
you could configure the services you needed from Control Panel.
From now on, administrators can create and manage their own webspaces while retaining
control over service plans and subscriptions. Starting from Panel 10.2, they can do this from
Server Administration Panel, Home > My Webspaces group.
Each webspace opens in Power User view. This view combines management of own hosting
accounts and server administration capabilities. In turn, actions related to hosting plans,
resellers, and customers are still performed in Server Administration Panel.
To switch back to serving hosting customers and resellers, click Go back to Server
Administration Panel at the top of Control Panel pages.
For more information about Power User view, see the section Power User View (on page 24).
CHAPTER 5
Server Configuration
In this chapter:
Obtaining and Installing a License Key .............................................................. 31
Securing Your Parallels Plesk Panel ................................................................. 34
Configuring Server IP Pool ................................................................................ 41
Configuring DNS Services ................................................................................. 45
Setting Up Websites Preview ............................................................................ 50
Configuring Panel in Different Network Environments ....................................... 50
Setting Up Mail Services ................................................................................... 59
Connecting Database Servers ........................................................................... 76
Activating Third-Party Services.......................................................................... 80
Configuring ASP.NET (Windows) ...................................................................... 91
Configuring IIS Application Pool (Windows)....................................................... 93
Configuring E-mail Notifications......................................................................... 94
Setting Up Help Desk ........................................................................................ 97
Optimizing Apache Web Server (Linux) ............................................................. 98
Configuring Customer Acquisition Scenarios ..................................................... 101
Server Configuration
31
Obtaining and Installing a License Key
The Panel comes with a trial license key, which is already installed in the Panel. This
license key provides limited functionality and is active only for a short period of time.
Therefore, you should obtain a proper license key from Parallels or its partners and
install it into the Panel.
Parallels Plesk Panel license keys have a built-in expiration date. This has been
implemented to help prevent fraud and theft. It requires the Parallels Plesk Panel
software to check with Parallels licensing server during a 10 day period before the
expiration date to verify that the key has not been reported stolen and is being used in
accordance with the End User License Agreement (that is, installed on only one
server). Once this is verified, the expiration date is prolonged.
Parallels Plesk Panel will attempt to connect over TCP/IP to the licensing server
through port 5224. Please make sure that this is not blocked by a firewall. The update
process runs automatically and the administrator of Parallels Plesk Panel-managed
server does not need to do anything unless there is a problem. Should the Parallels
Plesk Panel key expire, check your firewall and then go to Tools & Settings > License
Management (in the Panel group) and click Retrieve Keys. If the key cannot be updated,
contact your reseller or Parallels (if you purchased the license key directly from
Parallels).
You can test the connection to the licensing server anytime by going to Tools & Settings
> License Management (in the Panel group) and clicking Retrieve Keys.
In this section:
Upgrading the Trial License Key........................................................................ 32
Installing Additional License Keys for Parallels Plesk Panel Add-ons ................ 33
Upgrading Your License Key ............................................................................. 34
Rolling Back to Your Previously Used License Key ........................................... 34
32
Server Configuration
Upgrading the Trial License Key
 To upgrade the trial license key:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > License Management (in the Panel group), and click
Order Parallels Panel Upgrades.
2. The Parallels online store will open in a separate browser window. In
this window, select the items and features you want to include into your
Parallels Plesk Panel license and click Submit. In the next steps, indicate
the currency, number of license keys, provide contact details, billing
address, and payment method, and submit the form. The new key will
be sent to the specified e-mail address.
3. Save the new key to the hard drive on your local machine.
4. Open again the License Management screen in Parallels Plesk Panel (Tools
& Settings > License Management), and click Upload Key.
5. Enter the path to the key file that you saved on your local machine or
click Browse to locate it.
6. Select the Replace the currently installed license key with the selected one
checkbox to confirm that you really want to replace the current license
key with the new one.
If this checkbox is not selected, the new license key will not be installed.
7. If your new license key allows hosting fewer sites than you already host
on the server, Parallels Plesk Panel will stop working. However, to
prevent the Panel from comparing the amount of the resources used
and those covered by the new key, select the Allow the resources usage
override checkbox.
This might be helpful if you want to temporarily install a license key that provides
less resources and then upgrade it through the Panel.
8. Click OK to install the new key to the Panel.
Server Configuration
33
Installing Additional License Keys for Parallels Plesk
Panel Add-ons
 To install an additional license key for an add-on Parallels Plesk Panel
component:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > License Management (in the Panel group).
2. Click Order Panel Add-Ons.
3. The Parallels online store page listing available add-ons will open in a
separate browser window. On this page, select the add-ons you want to
order and click Submit.
4. Because Parallels Plesk Panel add-ons are added to the license keys
that already exist, you need to enter the number of your license key to
which you add this feature and click Submit.
5. In the next steps, indicate the currency, number of keys, provide
contact details, billing address, and payment method, and submit the
form. You will be notified by e-mail when your order is processed.
6. When you receive the e-mail notification, return to the License
Management screen (Tools & Settings > License Management) and click Retrieve
Keys to retrieve the ordered license key. The Panel's License Manager
will retrieve the upgraded license key from the Parallels licensing server
and automatically install it to your Panel.
34
Server Configuration
Upgrading Your License Key
If you are planning to expand your customer base and host more sites on the server
than your current license allows, you need to upgrade your license key.
 To upgrade the license key:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > License Management (in the Panel group).
2. Click Order Panel Upgrades.
3. On the Parallels online store page, select the desired upgrade option
and click Submit.
4. In the next step, indicate purchase details and submit the form. You will
be notified by e-mail when your order is processed.
5. After you receive the e-mail notification, return to the License Management
screen (Tools & Settings > License Management) and click Retrieve Keys to
retrieve the ordered license key. The Panel's License Manager will
retrieve the purchased license key from the licensing server and
automatically upload it to your Panel.
Rolling Back to Your Previously Used License Key
 To roll back to the license key you previously used:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > License Management (in the Panel group).
2. Click Roll Back Key. The previously installed license key will be restored.
Securing Your Parallels Plesk Panel
In this section:
Restricting Administrative Access to Parallels Plesk Panel................................ 35
Securing Communication to Server with SSL Encryption................................... 36
Hosting Multiple SSL Sites on a Single IP Address (Linux)................................ 39
Securing Sites with a Single SSL Certificate (Windows) .................................... 39
Server Configuration
35
Restricting Administrative Access to Parallels Plesk
Panel
To alleviate security concerns, you may want to restrict administrative access to your
control panel from specific IP addresses.
 To allow administrative access to the Panel only from specific IP
addresses or networks:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Restrict Administrative Access (in the Security group).
2. Click Add New Network and specify the required IP addresses. Click OK.
To specify subnets, you can use wildcard symbols (*) and subnet masks.
3. Select the Denied from the networks that are not listed option, and click Set.
When prompted to confirm the operation, click OK.
 To prohibit administrative access from specific IP addresses or networks:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Restrict Administrative Access (in the Security group).
2. Click Add New Network and specify an IP address. Click OK.
To specify subnets, you can use wildcard symbols (*) and subnet masks.
3. Select the Allowed, excluding the networks in the list option, and click Set.
When prompted to confirm the operation, click OK.
36
Server Configuration
Securing Communication to Server with SSL
Encryption
For security reasons, you can access your control panel only through a secure
connection provided by Secure Sockets Layer-enabled hypertext transfer protocol. All
data you exchange with the Parallels Plesk Panel-managed server are encrypted, thus
preventing interception of sensitive information. The SSL certificate used in the data
encryption process is automatically generated and installed on the server during
installation of the control panel. This is the so-called self-signed certificate: it is not
signed by a recognized certification authority (CA), therefore, upon attempt to connect
to your control panel, you and your customers will see warning messages in web
browsers.
To gain customer confidence, you should purchase an SSL certificate from a reputable
certification authority, and install it to the control panel.
You can either:

use the functions for purchasing SSL certificates from Comodo, GeoTrust, Inc. or
GoDaddy provided by your control panel,
OR

create a certificate signing request (CSR) from the control panel and submit it to the
certification authority of your choice, which will create an SSL certificate for you.
Note: If you are going to use the control panel's facilities for purchasing a certificate
through MyPlesk.com online store, you should not use command line tools for
creating the certificate signing request.
 To purchase an SSL certificate from Comodo, GeoTrust, Inc. or GoDaddy
through MyPleskCom online store and secure your control panel:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > SSL Certificates (in the Resources group). A list of
SSL certificates that you have in your repository will be displayed.
2. Click Add SSL Certificate.
3. Specify the certificate properties:

Certificate name. This will help you identify this certificate in the repository.

Encryption level. Choose the encryption level of your SSL certificate. We
recommend that you choose a value more than 1024 bit.

Specify your location and organization name. The values you enter should not
exceed the length of 64 symbols.

Specify the host name for which you wish to purchase an SSL certificate. For
example: your-domain.com

Enter your e-mail address.
4. Make sure that all the provided information is correct and accurate, as it
will be used to generate your private key.
Server Configuration
37
5. Click Buy SSL Certificate.
Your private key and certificate signing request will be generated. Do not delete
them. MyPlesk.com login page will open in a new browser window.
6. Register or log in to an existing MyPlesk.com account and you will be
taken step by step through the certificate purchase procedure.
7. Choose the type of certificate that you wish to purchase.
8. Click Proceed to Buy and order the certificate. In the Approver E-Mail
drop-down box, please select the correct Approver e-mail.
The approver e-mail is an e-mail address that can confirm that certificate for
specific domain name was requested by an authorized person.
9. Once your certificate request is processed, you will be sent a
confirmation e-mail. After you confirm, the certificate will be sent to your
e-mail.
10. When you receive your SSL certificate, save it on your local machine or
network.
11. Return to the SSL Certificates repository (Tools & Settings > SSL
Certificates).
12. Click Browse in the middle of the page and navigate to the location of the
saved certificate. Select it, and then click Send File. This will upload the
certificate to the repository.
13. Select the checkbox corresponding to the certificate you just added,
and click
Secure the Panel.
 To secure your control panel with an SSL certificate from other certificate
authorities:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > SSL Certificates (in the Resources group). A list of
SSL certificates that you have in your repository will be displayed.
2. Click Add SSL Certificate.
3. Specify the certificate properties:

Certificate name. This will help you identify this certificate in the repository.

Encryption level. Choose the encryption level of your SSL certificate. We
recommend that you choose a value more than 1024 bit.

Specify your location and organization name. The values you enter should not
exceed the length of 64 symbols.

Specify the host name for which you wish to purchase an SSL certificate. For
example: your-domain.com

Enter your e-mail address.
4. Make sure that all the provided information is correct and accurate, as it
will be used to generate your private key.
38
Server Configuration
5. Click Request. Your private key and certificate signing request will be
generated and stored in the repository.
6. In the list of certificates, click the name of the certificate you need. A
page showing the certificate properties opens.
7. Locate the CSR section on the page, and copy the text that starts with the
line -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE REQUEST----- and ends with the line -----END
CERTIFICATE REQUEST----- to the clipboard.
8. Visit the website of the certification authority from which you want to
purchase an SSL certificate, and follow the links on their site to start a
certificate ordering procedure. When you are prompted to specify CSR
text, paste the data from the clipboard into the online form and click
Continue. The certification authority will create an SSL certificate in
accordance with the information you supplied.
9. When you receive your SSL certificate, save it on your local machine or
network.
10. Return to the SSL Certificates repository (Tools & Settings > SSL
Certificates).
11. Click Browse in the middle of the page and navigate to the location of the
saved certificate. Select it, and then click Send File. This will upload the
certificate to the repository.
12. Select the checkbox corresponding to the certificate you just added,
and click
Secure the Panel.
 In case you need to generate a self-signed certificate, follow this
procedure:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > SSL Certificates (in the Resources group). A list of
SSL certificates that you have in your repository will be displayed.
2. Click Add SSL Certificate.
3. Specify the certificate properties:

Certificate name. This will help you identify this certificate in the repository.

Encryption level. Choose the encryption level of your SSL certificate. We
recommend that you choose a value more than 1024 bit.

Specify your location and organization name. The values you enter should not
exceed the length of 64 symbols.

Specify the host name for which you wish to purchase an SSL certificate. For
example: your-domain.com

Enter your e-mail address.
4. Click the Self-Signed button. Your certificate will be generated and stored
in the repository.
Server Configuration
39
Hosting Multiple SSL Sites on a Single IP Address
(Linux)
Parallels Plesk Panel for Linux supports the Server Name Indication (SNI) extension to
the Transport Layer Security protocol, which makes it possible to use authentic SSL
certificates for sites hosted on shared IP addresses.
SNI helps to efficiently use IPv4 resources and provides the following benefits:

Providers can run any number of SSL sites with independent certificates on a single
IPv4 address.

Hosting customers can install independent SSL certificates on each of their sites;
therefore, there is no need to purchase another subscription. Each customer can
install an SSL certificate even if there only one shared IP address on the whole
server.
To see the list operating systems that support SNI, see the release notes.
SSL support with SNI on shared IP addresses requires that users' browsers also
support SNI. Most modern web browsers, such as IE 7, Firefox 2.0, Opera 8.0, and
Chrome support it, unless they are run on Windows XP. To learn more about SNI and
client software that supports it, refer to
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Server_Name_Indication.
Note that in cases when SNI is not supported, assigning an SSL certificate to a site
hosted on a shared IP address will associate that certificate with all other sites hosted
on the same IP address.
For instructions on assigning SSL certificates to websites, refer to Control Panel User's
Guide, section Securing Connections to Websites with SSL.
Securing Sites with a Single SSL Certificate (Windows)
On Windows-based installations, you can secure access to a site with SSL for site
owners without having them purchase their own SSL certificate. Websites that employ
shared SSL are, in fact, using the certificate shared by another domain. The domain
that shares its SSL certificate with others is called master SSL domain.
You can pick any website that belongs to you, switch on SSL support in web hosting
settings, install a valid SSL certificate on that site, and make it act as a master SSL
domain for all other websites hosted on the server. Or you can pick a website that
belongs to one of your users (reseller or customer account), switch on SSL support in
web hosting settings, install a valid SSL certificate on that site, and make it act as a
master SSL domain for all websites of this user.
Once the master SSL domain is assigned, you or your customers need to add shared
SSL links for each website that needs secure access.
40
Server Configuration
 To configure the master SSL domain and enable shared SSL on your
server:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Shared SSL (in the Resources group).
2. Select the Switch on shared SSL checkbox.
3. Select the required website from the Domain name menu. Only websites
that are hosted on your server and have SSL enabled are present in the
list.
4. Click OK.
For information about adding shared SSL links for websites, refer to Control Panel User's
Guide, section Using SSL Certificate Shared by Another Website.
 To disable shared SSL on your server:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Shared SSL (in the Resources group).
2. Clear the Switch on shared SSL checkbox.
3. Click OK.
Server Configuration
41
Configuring Server IP Pool
This section introduces you to the concepts of IP addresses and describes how they
are allocated in Panel for web hosting purposes.
This section contains the following subsections:

About IP Addresses: IPv4 and IPv6.

Requirements for Operating on IPv6.

Allocation to Resellers and Hosting Customers: How This Is Done in Parallels Plesk
Panel.

How to Perform Operations on the Server IP Pool.
About IP Addresses: IPv4 and IPv6
An IP address is a number that uniquely identifies each device, such as a computer, on
a network. The use of IP addresses makes it possible for computers to find other
computers on a network and communicate with them.
There are two formats of IP addresses:

IP version 4. These 32-bit network addresses look like 192.168.1.1. They are
currently used by most network devices. The number of IPv4 addresses is limited
and the last remaining portions of vacant IP addresses have already been allocated
to Internet service providers.

IP version 6. These 128-bit network addresses look like
2001:0db8:85a3:0000:0000:8a2e:0370:7334. IPv6 is the new standard that
was developed to address the exhaustion of IPv4 network addresses.
When Parallels Plesk Panel is deployed in IPv6-enabled networks, it can operate
simultaneously on IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. Providers can add IPv4 and IPv6
addresses to the server IP pool, allocate them to resellers, and create subscriptions
based on them.
Each hosting subscription can be allocated:

One IPv4 address.

One IPv6 address.

One IPv4 + one IPv6 address (dual-stack subscriptions).
Note: Each subscription that needs to host FTP shares accessible by Internet users
without password authorization (Anonymous FTP) must be assigned at least one
dedicated IPv4 address.
Requirements for Operating on IPv6
The following requirements must be met to ensure the proper operation of Parallels
Plesk Panel in IPv6-enabled networks:
42
Server Configuration

The Panel-managed server must be assigned at least one static IPv4 address. This
is required for connections to the Panel licensing servers and application catalogs.

When running in virtual environments, Parallels Virtuozzo Containers 4.6 or later
must be used.
To see the list of Linux operating systems that support this feature, refer to the release
notes to Panel, for Linux or for Windows.
Allocation to Resellers and Hosting Customers: How
This Is Done in Parallels Plesk Panel
The following is an overview of how IP addresses are allocated in Panel:
1. IP addresses are added to the server IP pool.
After installation, Panel reads all assigned IP addresses from the operating system
configuration and adds them to the server IP pool. When you obtain new IP
addresses that you would like to use on the server, you should add them through
Panel to that pool, as Panel might not recognize manual modifications you make to
the network configuration files.
Note: If you are running Panel in a Parallels Virtuozzo Container (PVC), you can
add IP addresses only on the PVC hardware node.
When adding addresses to the server IP pool (in Tools & Settings > IP Addresses >
Add IP Address), you select how they should be allocated - either as dedicated or
shared:

A dedicated IP address can be assigned to a single reseller. Dedicated IP
addresses are required for hosting e-commerce sites with SSL encryption and
sites that host FTP shares that are accessible without password authorization.
Note: The recently added Server Name Indication (SNI) extension makes it
possible to enable SSL protection for sites on shared IP addresses;
however, this might not work for all hosting servers and users' browsers. For
more information, see the section Hosting Multiple SSL Sites on a Single IP
Address (on page 39).

A shared IP address can be literally shared among several reseller accounts
and sites. Sharing of addresses helps to use scarce IPv4 address resources
efficiently, but it should not be needed for IPv6 addresses.
2. When setting up reseller plans (in Service Plans > Reseller Plans > Add New Plan > IP
Addresses tab), you select IP addresses that should be allocated to resellers:

For shared IP addresses, you can manually select which addresses should be
allocated.

For dedicated IP addresses, you can only specify the number of addresses that
should be allocated: When you create a new reseller account, a vacant
dedicated IP address from the server pool is automatically selected by Panel
and allocated to the reseller.
3. When signing up new customers (in Customers > Add New Customer) or creating
subscriptions for your own needs (in Subscriptions > Add New Subscription), you can
select IP addresses that should be allocated. All shared and dedicated addresses
available from the server IP pool are listed in a menu.
Server Configuration
43
How to Perform Operations on the Server IP Pool
 To view the IP addresses you have at your disposal:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > IP Addresses (in the Resources group).
Your IP addresses are listed and the following supplementary information is given:

The IP address, Subnet Mask and Interface columns show which IP addresses are
on which network interfaces.

The Resellers column shows the number of user accounts whom you assigned a
given IP address. To view the users by names, click the respective number in
the Resellers column.

The Domains column shows a number of websites hosted on an IP address. To
view the domain names of these websites, click the respective number in the
Domains column.
2. To update the list of IP addresses and their status, click Reread IP.
You might need to do this if you manually added IP addresses to the network
interface in the server operating system, or when operating in Parallels Virtuozzo
Containers.
 To add a new IP address to the server:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > IP Addresses (in the Resources group), and click Add
IP Address.
2. Select the network interface for the new IP from the Interface menu. All
network cards installed on your server are shown in this menu.
3. Enter the IP address and subnet mask in the corresponding box. For
example, 123.123.123.123/16 or 2002:7b7b:7b7b::1/64.
4. Select the type of the new IP address, shared or dedicated.
5. From the drop-down box, select the default SSL certificate to use for
the new IP address. You can select the following certificates:

Default certificate - the certificate that comes with the Parallels Plesk Panel
distribution package. However, this certificate is not recognized by web
browsers as it is not signed by a Certificate Authority (a warning message
appears). The default certificate is used to provide access to the Panel via the
https protocol (https://server-name-or-IP-address:8443/).

Other certificates - the certificates (self-signed or signed by a Certificate Authority)
that you added to the repository of SSL certificates. About adding certificates,
see Control Panel User's Guide, section Securing Sites with SSL Encryption.
6. If your server is running Windows operating system, select the FTP over
SSL checkbox if you want to enable the ability to use secure FTP
connection (FTP over SSL) for the domain on a dedicated IP address.
44
Server Configuration
Note: To enable secure FTP connections, the FTP server installed on your
Parallels Plesk Panel server must support FTP over SSL. For example, Gene6,
Serv-U FTP, IIS FTP 7.x servers support FTP over SSL.
7. Click OK.
 To remove an IP address from the server:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > IP Addresses (in the Resources group).
2. Select the respective checkbox and click Remove, confirm removal and
click OK.
 To assign an IP address to a reseller:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > IP Addresses (in the Resources group), and click the
corresponding number in the Resellers column, then click Assign.
2. Select the account you need and click OK.
 To revoke an IP address from a reseller:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > IP Addresses (in the Resources group), and click the
corresponding number in the Resellers column.
2. Select the respective checkbox and click Remove.
3. Confirm removal and click OK.
Since users can refer to a web resource on your server by typing an IP address and
there can be several websites hosted on that address, Panel needs to know which of
the sites to show in such cases. Panel automatically assigns the first website created
on an IP address as the default website; however, you can select any other website
and make it default.
 To assign a default website (default domain) for an IP address:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > IP Addresses (in the Resources group), and click the
IP address you need.
2. In the Default site menu, select the site you need and click OK.
 To change an IP address allocation type (shared, dedicated) or assign
another SSL certificate to an IP address:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > IP Addresses (in the Resources group), and click the
IP address you need.
2. Select the required IP address allocation type and SSL certificate, and
click OK.
Server Configuration
45
Configuring DNS Services
Your Parallels Plesk Panel works in cooperation with a DNS server, which enables you
to run DNS service on the same machine where you host websites.
Setup of DNS zones for newly added domains is automated: When you add a new
domain name to control panel, a zone file is automatically generated for it in
accordance with the server-wide DNS zone template and registered in the name
server's database, and name server is instructed to act as a primary (master) DNS
server for the zone.
You can:

Add resource records to and remove from the template.

Override the automatic zone configuration with custom settings on a per-domain
basis.

Select another DNS server (for example, on Windows servers, switch to Microsoft
DNS server from BIND DNS server).

Switch off the domain name service on this machine if your provider or another
organization is running DNS service for your sites.

Specify one of your zones under which all customer websites will be available for
preview.
DNS Zones for Subdomains
In earlier Panel versions, all subdomain records were included into a parent domain
zone. Panel 10.4 allows each subdomain to have its own DNS zone. These subdomain
zones are useful if you wish to specify a custom name server for a particular
subdomain or shorten the number of domain DNS records by rearranging them to
subordinate zones. Generally speaking, subdomain DNS zones bring all domain DNS
features to the subdomain level.
As this new feature introduces significant changes to DNS zones organization, the
default behavior is not to create subdomain DNS zones. However, if you wish to try out
this feature, use the following command-line call:
server_pref –u –subdomain-dns-zone own
To turn this feature off, use:
server_pref –u –subdomain-dns-zone parent
Learn more about running Panel utilities at

(Linux) http://download1.parallels.com/Plesk/PP10/10.4/Doc/en-US/online/pleskunix-cli/37894.htm

(Windows) http://download1.parallels.com/Plesk/PP10/10.4/Doc/enUS/online/plesk-win-cli/44076.htm
46
Server Configuration
Note: The default behavior in 10.4 versions before MU#9 was to create subdomain
DNS zones. If you apply MU#9 to 10.4, the feature will remain active. Otherwise, the
default behavior will be not to create the separate zones.
When subdomain zones are off, customers modify the parent domain's DNS zone by
toggling Panel control over a particular subdomain zone. In fact, when they go to
Websites & Domains > DNS Settings > Switch On/Off the DNS Service and clicks Manage next
to a subdomain name, the following situations are possible.
Subdomain DNS Zones
Switch the DNS Service ON
ON
Has no effect on the DNS zone of a parent domain.
OFF
A new DNS zone is created
for the subdomain, and all
DNS records corresponding
to this subdomain are
removed from the parent
domain's DNS zone.
Switch the DNS Service OFF
Only A and AAAA records
corresponding to this
subdomain are added to the
parent domain's DNS zone.
 To view the default records in the server-wide DNS template:
Go to Tools & Settings > DNS Template Settings (in the General group). All resource record
templates will be displayed. The <ip> and <domain> templates are automatically
replaced in the generated zone with real IP addresses and domain names.
 To add a new resource record to the server-wide DNS template:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > DNS Template Settings (in the General group).
2. Click Add DNS Record.
3. Select the resource record type and specify the record properties as
desired.
Note that you can use <ip> and <domain> templates that will be replaced in the
generated zone with real IP addresses and domain names. You can use a wildcard
symbol (*) to specify any part of the domain name, and you can specify the exact
values you need.
4. Click OK.
 To remove a resource record from the server-wide DNS template:
Server Configuration
47
1. Go to Tools & Settings > DNS Template Settings (in the General group).
2. Select a checkbox corresponding to the record template you wish to
remove, and click Remove.
3. Confirm removal and click OK.
The Panel updates automatically the zone name, host name, administrator’s e-mail
address, and serial number, and writes the default values for the rest of Start of
Authority record parameters to the zone files it maintains. If you are not satisfied with
the default values, you can change them through the control panel.
 To change the Start of Authority (SOA) record settings in the server-wide
DNS template:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > DNS Template Settings (in the General group).
2. Click SOA Records Template.
3. Specify the desired values:

TTL. This is the amount of time that other DNS servers should store the record in
a cache. The Panel sets the default value of one day.

Refresh. This is how often the secondary name servers check with the primary
name server to see if any changes have been made to the domain's zone file.
The Panel sets the default value of three hours.

Retry. This is the time a secondary server waits before retrying a failed zone
transfer. This time is typically less than the refresh interval. The Panel sets the
default value of one hour.

Expire. This is the time before a secondary server stops responding to queries,
after a lapsed refresh interval where the zone was not refreshed or updated.
The Panel sets the default value of one week.

Minimum. This is the time a secondary server should cache a negative response.
The Panel sets the default value of three hours.
4. Click OK. The new SOA record parameters will be set for the newly
created domains.
Usage of serial number format recommended by IETF and RIPE is mandatory for many
domains registered in some high-level DNS zones, mostly European ones. If your
domain is registered in one of these zones and your registrar refuses your SOA serial
number, using serial number format recommended by IETF and RIPE should resolve
this issue.
Parallels Plesk Panel servers use UNIX timestamp syntax for configuring DNS zones.
UNIX timestamp is the number of seconds since January 1, 1970 (Unix Epoch). The
32-bit timestamp will overflow by July 8, 2038.
RIPE recommends using YYYYMMDDNN format, where YYYY is year (four digits), MM
is month (two digits), DD is day of month (two digits) and NN is version per day (two
digits). The YYYYMMDDNN format will not overflow until the year 4294.
48
Server Configuration
 To change the Start of Authority (SOA) serial number format to
YYYYMMDDNN for the server-wide DNS template:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > DNS Template Settings (in the General group).
2. Click SOA Records Template.
3. Select the Use serial number format recommended by IETF and RIPE checkbox.
Note: See the sample of SOA serial number generated with the selected format. If
the resulting number is less, than the current zone number, the modification may
cause temporary malfunction of DNS for this domain. Zone updates may be
invisible to Internet users for some time.
4. Click OK.
 To restore the default Start of Authority (SOA) serial number format (UNIX
timestamp) for the server-wide DNS template:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > DNS Template Settings (in the General group).
2. Click SOA Records Template.
3. Clear the Use serial number format recommended by IETF and RIPE checkbox.
Note: See the sample of SOA serial number generated with the selected format. If
the resulting number is less, than the current zone number, the modification may
cause temporary malfunction of DNS for this domain. Zone updates may be
invisible to Internet users for some time.
4. Click OK.
By default, transfer of DNS zones is allowed only for name servers designated by NS
records contained within each zone. If your domain name registrar requires that you
allow transfer for all zones you serve:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > DNS Template Settings (in the General group).
2. Click Transfer Restrictions Template. A screen will show all hosts to which
DNS zone transfers for all zones are allowed.
3. Click Add New Address.
4. Specify the registrar's IP or network address and click OK.
 If you are using third-party DNS servers, and are not running your own
DNS server, you should switch off your control panel's DNS server:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > DNS Template Settings (in the General group).
2. Click Switch Off.
 To restore the original configuration of server-wide DNS template:
Server Configuration
49
1. Go to Tools & Settings > DNS Template Settings (in the General group).
2. Click Restore Defaults.
You can specify whether your DNS server should provide recursive service for queries.
With recursive service allowed, your DNS server, when queried, performs all the lookup
procedures required to find the destination IP address for the requestor. When
recursive service is not allowed, your DNS server performs minimal number of queries
only to find a server that knows where the requested resource resides and to redirect
the requestor to that server. Therefore, recursive service consumes more server
resources and makes your server susceptible to denial-of-service attacks, especially
when the server is set to serve recursive queries from clients outside your network.
After your install Parallels Plesk Panel, the built-in DNS server defaults to serving
recursive queries only from your own server and from other servers located in your
network. This is the optimal setting. If your upgraded from earlier versions of Parallels
Plesk Panel, your DNS server defaults to serving recursive queries from any host.
 If you want to change the settings for recursive domain name service:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > DNS Template Settings (in the General group) > DNS
Recursion.
2. Select the option you need:

To allow recursive queries from all hosts, select Allow for all requests.

To allow recursive queries from your own server and hosts from your network,
select Allow for local requests only.

To allow recursive queries only from your own server, select Deny.
3. Click OK.
By default, users can create new subdomains and domain aliases in the DNS zones
belonging to other users. This means that they can set up websites and e-mail
accounts which could be used for spamming, fishing or identity theft.
 To prevent users from setting up domains and domain aliases in the DNS
zones belonging to other users:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Restrict Creation of Subzones (in the General group).
2. Select the Do not let users create DNS subzones in other users' DNS superzones
checkbox.
3. Click OK.
 If you need to assign a new host name to your server:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Server Settings (in the General group).
2. In the Full host name box, type the new host name and click OK.
50
Server Configuration
Setting Up Websites Preview
Your customers can preview their websites during domain name propagation. The two
preview modes are available: Quick Preview and Limited Preview.

Quick Preview, the recommended option, presents customers' sites as subdomains
of one of your domains. For example, customer-site.tld will be available for preview
as customer-site.tld.192-0-2-12.your-domain.tld. Here 192-0-2-12 is the site's IP
where dots are replaced with dashes. Note that if you do not specify a preview
domain, the site preview function will be unavailable to your customers.

(Default) Limited Preview is used in earlier Panel versions; it presents customers'
sites as directories under the Panel server. For example, server-hostname:8443/sitepreview/http/your-domain.tld/. This mode has two major drawbacks:
Only authorized users can view such websites and some scripts and Flash
animation might not work well on them. We recommend to use this mode only
before the Quick Preview is configured.
The preview selector and the form to configure the preview domain name is located in
Tools & Settings > Website Preview Settings.
Note: In Panel versions earlier than 10.4, customers also could preview their sites, but
the preview feature had a number of limitations due to different implementation.The
major difference is that since 10.4 customers can share the preview link with anybody
whereas previously they could view the domain only by themselves. In addition, sites in
the earlier preview mode were unable to work with complex CGI scripts or Flash
content.
Configuring Panel in Different Network
Environments
In this section:
Configuring the Panel to Run Behind a Firewall ................................................ 51
Running Panel Behind a Router with NAT ......................................................... 52
Using the Built-in Firewall (Windows) ................................................................ 54
Configuring Port Range for Passive FTP Mode (Windows) ............................... 58
Server Configuration
Configuring the Panel to Run Behind a Firewall
This section provides information about setting up the firewall built into your panel so
as to allow access to the Panel and its services.
The following is a list of ports and protocols used by Parallels Plesk Panel services.
Service name
Ports used by service
Administrative interface of the Panel
TCP 8443, 8880
Samba (file sharing on Windows networks)
UDP 137, UDP 138, TCP 139, TCP
445
VPN service
UDP 1194
Web server
TCP 80, TCP 443
FTP server
TCP 21
SSH (secure shell) server
TCP 22
SMTP (mail sending) server
TCP 25, TCP 465
POP3 (mail retrieval) server
TCP 110, TCP 995
IMAP (mail retrieval) server
TCP 143, TCP 993
Mail password change service
TCP 106
MySQL server
TCP 3306
MS SQL server
TCP 1433
PostgreSQL server
TCP 5432
Licensing Server connections
TCP 5224
Domain name server
UDP 53, TCP 53
51
52
Server Configuration
Running Panel Behind a Router with NAT
Every time you set up a new website in the Panel, the domain name used by your
website is associated with the IP address of your Panel-managed server in the DNS
zone of this domain. If you are running the Panel behind a routing device with NAT
(network address translation), this IP address will be an internal network address like
192.168.1.10. As the 192.168.x.x IP addresses are reserved by the Internet Assigned
Numbers Authority (IANA) for use by private networks, this website will not be
accessible to the Internet users. To work around this, you have to associate this
domain name with the public IP address of the routing device in the DNS zone of this
domain.
If you are using the Panel as a part of hosting package sold to you by your hosting
provider (as opposed to having your own server), then in most cases, your hosting
provider has already configured the routing device and the DNS zone template used for
creation of your websites. If so, you can proceed directly to Making Your Website
Accessible When the Panel Is Running Behind Router with NAT for instructions on how
to make your websites accessible to the Internet users.
 To check if proper modifications of the DNS zone template were made by
your hosting provider:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > DNS Template Settings (in the DNS group).
2. Locate all resource records of A type. By default these records look like
this:

<domain>. A <ip>

mail.<domain>. A <ip>

ns.<domain>. A <ip>

webmail.<domain>. A <ip>
If you see real IP address instead of <ip> there, it means that your hosting provider has
modified the DNS zone template used for creation of your websites. Write down this IP
address and go to Making Your Website Accessible When the Panel Is Running
Behind Router with NAT for further instructions on how to make your websites
accessible to the Internet users.
However, if you see the records as they are displayed in the example above (with <ip>
instead of real IP address), it means that either the Panel provided to you as a part of
your hosting package is not running behind a router with NAT, or you have to modify
the DNS zone template manually.
 To modify the DNS zone template used for creation of your websites:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > DNS Template Settings (in the DNS group).
2. Locate all resource records of A type. These records look like the
following:

<domain>. A <ip>
Server Configuration

mail.<domain>. A <ip>

ns.<domain>. A <ip>

webmail.<domain>. A <ip>
53
3. Edit all of these A type records:
a. Click the corresponding links in the Host column.
b. In the Enter IP address input box, delete the <ip> templates, and
type the public IP address allocated to you by your hosting
provider. If you have forgotten the public IP address allocated to
you, contact your hosting provider for assistance.
4. Click OK.
If you are running your own Parallels Plesk Panel server behind a router with NAT, you
need to manually configure the routing device and modify the DNS zone template used
for creation of your websites.
 If you are running your own server with the Panel behind a router with
NAT:
1. Configure your routing device so as to ensure the proper address
translation. Refer to the documentation of your routing device for
detailed instructions.
2. Log in to the Panel and go to Tools & Settings > DNS Template Settings (in the
DNS group).
3. Locate all resource records of A type. These records look like the
following:

<domain>. A <ip>

mail.<domain>. A <ip>

ns.<domain>. A <ip>

webmail.<domain>. A <ip>
4. Edit all of these A type records:
a. Click the corresponding links in the Host column.
b. In the Enter IP address input box, delete the <ip> templates, and
type the public IP address of the routing device.
c. Click OK.
d. Go to Making Your Website Accessible When the Panel Is
Running Behind Router with NAT for further instructions on how
to make your websites accessible to the Internet users.
54
Server Configuration
Using the Built-in Firewall (Windows)
Parallels Plesk Panel comes with a firewall, which you can use to protect your server
from incoming network connections that could be used to compromise the server. The
firewall comes with a set of predefined rules that allow connections to the services
required for the proper functioning of a hosting server, such as web, mail, and FTP. By
default, the firewall is switched off.
Read this section to learn how to:

Switch on the firewall

View the currently allowed inbound connections

Allow and block inbound connections

Allow and block ICMP communications

Restore the default configuration of the firewall

Switch off the firewall
In this section:
Switching the Firewall On .................................................................................. 54
Viewing the Currently Allowed Inbound Connections......................................... 55
Allowing and Blocking Inbound Connections ..................................................... 56
Allowing and Blocking ICMP Communications .................................................. 57
Restoring the Default Configuration of the Firewall ............................................ 57
Closing Down All Connections to the Server Using the Panic Mode .................. 58
Switching the Firewall Off .................................................................................. 58
Switching the Firewall On
 To switch on the firewall:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Firewall (in the Security group).
2. Under Tools, click Switch On.
3. To switch on the firewall for a specific network interface, if you have a
number of network interfaces, in the list of interfaces, click the interface
name you need.
The list of applied filtering policies (rules) opens. The S (status) column shows the
icon if the firewall blocks the packets that match the rule, and the
icon if the
firewall allows the packets that match the rule to pass through.
Note: Configuring firewall for specific network interfaces is only available under
Microsoft Windows Server 2003.
Server Configuration
55
Viewing the Currently Allowed Inbound Connections
By default, all inbound connections that are not explicitly allowed are blocked.
 To view the currently applied firewall rules for inbound connections:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Firewall (in the Security group).
2. Click the network interface you need.
All currently defined rules are listed. The S (status) column shows the
icon if the
firewall blocks the packets that match the rule, and the
icon if the firewall allows
the packets that match the rule to pass through.
Note: Configuring firewall for specific network interfaces is only available under
Microsoft Windows Server 2003. If you are using Microsoft Windows Server 2008,
go to the Firewall Rules tab.
3. Do any of the following:

To view or change the properties of a rule, click the respective rule’s name. To
save any changes you have made to the rule, click OK. To return to the previous
screen without saving any changes, click Cancel or click Up Level.

To allow connections to a service, click Add Firewall Rule, specify the rule name
for future reference, specify the port and the protocol for which incoming
connections must be allowed. Leave the Switch on rule checkbox selected, if you
wish to apply the rule immediately. Click OK.

To allow connections to a service that you previously made inaccessible, click
the respective
icon in the S column.

To temporarily block connections to a service, click the respective
S column.

To permanently block connections to a service, select the checkbox
corresponding to the rule that allows connections to the respective service, and
click Remove. Removing a rule blocks the connections that were specified in that
rule.
icon in the
56
Server Configuration
Allowing and Blocking Inbound Connections
By default, all inbound connections that are not explicitly allowed are blocked.
 To allow inbound connections to a service:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Firewall (in the Security group).
2. Click the network interface you need.
Note: Configuring firewall for specific network interfaces is only available under
Microsoft Windows Server 2003. If you are using Microsoft Windows Server 2008,
go to the Firewall Rules tab.
3. Click Add Firewall Rule, and specify the following properties:

The rule name for future reference

The port or port range and the protocol for which inbound connections must be
allowed
4. Leave the Switch on rule checkbox selected, if you wish to apply the rule
immediately.
5. Click OK.
 To block the previously allowed inbound connections to a service:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Firewall (in the Security group).
2. Click the network interface you need.
Note: Configuring firewall for specific network interfaces is only available under
Microsoft Windows Server 2003. If you are using Microsoft Windows Server 2008,
go to the Firewall Rules tab.
3. Select the checkbox corresponding to the rule that allows connections
to the respective service, and click Remove.
Removing a rule blocks the connections that were specified in that rule.
Server Configuration
57
Allowing and Blocking ICMP Communications
ICMP communications are used for network troubleshooting purposes. By default, all
ICMP communications are allowed. For the detailed description of ICMP messages,
please refer to:
http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/library/enus/xpehelp/html/xeconconfiguringicmpsettingsinwindowsfirewall.asp
 If you need to block or to allow ICMP communications, follow these steps:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Firewall (in the Security group) > ICMP Protocol.
The predefined rules for ICMP communications are listed. The S (status) column
shows the
icon if the firewall blocks the packets that match the rule, and the
icon if the firewall allows the packets that match the rule to pass through.
2. Do any of the following:

To allow ICMP requests of a specific type, click the respective
column.
icon in the S

To block ICMP requests of a specific type, click the respective
column.
icon in the S

To block all ICMP requests, click Panic Mode.

To restore the default settings for ICMP requests, click Default.
Restoring the Default Configuration of the Firewall
 To restore the initial configuration:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Firewall (in the Security group).
2. Click the network interface you need.
Note: Configuring firewall for specific network interfaces is only available under
Microsoft Windows Server 2003. If you are using Microsoft Windows Server 2008,
go to the Firewall Rules tab.
3. Under Tools, click Restore Defaults.
58
Server Configuration
Closing Down All Connections to the Server Using the Panic
Mode
If your server is compromised and websites are defaced, you may want to make the
server unavailable over the Internet and keep it down until all vulnerabilities are
patched and websites are restored from backup files.
 To close all connections to the server:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Firewall (in the Security group).
2. Click Panic Mode.
Note: Configuring firewall for specific network interfaces is only available under
Microsoft Windows Server 2003. If you are using Microsoft Windows Server 2008, go
to the Firewall Rules tab.
Switching the Firewall Off
 To switch off the firewall:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Firewall (in the Security group).
2. Under Tools, click Switch Off.
Configuring Port Range for Passive FTP Mode
(Windows)
 To set a specific port or port range for connecting to the server over FTP
in passive mode:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > FTP Settings (in the General group).
2. Specify the required port or port range in the Port or port range for passive
FTP mode connections field and click OK.
Server Configuration
59
Setting Up Mail Services
The Panel works in cooperation with mail server software, which provides e-mail
services for mailboxes and mailing lists. After installation the mail server is configured
automatically and is ready to serve, however, we recommend that you review the
default settings to make sure that they satisfy your needs.
By default, the Postfix mail server is installed on Parallels Plesk Panel for Linux
platforms, and MailEnable mail server, on Parallels Plesk Panel for Windows platforms.
You can install another mail server software, if it is supported by your Panel, and then
set up the Panel for using it.
If you want to use a mail server running on a separate machine, or want to prohibit your
users from operating mail services, you can remove from the Panel all controls related
to managing e-mail services and adding new mail accounts. This option does not
actually switch off the Panel-managed mail server, but only removes the following
items from the Control Panel accessed by hosting service customers and their users:

Mail tab.


Home tab > Mail group.
Users tab > user name > Create an e-mail address under your account option.
 To hide the user interface elements related to mail services from the
Control Panel:
1. In the Server Administration Panel, go to Tools & Settings > Mail Server
Settings (in the Mail group).
2. Clear the Enable mail management functions in Panel checkbox.
3. Click OK.
 To use another mail server software with your Panel (currently supported
only on Windows hosting):
1. Check the list of supported mail servers in Parallels Plesk Panel
Installation Guide. See if the mail server software you want to use is
supported.
2. Install the software according to instructions provided in Parallels Plesk
Panel Installation Guide, or use the instructions provided by the mail
server manufacturer.
3. Log in to the Panel and go to Tools & Settings > Server Components.
4. Click the Mail Server link.
The mail server you have installed should now be displayed in the list of available
mail servers.
5. Select the mail server you need and click OK.
60
Server Configuration
The Panel will start using the new mail server without any need for server restart.
Note that you can always select another mail server at any time later.
 To view or configure the mail service settings:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Mail Server Settings (in the Mail group). The serverwide mail preferences screen will open on the Settings tab.
2. Leave the Enable mail management functions in Panel checkbox selected if
you want to allow your users to create mail accounts through Control
Panel and use the mail services provided by the Panel-managed mail
server. If you are using an external mail server, clear this checkbox.
3. If you want to limit the size of an e-mail message that can be sent
through your server, type the desired value in kilobytes into the Maximum
message size box. Otherwise, leave this field blank.
4. If you want to protect mail accounts from hacker attacks by not allowing
the users to use simple passwords, select the required value from the
Minimal password strength menu.
There are five levels of strength:

Very weak - from 0 to 19 points.

Weak - from 20 to 39 points.

Medium - from 40 to 59 points.

Strong - from 60 to 79 points.
 Very strong - from 80 to 100 points.
According to the calculation algorithm used by the Panel, the strongest password
meets the following criteria: it is more than 8 characters in length, contains a
combination of letters in mixed case, numbers and special characters, like
!,@,#,$,%,^,&,*,?,_,~.
5. To protect your server against unauthorized mail relaying or injection of
unsolicited bulk mail, select the Enable message submission checkbox to
allow your customers to send e-mail messages through the port 587.
Also notify your customers that they need to specify in their e-mail programs'
settings the port 587 for outgoing SMTP connections, and be sure to allow
connections to this port in your firewall settings.
6. Select the mail relay mode.
With closed relay the mail server will accept only e-mail addressed to the users who
have mailboxes on this server. Your customers will not be able to send any mail
through your outgoing SMTP server, therefore, we do not recommend closing mail
relay.
With relay after authorization, only your customers will be able to receive and send
e-mail through your mail server. We recommend that you leave the authorization is
required option selected, and specify allowed authentication methods:

POP3 lock time. With POP3 authorization, once a user has successfully
authenticated to the POP server, he or she is permitted to receive and send email through the mail server for the specified period of time.
Server Configuration

61
SMTP. With SMTP authorization, your mail server requires authorization if the email message must be sent to an external address.
Note for Windows hosting users: If you do not wish to use relay restrictions
for networks that you trust, specify the network IP and mask in the Use no
relay restrictions for the following networks: field (e.g., 123.123.123.123/16) and
click the
icon. To remove a network from the list, click the
icon
corresponding to the network you wish to remove.
The relay hosts on the networks in the list are considered not to be potentially
operated by spammers, open relays, or open proxies. A trusted host could
conceivably relay spam, but will not originate it, and will not forge header
data. DNS blacklist checks will never query for hosts on these networks.
There is also an option to allow open relay without authorization, which, by default,
is hidden from the user interface. Opening mail relay without authorization is not
recommended because it allows spammers to send unsolicited mail through your
server. If you want to set the open relay, log in to the server's file system, locate the
file root.controls.lock in your Parallels Plesk Panel installation directory
(PRODUCT_ROOT_D/var/root.controls.lock on Unix and
PRODUCT_DATA_D/var/root.controls.lock on Windows platforms) and
remove the line /server/mail.php3:relay_open from this file. The open relay
option will show in your control panel.
7. Select the antivirus program that should be used on the server.
8. Select the spam protection options that should be used on the server.
Note: If you wish to set up spam protection systems, such as SpamAssassin spam
filter, or protection systems based on DomainKeys, DNS blackhole lists or Sender
Policy Framework (SPF), proceed to the section Setting Up Spam Protection (on
page 63).
9. If you are using Qmail mail server, you can also select the mail account
format.
Selecting the Use of short and full names is allowed option will allow users to log in to
their mail accounts by specifying only the left part of e-mail address before the @
sign (for example, username), or by specifying the full e-mail address (for example,
username@your-domain.com).
To avoid possible authorization problems for e-mail users who reside in different
domains but have identical user names and passwords, we highly recommend that
you choose the Only use of full mail account names is allowed option.
Once you have set your mail server to support only full mail account names, you
will not be able to switch back to supporting short account names until you make
sure there are no encrypted passwords for mailboxes and user accounts with
coinciding user names and passwords residing in different domains.
10. Click OK to submit any changes.
62
Server Configuration
In this section:
Setting Up Spam Protection .............................................................................. 63
Setting Up Virus Protection (Linux) .................................................................... 72
Setting Up Virus Protection (Windows) .............................................................. 74
Selecting Webmail Software .............................................................................. 74
Configuring Mailman Mailing List Software (Linux) ............................................ 75
Preventing Your Customers From Sending Mass E-mail (Linux) ....................... 75
Server Configuration
63
Setting Up Spam Protection
To protect your users from spam, you can use the following tools with your Panel:

SpamAssassin spam filter. It is a powerful spam filter that uses a wide variety of local
and network tests to identify spam signatures.
You can configure the spam filter so as to either delete suspicious messages when
they come to your mail server, or change the subject line and add "X-Spam-Flag:
YES" and "X-Spam-Status: Yes" headers to the messages. The latter can be useful
for users who prefer to filter mail with mail filtering programs installed on their own
computers.
To learn more about SpamAssassin, visit http://spamassassin.apache.org.
To configure and switch on the SpamAssassin filter, proceed to the section Setting
Up SpamAssassin Spam Filter (on page 65).

DomainKeys (available only for Linux hosting). DomainKeys is a spam protection
system based on sender authentication. When an e-mail claims to originate from a
certain domain, DomainKeys provides a mechanism by which the recipient system
can credibly determine that the e-mail did in fact originate from a person or system
authorized to send e-mail for that domain. If the sender verification fails, the
recipient system discards such e-mail messages. To configure the DomainKeys
system on your server, refer to the section Switching on Spam Protection Based on
DomainKeys (on page 67).

DNS blackhole lists. This spam prevention system is based on DNS queries made by
your mail server to a database, which contains known and documented sources of
spam, as well as an extensive listing of dynamic IP addresses. Any positive
response from this database should result in your mail server returning a '550' error,
or rejection of the requested connection.
To configure your mail server for working with DNSBL databases, proceed to the
section Switching On Spam Protection Based on DNS Blackhole Lists (on page 69).

Sender Policy Framework (available only for Linux hosting). This spam prevention
system is also DNS query-based. It is designed to reduce the amount of spam sent
from forged e-mail addresses. With SPF, an Internet domain owner can specify the
addresses of machines that are authorized to send e-mail for users of his or her
domain. Receivers that implement SPF then treat as suspect any e-mail that claims
to come from that domain but fails to come from locations that domain authorizes.
To learn more about SPF, visit http://www.openspf.org/howworks.html.
To enable filtering based on SPF, proceed to the section Setting Up Support for
Sender Policy Framework System (on page 70).

Server-wide black and white lists. Black and white lists are standard mail server
facilities. You can use black and white lists to block or receive mail from specific
servers. Your mail server retrieves domain names and IP addresses of servers
which attempt to establish connection with it. If a domain name is matched against
black list entries, your server refuses the connection. Thus, the potential spam
message will be never received. If an IP address is matched against white list
entries, your server receives a message from the sender without using the spam
protection systems such as sender authentication, greylisting, or DNSBL.
To set up server-wide black and white lists, proceed to the section Setting Up
Server-wide Black and White Lists (on page 69).
64
Server Configuration

Greylisting (available only for Linux hosting). Greylisting is a spam protection system
which works as follows: For every e-mail message that comes to the server,
sender's and receiver's e-mail addresses are recorded in a database. When a
message comes for the first time, its sender and receiver addresses are not listed in
the database yet, and the server temporarily rejects the message with an SMTP
error code. If the mail is legitimate and the sending server is properly configured, it
will try sending e-mail again and the message will be accepted. If the message is
sent by a spammer, then mail sending will not be retried: spammers usually send
mail in bulk to thousands of recipients and do not bother with resending.
The greylisting protection system also takes into account the server-wide and peruser black and white lists of e-mail senders: e-mail from the white-listed senders is
accepted without passing through the greylisting check, and mail from the blacklisted senders is always rejected.
When the greylisting support components are installed on the server, then
greylisting is automatically switched on for all domains. You can switch off and on
greylisting protection for all domains at once (at Tools & Settings > Spam Filter
Settings), or for individual subscriptions (in Control Panel > Mail tab > Change Settings).
In this section:
Setting Up SpamAssassin Spam Filter...............................................................65
Setting Up Spam Protection Based on DomainKeys (Linux) ..............................67
Switching On Spam Protection Based on DNS Blackhole Lists ..........................69
Setting Up Server-wide Black and White Lists ...................................................69
Setting Up Support for Sender Policy Framework System (Linux)......................70
Setting Up Spam Protection Based on Greylisting (Linux)..................................71
Server Configuration
65
Setting Up SpamAssassin Spam Filter
 To switch on SpamAssassin spam filter:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Spam Filter Settings (in the Mail group).
2. To allow server wide filtering based on the settings you define, select
the Switch on server-wide SpamAssassin spam filtering checkbox.
3. To let your users set their own spam filtering preferences on a permailbox basis, select the Apply individual settings to spam filtering checkbox.
4. If you wish to adjust the amount of system resources the spam filter
should use (available only for Linux hosting), type the desired value
from 1 to 5 into the Maximum number of worker spamd processes to run (1-5) box
(1 is the lowest load, and 5 is the highest). We recommend that you use
the default value.
5. If you wish to adjust the spam filter's sensitivity, type the desired value
in the The number of points a message must score to be considered spam box.
SpamAssassin performs a number of different tests on contents and subject line of
each message. As a result, each message scores a number of points. The higher
the number, the more likely a message is spam. For example, a message
containing the text string “BUY VIAGRA AT LOW PRICE!!!” in Subject line and
message body scores 8.3 points. By default, the filter sensitivity is set so that all
messages that score 7 or more points are classified as spam.

When your users receive lots of spam messages with the current setting, to
make filter more sensitive, try setting a lesser value in the The score that a
message must receive to qualify as spam box; for example, 6.

When your users are missing e-mails because your spam filter thinks they are
junk, try reducing filter sensitivity by setting a higher value in the The score that a
message must receive to qualify as spam box.
6. To reduce the load on your Windows server, you can select the Do not
filter if mail size exceeds specified size checkbox and specify the maximum
size of the message that the spam filter will test. Recommended mail
size limit is 150 - 250 Kbytes, which is usual for mail messages in
HTML format with images. The size of the mail is considered critical for
filter and server overload when it exceeds 500 Kbytes, which is usual
for mail messages containing attachments.
7. To make sure that the spam filter on your Windows server is not leaving
some e-mail messages unchecked (this can happen if the amount of
incoming mail is very large), limit the number of e-mail messages that
can be checked simultaneously in the Number of threads that spam filter can
create field.
8. Specify how to mark messages recognized as spam.
66
Server Configuration
At the server level, you cannot set the server-wide spam filter to automatically
delete spam: you can do it only on a per-mailbox basis. So, for the server-wide
policy, you can choose only marking messages as spam: “X-Spam-Flag: YES” and
“X-Spam-Status: Yes” headers are added to the message source by default, and if
you want, the spam filter will additionally include a specific text string to the
beginning of Subject line. To include a desired combination of symbols or words to
the message subject, type it into the Add the following text to the beginning of subject of
each message recognized as spam box. If you do not want the spam filter to modify
message subject, leave this box blank. If you want to include into the subject line
the number of points that messages score, type SCORE in this box.
9. If you use Parallels Plesk Panel for Windows, define the language
characteristics of mail that should always pass the filter by specifying
trusted languages and locales.

Select the required items from the boxes under Trusted languages and Trusted
locales and click Add >>.

Letters written in the specified languages and with the defined character sets
will not be marked as spam.
10. If you do not want your users to receive e-mail from specific domains or
individual senders, click the Black List tab, and then add the respective
entries to the spam filter’s black list:

To add entries to the black list, click Add Addresses. Separate addresses with a
coma, a colon, or a white space. You can use an asterisk (*) as a substitute for
a number of letters, and question mark (?) as a substitute for a single letter. For
example: address@spammers.net, user?@spammers.net, *@spammers.net.
Specifying *@spammers.net will block the entire mail domain spammers.net. If
you use a Windows-based server, also specify what to do with messages
coming from the specified addresses. To save the entries you added, click OK.

To remove entries from the black list, under the Black List tab, select the entries
and click Remove. Confirm removal and click OK.
11. If you want to be sure that you and your users will not miss e -mail from
specific senders, click the White List tab, and then add e-mail addresses
or entire domains to the spam filter’s white list:

To add entries to the white list, click Add Addresses. If you have a list of entries
stored in a file, click Browse to specify it, and then click OK. Otherwise, select the
From List option, and type the e-mail addresses into the E-mail addresses box.
Place each address in one row, or separate addresses with a coma, a colon, or
a white space. You can use an asterisk (*) as a substitute for a number of
letters, and question mark (?) as a substitute for a single letter. For example:
address@mycompany.com, user?@mycompany.com, *@mycompany.com.
Specifying *@mycompany.com will add to the white list all e-mail addresses that
are under the mycompany.com mail domain. To save the entries you added,
click OK, then confirm adding, and click OK again.

To remove entries from the white list, under the White List tab, select the entries
and click Remove. Confirm removal and click OK.
12. Once finished with setting up the spam filter, click OK.
Server Configuration
67
Now all the incoming mail will be filtered on the server side. By default, spam filter
does not delete spam mail, it only adds the "X-Spam-Flag: YES" and "X-SpamStatus: Yes" headers to the message, and "*****SPAM*****" text string to the
beginning of Subject line of each message recognized as spam.
If you have enabled the Apply individual settings to spam filtering option, then your
users will be able to set their spam filters so as to automatically delete junk mail.
They will also be able to set up their personal black and white lists of
correspondents that will override the server settings, and teach the spam filter on a
per-mailbox basis.
If you want to adjust spam filtering settings for a specific mailbox, refer to Control Panel
User's Guide, section Setting Up Protection from Spam.
Note: Panel exposes only basic SpamAssassin functionality. If you want to create
complex antispam rules, edit SpamAssassin configuration files. For more information
on advanced SpamAssassin configuration, refer to the Parallels Plesk Panel 10: Advanced
Administration Guide, Spam Protection for both Linux and Windows and other respective
documentation (say,
http://spamassassin.apache.org/doc/Mail_SpamAssassin_Conf.html
(http://spamassassin.apache.org/doc/Mail_SpamAssassin_Conf.html)).
Setting Up Spam Protection Based on DomainKeys (Linux)
 To switch on spam protection based on DomainKeys:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Mail Server Settings (in the Mail group).
2. Under the DomainKeys spam protection group, select the following options:

Allow signing outgoing mail. Selecting this option allows you and your customers to
switch on support for DomainKeys e-mail signing on a per-subscription basis
through the Control Panel (Control Panel > Mail tab > Change Settings). It does not
automatically switch on signing of outgoing e-mail messages.

Verify incoming mail. Selecting this option will configure the DomainKeys system
to check all e-mail messages coming to e-mail users under all domains hosted
on the server.
3. Click OK.
Now your mail server will check all incoming e-mail messages to ensure that they come
from the claimed senders. All messages, sent from the domains that use DomainKeys
to sign e-mail, which fail verification will receive the header DomainKey-Status: 'bad'.
All messages, sent from the domains that do not participate in the DomainKeys
program and do not sign e-mail, will be accepted without verifying.
 To switch on signing outgoing e-mail messages for all domains in a
subscription:
1. Go to Control Panel > Mail tab > Change Settings.
2. Select the Use DomainKeys spam protection system to sign outgoing e-mail
messages checkbox.
68
Server Configuration
3. Click OK.
Now, the following will happen for the selected domains:

Private keys are generated and placed in the server's database.

Public keys are generated and placed in the TXT resource records created in the
domains' DNS zones.

The sender's policy advertised in the DNS TXT resource records is set to "all e-mail
messages sent from this domain must be cryptographically signed; if someone
receives an e-mail message claiming to originate from this domain, which is not
signed, then this e-mail must be discarded."

Outgoing e-mail messages are digitally signed: the "DomainKeys-Signature"
header containing a signature based on a private key is added to the message
headers.
Server Configuration
69
Switching On Spam Protection Based on DNS Blackhole Lists
You can use free and paid subscription blackhole lists with your server. Visit
http://spamlinks.net/filter-dnsbl-lists.htm and choose a DNSBL server you want to use.
 To switch on spam protection based on DNSBL:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Mail Server Settings (in the Mail group).
2. Select the Switch on spam protection based on DNS blackhole lists checkbox.
3. In the DNS zones for DNSBL service input box, specify the host name that
your mail server should query, for example: sbl.spamhaus.org.
4. Click OK.
Now, e-mail messages from known spammers should be rejected with an error code
550 (connection refused).
Setting Up Server-wide Black and White Lists
 To reject connections from specific mail servers:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Mail Server Settings (in the Mail group).
2. Click the Black List tab.
3. Click Add Domain.
4. Specify the name of the domain from which you do not want to receive
e-mail. For example, 'evilspammers.net'.
5. Click OK.
6. Repeat steps from 3 to 5 to add as many domains as required.
 To assure mail reception from specific servers or networks:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Mail Server Settings (in the Mail group).
2. Click the White List tab.
3. Click Add Network.
4. Specify an IP address or range of IP addresses from which mail must
always be accepted.
5. Click OK.
6. Repeat steps from 3 to 5 to add as many addresses as required.
70
Server Configuration
Setting Up Support for Sender Policy Framework System (Linux)
 To set up support for Sender Policy Framework on your Linux-based
server:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Mail Server Settings (in the Mail group). The serverwide mail preferences screen will open on the Settings tab.
2. Select the Switch on SPF spam protection checkbox and specify how to deal
with e-mail:

To accept all incoming messages regardless of SPF check results, select the
Create only Received SPF-headers, never block option from the SPF checking mode
drop-down box. This option is recommended.

To accept all incoming messages regardless of SPF check results, even if SPF
check failed due to DNS lookup problems, select the In case of DNS lookup
problems, generate temporary errors option from the SPF checking mode drop-down
box.

To reject messages from senders who are not authorized to use the domain in
question, select the option Reject mail if SPF resolves to fail from the SPF checking
mode drop-down box.

To reject the messages that are most likely from senders who are not authorized
to use the domain in question, select the option Reject mail if SPF resolves to softfail
from the SPF checking mode drop-down box.

To reject the messages from senders who cannot be identified by SPF system
as authorized or not authorized because the domain has no SPF records
published, select the option Reject mail if SPF resolves to neutral from the SPF
checking mode drop-down box.

To reject the messages that do not pass SPF check for any reason (for
example, when sender's domain does not implement SPF and SPF checking
returns the "unknown" status), select the option Reject mail if SPF does not resolve
to pass from the SPF checking mode drop-down box.
3. To specify additional rules that are applied by the spam filter before the
SPF check is actually done by the mail server, type the rules you need
in the SPF local rules box.
We recommend that you add a rule for checking messages against the open
database of trusted senders, for example, 'include:spf.trusted-forwarder.org'. For
more information on SPF rules, visit http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc4408.
4. To specify the rules that are applied to domains that do not publish SPF
records, type the rules into the SPF guess rules box.
For example: v=spf1 +a/24 +mx/24 +ptr ?all
5. To specify an arbitrary error notice that is returned to the SMTP sender
when a message is rejected, type it into the SPF explanation text box.
If no value is specified, the default text will be used as a notification.
6. To complete the setup, click OK.
Server Configuration
71
Setting Up Spam Protection Based on Greylisting (Linux)
When the greylisting support components are installed on the server, greylisting
protection is automatically switched on for all domains. Therefore, no additional actions
are required. If you do not want to use greylisting protection, you can switch it off.
 To switch off greylisting protection for all domains:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Spam Filter Settings (in the Mail group).
2. Clear the Switch on server-wide greylisting spam protection checkbox.
3. Click OK.
 To switch on greylisting protection for all domains:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Spam Filter Settings (in the Mail group).
2. Select the Switch on server-wide greylisting spam protection checkbox.
3. Click OK.
 To switch off greylisting protection for all domains in a subscription:
1. Go to Control Panel > Mail tab > Change Settings.
2. Clear the Switch on greylisting spam protection for all mail accounts under this
domain checkbox.
3. Click OK.
 To switch on greylisting protection for all domains in a subscription:
1. Go to Control Panel > Mail tab > Change Settings.
2. Select the Switch on greylisting spam protection for all mail accounts under this
domain checkbox.
3. Click OK.
72
Server Configuration
Setting Up Virus Protection (Linux)
To provide your e-mail users with anti-virus protection, you can use either the Parallels
Premium Antivirus or Kaspersky Antivirus solutions. Both solutions can scan server's
mail traffic in real time, however, only Kaspersky Antivirus allows fine tuning and
filtering of specific file types from attachments.
The both programs require an additional license key with annual renewal. Check the
current prices with your provider or visit Parallels site.
 To install Parallels Premium Antivirus or Kaspersky Antivirus:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Updates. Updater will open in a new window
or tab.
2. Click Cancel updating.
3. Click Add Components.
4. In the list of components, expand the Additional mail services group,
and select either Parallels Premium antivirus or Kaspersky antivirus
module.
5. Click Continue.
After the installation is completed, obtain and install a license key for the selected
antivirus program, as described in the following steps.
6. Go to Tools & Settings > License Management.
7. Click Order New Key. The Parallels online store page listing available
add-ons opens in a new browser window.
8. On this page, select the checkbox next to Parallels Premium Antivirus
or Kaspersky Antivirus and click ADD TO MY BASKET.
9. Because Parallels Plesk Panel add-ons are added to the license keys
that already exist, you will need to specify the number of your license
key to which you add this feature and click Submit.
10. In the next steps, indicate the currency, number of keys, provide
contact details, billing address, and payment method, and submit the
form. You will be notified by e-mail when your order is processed.
11. When you receive the e-mail notice, return to the License Management
screen (Tools & Settings > License Management) and click
Retrieve Keys to retrieve the ordered license key. The Panel's License
Manager will retrieve the upgraded license key from the Parallels
licensing server and install it to your control panel.
12. Go to Tools & Settings > Virus Protection Settings (in the Mail group).
13. Under Antivirus preferences, select the antivirus you need and click OK.
Server Configuration
73
If you installed Parallels Premium Antivirus, you can switch on antivirus protection only
on a per-mailbox basis, and only after you have set up mailboxes. By default, virus
definitions are retrieved every 5 hours, and this setting is not changeable through the
control panel.
If you installed Kaspersky Antivirus, go to Tools & Settings > Kaspersky Antivirus to
configure it.
74
Server Configuration
Setting Up Virus Protection (Windows)
To protect your users from viruses and other malicious software that spreads itself
through e-mail, you may want to switch on antivirus service that comes with your
Parallels Plesk Panel.
 To set up and switch on antivirus for all users' mailboxes:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Virus Protection Settings (in the Mail group).
2. Select the desired scanning mode.
3. To allow users to adjust scanning settings for incoming and outgoing
mail, select the respective checkboxes.
4. Click OK.
The antivirus is now switched on. It will scan mail and delete all infected messages.
Selecting Webmail Software
You can install on the server a number of webmail software packages and select which
of them should be available to your users. Alternately, you can redirect your users to an
external webmail service. To do this, register an external webmail service address with
the Panel by adding a corresponding record.
All installed webmail packages and registered external webmail services are listed in
the mail settings of hosting plans and subscriptions (on the Mail tab). There you can
select which webmail to provision to users.
 To register an external webmail service:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Webmail (in the Mail group).
2. Click Register Webmail.
3. Specify the following:
a. Webmail service name.
b. Webmail service URL. Specify an address that begins with the
http:// or https:// prefix.
c. Leave the Available checkbox selected to make the registered
webmail service available for selection in hosting plan settings.
4. Click OK.
 To change the properties of an external webmail record:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Webmail (in the Mail group).
Server Configuration
75
2. Click the appropriate link in the Name column.
3. Make the required changes and click OK.
 To make a webmail service unavailable for inclusion into hosting plans:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Webmail (in the Mail group).
2. Do either of the following:

To make a service temporarily unavailable without actually removing it, select
the corresponding checkbox and click Disable.
This works for installed webmail software packages and for links to external
webmail services.

To permanently remove a service record, select the corresponding checkbox
and click Remove.
This way you can remove only links to external webmail services. Installed
software packages can be removed only by means of Parallels Products
Installer (Tools & Settings > Updates).
Configuring Mailman Mailing List Software (Linux)
To provide your customers with capabilities to run their own mailing lists or newsletters,
you should install the GNU Mailman package on your server (you could have done so
during installation of Parallels Plesk Panel), and set up the mailing list administrator's
account, otherwise, it will not work.
 To set up the mailing list administrator's account from your control panel:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Set Up Mailing Lists Server (in the Resources group).
2. Specify the username and password that you will use for administration
of mailing lists and their settings.
3. Click OK.
Once you have set up the Mailman administrator's account, you can configure the
mailing list software or change your administrative login and password by visiting the
URL: http://lists.yourservername.tld/mailman/admin/mailman
Note: After you have set up Mailman administrator's account, the Set Up Mailing Lists
Server icon will be no longer be accessible from the Panel.
Preventing Your Customers From Sending Mass E-mail
(Linux)
 To prevent your users from sending mass e-mail, do the following:
76
Server Configuration
1. Create a file named maxrcpt in the directory
$QMAIL_ROOT_D/qmail/control/
where $QMAIL_ROOT_D is the location defined in the file /etc/psa/psa.conf
file.
2. Type the number of allowed recipients in this file and save it.
Note that this number also affect sending of messages to mailing list or mail group
subscribers. That is, if you set the value to 100, then only 100 subscribers will receive
the message sent to a mailing list or a mail group.
When you no longer need to restrict the number of recipients, delete the maxrcpt file.
Connecting Database Servers
You can host users' databases either on a single server or on a number of different
servers. Having the user databases on a remote server can be useful in multi-server
installations, where centralized database hosting can be preferable for administration,
backup, and resource utilization. However, if you have a single Parallels Plesk Panel
server, you are advised to keep all databases on it.
 To use remote database servers with your hosting server, you need to:
1. Set up a remote database server:
a. Install MySQL, PostgreSQL, or Microsoft SQL software.
b. Set up database administrator's account.
c. Enable network access to the database server.
2. Configure Parallels Plesk Panel for working with your remote database
server.
In this section:
Adding Database Servers .................................................................................. 77
Connecting to External Databases (Windows) .................................................. 79
Server Configuration
77
Adding Database Servers
After you have set up the required remote database server, you need to register this
database server in the Panel.
 To register a database server with the Panel:
1. Log in to Parallels Plesk Panel.
2. Go to Tools & Settings > Database Servers, and click Add Database Server.
3. Specify the properties of the database server:

Specify database server engine in the Database server type menu.

Specify hostname or IP address of the database server.

Specify the port number the database server is listening on. This option is
available only for MySQL. By default, MySQL servers listen on port 3306. You
can leave the Port number box blank, if your MySQL database server is listening
on the default port.
Note: Do not enter the value for MySQL server port equal to 8306, because it is
used by Parallels Plesk Panel for communication with its internal database.

Specify which database type is running on the database server.

To make this database server default for hosting customers’ databases, select
the Use this server as default for MySQL checkbox. If you have a MS SQL database
server, select the checkbox Use this server as default for MS SQL labeled.

Specify the database server administrator's login name and password.
4. Click OK.
 To set up database hosting preferences that will affect all databases
created through Parallels Plesk Panel:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Database Hosting Preferences (in the Databases group).
2. To simplify maintenance of customers' databases, select the Add user's
login name and underscore to beginning of database names checkbox. All names
of newly created databases will look like username_database name.
This will allow you to locate databases related to a particular Parallels
Plesk Panel user. Note that even if you do not select this checkbox, on
creation of a new database, Parallels Plesk Panel will add a username
to the database name input box, and you will be able to edit it or
remove it.
78
Server Configuration
3. You can also set up the Panel to add usernames to corresponding
database user names, further simplifying the maintenance of customers'
databases. To do so, select the Add user's login name and underscore to the
beginning of database user names checkbox. All names of newly created
database users will look like username_database user name. This will
allow you to locate database users related to a particular Parallels
Plesk Panel user.
4. Specify whether creation of databases is allowed on your Parallels
Plesk Panel server. Some applications do not support remote
databases and can work only with databases hosted on the same
server. We recommend leaving the default option Allow local hosting of
databases for these web applications selected, otherwise, you will not be able
to use such applications.
5. Click OK.
If you want to back up databases hosted on a remote MS SQL Database Server you
set up earlier, you need to configure the backup settings for that MS SQL Database
Server.
 To configure backup settings for a remote MS SQL Database Server:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Database Servers and click the required remote MS
SQL Database Server name.
2. Specify the temporary directory for the remote MS SQL Database
Server in the Temporary network directory field.
This directory can be located anywhere in your network and it is required for
backing up and restoring MS SQL databases. This directory must be accessible
over the network by both the Parallels Plesk Panel server and the MS SQL server:
both the Panel and the user that is running remote MS SQL database server must
have read/write access to this directory.
3. Specify username and password required for accessing the temporary
network directory.
4. Click OK.
Server Configuration
79
Connecting to External Databases (Windows)
If you want your users to access the data from an external database management
system, you should use Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) drivers. For example,
you can install a Microsoft Access ODBC driver, creating a connection to external
Microsoft Access database, and let web applications use this database for storing their
data.
In this section:
Creating New Connections to External Databases (Windows) .......................... 79
Changing Settings of Existing ODBC Connections (Windows) .......................... 80
Removing Connections to External Databases (Windows) ................................ 80
Creating New Connections to External Databases (Windows)
To let web applications of your clients use external databases for storing the data, you
need to create connections to these external databases by installing appropriate ODBC
drivers.
 To install a new ODBC driver, creating a connection to an external
database:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > ODBC Data Sources.
2. Click Add New ODBC DSN.
3. Specify the ODBC connection name and description in the
corresponding fields.
4. Select the required driver in the Driver field.
5. Click OK.
6. Choose the appropriate options on the driver configuration screen.
Typically, you should specify the path to the database, user credentials
and other connection options, depending on the selected driver.
7. Click Test to check whether the connection will function properly with
provided settings. Click Finish to complete the creation.
80
Server Configuration
Changing Settings of Existing ODBC Connections (Windows)
 To change settings of an existing ODBC connection:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > ODBC Data Sources.
2. Click the required connection name in the list.
3. Change the settings as needed.
4. Click Test to check whether the connection will function properly with
new settings. Click Finish to save changes.
Removing Connections to External Databases (Windows)
 To remove a redundant ODBC connection:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > ODBC Data Sources.
2. Select a checkbox corresponding to the connection you want to remove.
3. Click Remove, confirm the removal and click OK.
Activating Third-Party Services
In this section:
Adobe ColdFusion (Linux) ................................................................................. 81
Google Services for Websites ........................................................................... 82
UNITY Mobile Services for Mobile Sites ............................................................ 86
Miva E-commerce Applications (Windows) ........................................................ 87
Miva E-commerce Applications (Linux).............................................................. 87
Modules and Add-ons (Linux) ............................................................................ 89
Server Configuration
81
Adobe ColdFusion (Linux)
If you want to support ColdFusion scripts on the server, you should obtain a distribution
package from Adobe and then install it on the server. Parallels Plesk Panel supports
Adobe ColdFusion versions 6, 7, and 8.
 After you have installed Adobe ColdFusion on your server, do the
following:
1. Login to Parallels Plesk Panel as administrator.
2. Go to Tools & Settings > Updates.
3. Click a link corresponding to the appropriate release version.
4. Select the checkbox corresponding to the ColdFusion support for Parallels
Panel item, and click Install. Confirm the installation when prompted.
5. Once the selected components are installed, go to Tools & Settings >
ColdFusion Settings (in the Applications group).
6. Specify the path to ColdFusion installation directory and click OK.
82
Server Configuration
Google Services for Websites
Parallels Plesk Panel provides hosting companies with the means to easily integrate
with Google Services for Websites.
Participation in the Google Services for Websites program offers the following benefits
for hosting providers and their customers:

Providers can receive referral fees when their customers enroll in the Google
AdSense program or subscribe to paid Google Site Search services.

Site owners can use Google tools to improve site visibility, add a high quality
search function and widgets that will engage and retain visitors, and monetize the
traffic to websites with relevant ads.
To learn more about the program, visit
http://www.google.com/webmasters/provider/overview.html and
http://www.google.com/webmasters/provider/faq.html.
 To integrate Parallels Plesk Panel-managed servers with Google Services
for Websites:
1. Visit http://services.google.com/feedback/webmaster_provider_signup
and sign up for a Google Apps account (Premier Edition), a Google
AdSense account, and a Google Affiliate Network account.
For every hosting server managed by Parallels Plesk Panel you need to create a
separate Google Apps account that is connected to Google AdSense and Google
Affiliate Network accounts.
Once your application is processed by Google and your company is approved for
the program, you will receive access credentials by e-mail.
2. Generate an RSA private key and a digital self-signed certificate by
using the free OpenSSL utility. This is included in your Linux distribution
or can be downloaded from http://www.openssl.org/related/binaries.html
and installed on Windows-based computers.
a. Issue the command openssl genrsa -out
rsaprivatekey.pem 1024.
This command generates a 1024-bit private key and stores it in the file
rsaprivatekey.pem. The resulting private key should be kept secret.
b. Issue the command openssl req -new -x509 -key
rsaprivatekey.pem -out rsacert.pem.
After you answer a number of questions, the certificate will be created and
saved as rsacert.pem. This is the file you will need to upload to Google Apps via
the Google Apps Control Panel when configuring SSO.
3. Log in as the administrator to your Google Apps Control Panel at
http://www.google.com/a/<your-google-apps-domain>.
4. Select Advanced Tools, and then Set up single sign-on (SSO).
Server Configuration
83
5. Do the following:
a. Select the Enable Single Sign-on checkbox.
b. In the Sign-in page URL field, specify the URL Error! Hyperlink
reference not valid..
c. In the Sign-out page URL field, specify the URL Error! Hyperlink
reference not valid..
d. In the Change password URL field, specify the URL Error!
Hyperlink reference not valid..
e. In the Verification certificate field, upload your certificate.
f. Click Save changes.
6. Log in to your Parallels Plesk Panel as the administrator.
7. Click the Tools & Settings link in the navigation pane, and then click
Settings of Google Services for Websites.
8. Specify the following settings:

Google Apps domain name.

Google Apps domain administrator's username.

Google Apps domain administrator's password.

Google Affiliate Network ID.

Private key file. If you created a private key file on a computer other than your
hosting server, use this field to upload the key file to the server.

Google AdSense API developer account e-mail.

Google AdSense API developer account password.
9. Click OK.
Now Parallels Plesk Panel is connected to your Google Apps domain account, and you
can create user accounts in the Panel and associate them with Google Apps user
accounts. These operations are described in the following section.
For information about using the Google Services for your own websites, see the Control
Panel User's Guide, section Using Google Services for Websites.
In this section:
Providing Access to Google Services on Websites............................................ 84
84
Server Configuration
Providing Access to Google Services on Websites
After you create a new user account in Parallels Plesk Panel, you need to associate
that account with a Google Apps user account.
 To create a Google Apps user account and associate it with a user
account in Parallels Plesk Panel:

For the Parallels Plesk Panel administrator's account, run the admin command line
utility with the option --create-gapps-account.
The path to the utility is /usr/local/psa/bin/admin on Linux systems, and
C:\Program Files\Parallels\Plesk\bin\admin.exe on Windows
systems.

For a Parallels Plesk Panel reseller's account, run the reseller command line
utility with the option --create-gapps-account <reseller's-usernamein-the-panel>.
The path to the utility is /usr/local/psa/bin/reseller on Linux systems, and
C:\Program Files\Parallels\Plesk\bin\reseller.exe on Windows
systems.

For a Parallels Plesk Panel customer's account, run the client utility with the
option --create-gapps-account <customer's-username-in-thepanel>.
The path to the utility is /usr/local/psa/bin/client on Linux systems, and
C:\Program Files\Parallels\Plesk\bin\client.exe on Windows
systems.
Now the user account in the Panel is associated with the newly created Google Apps
user account, and the following items appear in the user's Control Panel:

The Google Services for Websites links on the Home page and on the Websites &
Domains tab.

The Google Services for Websites page accessible via the aforementioned links.
This page enables users to add Custom Search engines to websites, create a new
Google AdSense account, and provides links to webmaster tools and useful
resources on the Google website. When users of Parallels Plesk Panel click these
links they are taken to their Google accounts where they are logged in
automatically.
 To associate a user account in Parallels Plesk Panel with an already
existing Google Apps user account:

For the Parallels Plesk Panel administrator's account, run the admin command line
utility with the options --link-gapps-account -gapps-login <googleapps-account-username> -gapps-passwd <google-apps-accountpassword>.
The path to the utility is /usr/local/psa/bin/admin on Linux systems, and
C:\Program Files\Parallels\Plesk\bin\admin.exe on Windows
systems.
Server Configuration
85

For a Parallels Plesk Panel reseller's account, run the reseller command line
utility with the options --link-gapps-account <reseller's-username-inthe-panel> -gapps-login <google-apps-account-username> gapps-passwd <google-apps-account-password>.
The path to the utility is /usr/local/psa/bin/reseller on Linux systems, and
C:\Program Files\Parallels\Plesk\bin\reseller.exe on Windows
systems.

For a Parallels Plesk Panel customer's account, run the client utility with the
options --link-gapps-account <customer's-username-in-the-panel>
-gapps-login <google-apps-account's-username> -gapps-passwd
<google-apps-account's-password>.
The path to the utility is /usr/local/psa/bin/client on Linux systems, and
C:\Program Files\Parallels\Plesk\bin\client.exe on Windows
systems.
If you need to remove a user account from the Panel, then you must first remove the
Google Apps account associated with this user, and then remove the user account
from the Panel.
 To remove a Google Apps account associated with a user:

For the Parallels Plesk Panel administrator's account, run the admin command line
utility with the option --remove-gapps-account.
The path to the utility is /usr/local/psa/bin/admin on Linux systems, and
C:\Program Files\Parallels\Plesk\bin\admin.exe on Windows
systems.

For a Parallels Plesk Panel reseller's account, run the reseller command line
utility with the option --remove-gapps-account <reseller's-usernamein-the-panel>.
The path to the utility is /usr/local/psa/bin/reseller on Linux systems, and
C:\Program Files\Parallels\Plesk\bin\reseller.exe on Windows
systems.

For a Parallels Plesk Panel customer's account, run the client utility with the
option --remove-gapps-account <customer's-username-in-thepanel>.
The path to the utility is /usr/local/psa/bin/client on Linux systems, and
C:\Program Files\Parallels\Plesk\bin\client.exe on Windows
systems.
86
Server Configuration
UNITY Mobile Services for Mobile Sites
Parallels Plesk Panel offers integration with UNITY Mobile online service, which
enables website owners to create and manage copies of their sites optimized for
viewing on mobile devices.
UNITY Mobile hosts the optimized site copies on their own servers. All subscription
fees and charges for UNITY Mobile services are covered by an additional license key
for Parallels Plesk Panel, which you can purchase from Parallels Online Store.
How it works:
1. A user creates a website with the domain name example.com and clicks the link
Create Mobile Site in Control Panel.
2. The user is prompted to specify a domain name for access to the mobile site copy.
The user specifies mobile.example.com.
3. The Panel connects to the UNITY Mobile hosting servers, sets up an account with
UNITY Mobile for the domain name mobile.example.com.
4. The user’s browser opens the UNITY Mobile website, where the user is
automatically logged in to their account and prompted to import their website from
the Panel-managed server.
5. After the site is imported and optimized for mobile viewing, it becomes accessible
by the address mobile.example.com. The Panel’s DNS server keeps a CNAME
record pointing to the site on a UNITY Mobile server.
The user can now perform the following operations on mobile site using links in
Control Panel:

Open site editor.

Remove mobile site.
 If you want to provision this service to your customers, do the following:
1. Purchase an additional license key at Parallels online store
(https://shop.marketplace.parallels.com) and install it to Parallels Plesk
Panel.
a. Go to Server Administration Panel > Tools & Settings > License
Management > Additional License Keys tab.
b. Click Upload Key.
c. Browse to the file and select it by clicking OK.
2. When setting up a reseller plan or a hosting plan (on page 235), go to
the Resources tab and in the Mobile sites box, specify a number of sites
that can be created and hosted with the UNITY Mobile service.
For more information about UNITY Mobile services, visit their website at
http://www.unitymobile.com.
Server Configuration
87
For instructions on managing mobile sites through Control Panel, refer to Control Panel
User's Guide, section Setting Up Mobile Sites.
Miva E-commerce Applications (Windows)
To allow your customers use Miva e-commerce solutions, you need to install the Miva
Empresa package on your server and enable support for Miva applications in hosting
plans. Note that your customers will need to obtain a license from Miva and specify its
serial number during the installation of Miva applications.
 To install the support for Miva E-commerce applications on your server:
1. Download and install the Miva Empresa package from Miva website on
your server. The installation instructions can be found here:
http://docs.smallbusiness.miva.com/enUS/merchant/WebHost/webhelp/web_host_resources.htm
2. Run Parallels Plesk Panel Reconfigurator, and then run the Correct disk
permissions task.
After Miva support is switched on in hosting plans, the customers can install and use
the required Miva applications. The installation instructions for Miva applications can be
found here: http://docs.smallbusiness.miva.com/enUS/merchant/WebHost/webhelp/web_host_resources.htm
To learn more about Miva solutions, refer to http://smallbusiness.miva.com/
Miva E-commerce Applications (Linux)
To allow your customers to use Miva e-commerce solutions, you need to install on the
server the Miva Empresa package shipped with Parallels Plesk Panel distribution (if
you did not install it during installation of Parallels Plesk Panel), and then switch on
support for Miva applications in hosting plans.
The Miva Fasttrack and Miva Merchant online store applications are shipped with
Parallels Plesk Panel as standard web applications, which you or your customers can
install from the Control Panel.
To learn more about Miva solutions, refer to http://docs.smallbusiness.miva.com/enUS/merchant/WebHost/webhelp/web_host_resources.htm
 To install the Miva Empresa package:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Updates.
2. Click the link corresponding to your version of Parallels Plesk Panel.
For example, Parallels Panel 10.0.
3. Locate the Miva Empresa Support item and select the checkbox on the left.
4. Click Install. Now the Miva Empresa server environment is installed.
88
Server Configuration
Server Configuration
89
Modules and Add-ons (Linux)
You can extend the functionality of your Panel without upgrading it. This can be done
by installing additional functional components, available as add-on modules developed
by Parallels or third parties.
The modules can be easily installed, removed, and configured directly from the Panel.
To obtain add-ons developed by Parallels partners, visit our online store at
http://www.parallels.com/store/plesk/partners/.
The links to the online store are also available from the following locations of your
Server Administration Panel:


Tools & Settings > Products from Parallels Partners.
Modules > Products from Parallels Partners.
 To install an add-on module:
1. Go to Modules > Manage Modules.
2. Click Add Module.
3. Click Browse to locate the required add-on module package file on your
local computer or network, select it and click OK.
Before you begin to use the add-on module, you should configure it. Configuration
steps vary depending on each module.
 To configure an add-on module:
1. Go to Modules > Manage Modules.
2. In the list of installed modules, click the module’s name presented as
link.
Some modules might require you to install a license key in order to be able to use
them. You can check out the terms of usage on the module developers' website, or
look them up in the Panel (Modules > Manage Modules): for each module installed, there
is a corresponding list entry accompanied by an icon, which shows whether a license
key is required.
There are three types of icon that indicate the following:
- the module does not require a license key.
- the module requires a license key, and the key is installed.
- the module requires a license key, but the key is not installed.
90
Server Configuration
If a module is provided by Parallels and it requires an additional license key, you can
obtain it from Parallels as described in the section Installing Additional License Keys for
Panel Add-ons (on page 33). In other cases, you should obtain the information on
installation of license keys for modules from the module developers.
 To remove an add-on module:
1. Go to Modules > Manage Modules.
2. Select a checkbox corresponding to the module you want to remove,
and click Remove.
3. Confirm the removal and click OK.
Server Configuration
91
Configuring ASP.NET (Windows)
ASP.NET is a flexible set of tools and web development technologies that allows you to
employ a number of applications based on ASP.NET framework. Parallels Plesk Panel
supports both 1.1.x and 2.0.x versions of the .NET framework and allows configuring
most of its settings. Most ASP.NET configuration settings that commonly need to be
customized in order for ASP.NET applications to function in a desirable way can be
edited through Parallels Plesk Panel.
 To configure the server-wide ASP.NET settings:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > ASP.NET Settings (in the Applications group). The
settings for ASP.NET 1.1.x and ASP.NET 2.0.x are located under the
corresponding tabs.
2. Set up the strings that determine database connection data for
ASP.NET applications which use databases. This option is available
only for ASP.NET 2.0.x.
When you open the ASP.NET configuration page for the first time, sample
connection parameters with common constructions are displayed. You can
delete them and specify your own strings.

To add a string, enter the required data into the Name and Connection Parameters
input fields and click
next to them.

To remove a string, click
next to it.
3. Set up custom error messages that will be returned by ASP.NET
applications in the Custom Error Settings field:


To set the custom error messages mode, select an appropriate option from the
Custom error mode menu:

On - custom error messages are enabled.

Off - custom error messages are disabled and detailed errors are to be
shown.

RemoteOnly - custom error messages are displayed only to remote clients,
and ASP.NET errors are shown to the local host.
To add a new custom error message (which will be applied unless the Off mode
was selected), enter the values in the Status Code and Redirect URL fields, and
click .

Status Code defines the HTTP status code resulting in redirection to the error
page.

Redirect URL defines the web address of the error page presenting
information about the error to the client.
Due to possible conflicts, you cannot add a new custom error message with an
error code that already exists, but you can redefine the URL for the existing
code.
92
Server Configuration

To remove a custom error message from the list, click
next to it.
4. Configure compilation settings in the Compilation and Debugging field:

To determine the programming language to be used as default in dynamic
compilation files, choose an entry from Page default language list.

To enable compiling retail binaries, leave the Enable debugging checkbox empty.

To enable compiling debug binaries, select the Enable debugging checkbox. In
this case, the source code fragments containing error will be shown in a
diagnostic page message.
Note: When running applications in debug mode, a memory and/or performance
overhead occurs. It is recommended to use debugging when testing an application
and to disable it before deploying the application into production scenario.
5. Configure encoding settings for ASP.NET applications in the Globalization
Settings section:

To set an adopted encoding of all incoming requests, enter an encoding value
into the Request encoding field (default is utf-8).

To set an adopted encoding of all responses, enter an encoding value into the
Response encoding field (default is utf-8).

To set an encoding which must be used by default for parsing of .aspx, .asmx,
and .asax files, enter an encoding value into the File encoding field (default is
Windows-1252).

To set a culture which must be used by default for processing incoming web
requests, select an appropriate item from the Culture list.

To set a culture which must be used by default when processing searches for a
locale-dependent resource, select an appropriate item from the UI Culture list.
6. Set a code access security trust level for ASP.NET applications in the
Code Access Security field.
CAS trust level is a security zone to which applications execution is assigned,
defining what server resources the applications will have access to.
Important: When an assembly is assigned a trust level that is too low, it does not
function correctly. For more information on the permissions levels see
http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/enus/dnnetsec/html/THCMCh09.asp?frame=true#c09618429_010.
7. Set client session parameters in the Session Settings field:

To set up the default authentication mode for applications, select an appropriate
item from the Authentication mode list. Windows authentication mode should be
selected if any form of IIS authentication is used.

To set up time that a session can remain idle before it is abandoned, enter the
appropriate number of minutes into the Session timeout field.
8. Сlick OK to apply all changes.
Note: Parallels Plesk Panel supports separate configurations for different versions of
the .NET framework (1.1.x and 2.0.x).
Server Configuration
93
Configuring IIS Application Pool
(Windows)
IIS application pool serves websites and web applications hosted on your server.
Dedicated IIS application pool allows your customers to have a level of isolation
between websites. Since each dedicated application pool runs independently, errors in
one application pool belonging to one user will not affect the applications running in
other application pools dedicated to other users.
By default, Parallels Plesk Panel offers a shared application pool for all users.
However, users can use dedicated application pools if this option is provided by the
hosting package.
IIS application pool can work in the following two modes:

Shared pool - one pool is used for all users and websites by default.

Dedicated pool - separate pool for every customer is provided. It is also possible to
allocate per-package pools within the customer's pool, that will isolate running
websites hosted under a particular package from other customer's websites.
 To change the IIS application pool working mode:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > IIS Application Pool.
2. Select the Global Settings tab.
3. Select the required mode and click OK.
 To limit the amount of CPU resources that the IIS application pool can
use:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > IIS Application Pool.
2. Select the Switch on CPU monitoring checkbox and provide a number (in
percents) in the Maximum CPU use (%) field.
3. Click OK.
 To stop all applications running in the server application pool:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > IIS Application Pool.
2. Click Stop.
 To start all applications in the application pool:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > IIS Application Pool.
2. Click Start.
94
Server Configuration
 To restart all applications running in the application pool:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > IIS Application Pool.
2. Click Recycle. This can be handy if some applications are known to have
memory leaks or become unstable after working for a long time.
Configuring E-mail Notifications
The Panel notifies you and your customers of disk space and bandwidth overage by
sending e-mail notifications. In addition to resource overage, the control panel can
notify the users when:

New user accounts are created.

New domains are added.

Hosting accounts are expired (expiration date is defined for user accounts and
websites separately).
 To view or modify the notification system settings:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Notifications (in the Logs & Notifications group).
2. By selecting the checkboxes in the Notifications table, specify the types
of control panel users or external e-mail users who should receive
notices on events.
3. To view or edit the default notice text, click the respective
Text column.
icon in the
In notices you can use tags that will be replaced with actual data (see the table
below).
4. Specify when to send the user account and website expiration notices.
By default, such notices are sent 10 days in advance. Click OK.
Tags used in notification messages
Event type
Tags that can be used in notices
The data that tags denote
Creation of a
reseller or
customer
account
<reseller_contact_name>
user's first and last name
<user_contact_name>
<reseller_login>
<user_login>
user name for authorization in the
Panel
Server Configuration
95
<password>
user's password for authorization
in the Panel
<reseller_company_name>
company name
<user_company_name>
<reseller_cr_date>
user account creation date
<user_cr_date>
<reseller_phone>
phone number
<user_phone>
<reseller_fax>
fax number
<user_fax>
<reseller_country>
country
<user_country>
<reseller_state_province>
state or province
<user_state_province>
<reseller_city>
city
<user_city>
<reseller_postal_ZIP_code>
postal or ZIP code
<user_postal_ZIP_code>
<reseller_address>
address
<user_address>
<reseller_id>
<user_id>
Addition of a
new website to
the server
unique identifier assigned by the
system
<hostname>
host name for access to the
Panel
<domain_name>
domain name
<reseller_login>
user name for authorization in the
Panel
<user_login>
96
Server Configuration
<reseller_contact_name>
user's first and last name
<user_contact_name>
Subscription
expiration
notices
<dom_id>
unique identifier assigned by the
system
<ip>
IP address the website is hosted
on
<domain_name>
subscription name
<reseller_login>
user name for authorization in the
Panel
<user_login>
<reseller_contact_name>
user's first and last name
<user_contact_name>
<dom_id>
unique identifier assigned by the
system
<domain_expiration_date>
subscription expiration date
Resource
<domain_name>
overuse notices
<reseller_login>
<user_login>
<reseller_contact_name>
subscription name
user name for authorization in the
Panel
user's first and last name
<user_contact_name>
<disk_usage>
information about disk space
usage
<disk_space_limit>
information about the amount of
disk space allocated to the
account
<resource_table>
information about all resource
limits that were or will soon be
reached
<traffic>
information about bandwidth
usage
<traffic_limit>
information about the bandwidth
amount allotted to the account
Server Configuration
97
Note: If you upgraded to Parallels Plesk Panel from an earlier version, then all custom
notice templates you previously used remain in effect. Because of changes in user
accounts hierarchy and addition of resource overuse scheme, now any type of
resource can be overused. Therefore, to show information about all overused
resources in notice templates, we recommend using a single variable <resource_table>
instead of the variables <disk_usage>, <disk_space_limit>, <traffic>, and
<traffic_limit>.
Setting Up Help Desk
To allow your customers to submit problem reports through Control Panel, you can do
the following:
1. Set up a subscription for hosting your corporate website.
2. Install on your site the application osTicket 1.6 or later from Application Catalog.
Among available free solutions, osTicket is considered the best for its ease of use
and feature set. For information about osTicket, visit their website at
http://osticket.com.
 To set up a subscription for hosting your own website:
1. In Server Administration Panel, click the Subscriptions link in the
navigation pane, under the Hosting Services group.
2. Click Add New Subscription.
3. Type the domain name of your corporate site, for example providerexample.com.
4. Select IP address.
5. Type the username and password that you will use for connecting to the
webspace over FTP and managing files.
6. In the Service plan menu, select Unlimited to allow your site to consume
unlimited amounts of resources.
7. Click OK.
Next time you log in to Server Administration Panel, the Install Help Desk link will appear
in the navigation pane. You can use it to install osTicket on your website.
 If you want to start installation immediately, without logging out and then
logging in again:
1. Click the link Control Panel next to your site's domain name. Control
Panel will open in a new browser window or tab.
2. On the Home tab, click the osTicket link in the Applications group.
3. Click Install.
98
Server Configuration
4. Read the terms of license agreement, confirm that you accept them,
and click Next.
5. To open all application settings, click the link Show All Settings and
specify the following:

Path to the installation directory on the server.

Administrative access to the application. Leave the Grant administrative access to
existing user option selected, and select Admin from the menu if you want to use
your site's FTP account username and password for managing Help Desk.

Administrator's e-mail. Specify the Help Desk administrator's e-mail address.

Website name. For example, Company Name customer service portal.

Default system e-mail. Specify an e-mail address that you will advertise on your
site as a means to contact your support engineers. For example,
support@example.com.

Database administrator's password.
6. Click Install.
Once installation is finished, you will be able to use the Help Desk link in the navigation
pane of Server Administration Panel for configuring Help Desk and processing tickets
submitted by your customers and customers of your resellers.
The customers will be able to submit tickets by clicking the link Help Desk in their Control
Panels, in the Custom Buttons group.
Optimizing Apache Web Server (Linux)
You can switch off the Apache web server modules that are not critical to hosting
services in Tools & Settings > Apache Modules. This will allow you to lower server
resources consumption (say, get the smaller RAM footprint that is critical to VPS) and,
as a result, serve more hosting customers on a server.
Note that some modules are interdependent and can be switched off (on) only when
the modules they depend on are off (on). For example, the cache module depends on
disk_cache, file_cache, and mem_cache modules. This means that you cannot switch
off cache until its three dependent modules are off.
Caution: This feature is for advanced users only. Toggle modules only if you
completely understand the consequences of your actions. Note that some
modifications may decrease the Apache performance or even lead to its inoperability.
In addition, these changes may affect certain Panel functions. For example, if you turn
off mod_perl or mod_php, the Perl and PHP scripts (including webmail) will stop
working on websites. This may cause the situations when you offer the feature that
does not work in a service plan.
Depending on your operating system, the following Apache modules are always
enabled:
Server Configuration
Debian or Ubuntu:

env

auth_digest

authn_file

authz_host

authz_user

actions

alias

dav

dav_fs

mime

ssl
Redhat or CentOS:

env

auth_digest

authn_file

authz_host

authz_user

actions

alias


autoindex
dav

dir

log_config


mime
negotiation

setenvif

ssl
SUSE:

env

auth_digest

authn_file

authz_host

authz_user

actions


alias
dav
99
100
Server Configuration

dir

log_config
Server Configuration
101
Configuring Customer Acquisition
Scenarios
This section describes how to set up a scenario for acquiring more hosting customers
with Web Presence Builder trial sites.
In this scenario, prospective customers visiting your site and existing customers can
create websites with all available functionality in the included Web Presence Builder
application. However, to publish the created websites, the prospective customers are
offered to subscribe to a hosting service, and existing customers are offered to upgrade
to another hosting plan or order a plan add-on.
This scenario works only if you installed Parallels Plesk Panel with the Customer and
Business Manager component.
To learn more about using the scenario, refer to the document How to Set Up Customer
Acquisition Scenario, which is available at
http://www.parallels.com/eu/products/plesk/documentation/.
 To enable the Web Presence Builder trial mode:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Customer Acquisition Scenario Settings.
2. Specify Trial website lifetime. This is how much time should pass before
those trial websites that were not purchased by customers are removed
from the server.
3. To attract new customers by advertising hosting with Web Presence
Builder and providing Web Presence Builder demo to them, select the
Enable public access to trial mode checkbox. Below you will find the Trial mode
access URL. This link will open Web Presence Builder in trial mode.
Publish this link on your website to advertise hosting with Web
Presence Builder and attract customers.
4. To display additional notification about Web Presence Builder working
in trial mode, select the Display trial mode notification in Web Presence Builder
editor checkbox. Trial mode notifications in Web Presence Builder editor
can be customized.
5. Click OK.
In this section:
Customizing Web Presence Builder Trial Mode Notifications ............................ 102
102
Server Configuration
Customizing Web Presence Builder Trial Mode
Notifications
You can customize notifications displayed to your customers by Web Presence Builder
in trial mode, for example to add links to your online store. By default, Web Presence
Builder in trial mode uses messages from the tbbMessagesDefault.lng file of the
used locale.
 To customize notifications displayed to your customers by Web Presence
Builder in trial mode:
1. Go to the /usr/local/sb/resources/locale/<locale_name>
directory on Linux operating systems, or to
C:\Parallels\Plesk\sb\resources\locale\<locale_name>
directory on Windows operating systems.
<locale_name> is the name of locale for which you change the notifications. For
example, the default English locale name is en_US.
2. Copy the tbbMessagesDefault.lng and rename it to
tbbMessagesCustom.lng.
When there is the tbbMessagesCustom.lng file, Web Presence Builder uses it
instead of tbbMessagesDefault.lng.
3. Edit messages in the tbbMessagesCustom.lng file.
The following table lists the messages that you can edit.
Message Keyword in Locale
Message Description
startUpsellLimitExceedingTitle
Title of the dialog window shown on Web Presence
Builder start page to a customer who exceeded the limit of
websites published with Web Presence Builder.
startUpsellLimitExceedingBody Body of the dialog window shown on Web Presence
Builder start page to a customer who exceeded the limit of
websites published with Web Presence Builder.
startUpsellNoSitesTitle
Title of the dialog window shown on Web Presence
Builder start page to a customer whose subscription does
not include Web Presence Builder.
startUpsellNoSitesBody
Body of the dialog window shown on Web Presence
Builder start page to a customer whose subscription does
not include Web Presence Builder.
editorTopMessageTrialSite
"Call to action" bar message at the top of Web Presence
Builder Editor shown to a new customer who creates a
trial site.
Server Configuration
editorTopMessageUpsellLimit
Exceeding
"Call to action" bar message for a trial site at the top of
Web Presence Builder Editor shown to a customer who
exceeded the limit of websites published with Web
Presence Builder.
editorTopMessageUpsellNoSit "Call to action" bar message for a trial site at the top of
es
Web Presence Builder Editor shown to a customer whose
subscription does not include Web Presence Builder.
defaultPersonalName
Default name of the customer shown on Web Presence
Builder start page to existing customers.
initialMailSubject
Subject of website creation e-mail confirmation sent to a
new customer.
initialMailHtml
Body of website creation e-mail confirmation sent to a new
customer.
limitsExceededTitle
Title of the dialog window shown upon clicking the Publish
button to a customer who exceeded the limit of websites
published with Web Presence Builder.
limitsExceededMsg
Body of the dialog window shown upon clicking the
Publish button to a customer who exceeded the limit of
websites published with Web Presence Builder.
firstSitePublishTitle
Title of the dialog window shown upon clicking the Publish
button to a customer whose subscription does not include
Web Presence Builder.
firstSitePublishMsg
Body of the dialog window shown upon clicking the
Publish button to a customer whose subscription does not
include Web Presence Builder.
licenseExceededMsg
Error message shown in Status bar upon clicking the
Publish button to a customer when the number of Web
Presence Builder websites allowed by Plesk license has
been reached.
trialSiteSignUpPublishTitle
Title of the dialog window shown upon clicking the Publish
button to a new customer who creates a trial site.
trialSiteSignUpPublishMsg
Body of the dialog window shown upon clicking the
Publish button to a new customer who creates a trial site.
trialFeatureDisabled
Error message shown in Status bar when a new customer
tries to verify ownership in settings of a trial site.
103
104
Server Configuration
You can use the following placeholders in Web Presence Builder trial mode
notifications:

ppServerId - unique ID of Parallels Plesk Panel server;

billingSignUpEntryPoint - entry point to Business Manager for new customers;

billingUpSellEntryPoint - entry point to Business Manager for existing
customers;

subscriptionId - unique ID of the user subscription;

sbSiteUuid - unique ID of a website in Web Presence Builder;

sbOneTimeBackUrl - link Web Presence Builder that can be used only once;

locale - locale name;

trialSiteLifeTime - time that passes before trial websites that were not purchased
by customers are removed from the server;

trialSiteExpireDate - expiration date of trial websites;

trialSiteUrl - link to trial website;

siteOwnerName - name of the user owning the website;

siteOwnerCompanyName - user's company name;

siteOwnerEmail - user's e-mail;

siteOwnerPhone - user's phone;

siteOwnerAddress - user's address;

siteOwnerCity - user's city;

siteOwnerCountry - user's country;

queryString - an additional query string passed to trial mode access URL;

helpUrl - link to Web Presence Builder documentation;

sbHttpHost - HTTP link to Web Presence Builder host.
When using placeholders in messages, use the following placeholder markers:

&placeholder_name& - when you use a placeholder inside a hyperlink;

@placeholder_name@ - when you use a placeholder inside a JavaScript code;

%placeholder_name% - when you use a placeholder in plain text.
CHAPTER 6
Server Administration
In this chapter:
Appearance and Branding ................................................................................. 106
Web Server ....................................................................................................... 112
Statistics and Monitoring ................................................................................... 113
Event Tracking .................................................................................................. 127
Third-Party Components ................................................................................... 131
Database Servers ............................................................................................. 132
Applications ....................................................................................................... 134
System Time and Services ................................................................................ 143
Mail ................................................................................................................... 145
Scheduling Tasks .............................................................................................. 147
Additional Administrator Accounts (Windows) ................................................... 152
Backup and Restoration .................................................................................... 155
Remote Access (Windows) ............................................................................... 162
Sharing Files and Folders.................................................................................. 163
Panel Updates and Upgrades ........................................................................... 183
Mass E-mail Notifications .................................................................................. 188
Managing Panel from Mobile Devices ............................................................... 193
Migrating Data from Other Hosting Platforms .................................................... 195
CHAPTER 7
Appearance and Branding
In this chapter:
Appearance ....................................................................................................... 106
Branding............................................................................................................ 112
Appearance
In this section:
Interface Preferences ........................................................................................ 107
Changing Interface Language ........................................................................... 107
Setting Up Interface Languages ........................................................................ 109
Adding and Removing Custom Buttons ............................................................. 110
Server Administration
107
Interface Preferences
Changing Panel View
Depending on your goals, Panel provides two different views you can choose from
when working with Panel:

Select Service Provider if you use Panel for selling web hosting.

Select Power User if you use Panel for own needs.
Read more about the views in Becoming Familiar with Parallels Plesk Panel (on page 17).
To quickly change your view, go to Tools & Settings > Interface Management.
Hiding and Unhiding Sets of Buttons
You can easily hide predefined groups of buttons from the Panel. In this case, users do
not see the controls they are not allowed to operate or the features that are not
supported (services not installed).
 To hide groups of buttons:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Interface Management (in the Control Panel Appearance
group) > Interface Controls Visibility tab.
2. Select the checkboxes to hide the following sets of buttons:

Buttons related to services provided by MyPlesk.com online store. If you are
reselling domain registration services and SSL certificates, select the
checkboxes Hide buttons for domain registration, Hide buttons for certificate
purchasing, and Hide buttons for extra services. All buttons related to MyPlesk.com
will be removed from the control panel at all user levels.

Mail bounce controls. If you wish to prohibit your users from using their own mail
bounce policies for e-mail addressed to non-existent e-mail recipients within
their domains, select the Hide controls for rejection of messages for non-existent mail
addresses checkbox.

News feeds shown on default website pages.

Parallels Virtuozzo Containers promotional links in the Panel.
3. Click OK.
 To make groups of hidden buttons visible in the interface:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Interface Management (in the Control Panel Appearance
group) > Interface Controls Visibility tab.
Clear the corresponding checkboxes to make the hidden groups of buttons again
visible in the interface, then click OK.
Changing Interface Language
108
Server Administration
 To change the interface language and other settings for your Panel:
1. Click the Profile & Preferences link in the navigation pane.
2. Specify the following:
a
Administrator's interface language. Select the language for your Panel.
b
Button label length. To prevent lengthy button captions in languages other than
English from overlapping in the Panel, you may want to specify a limit here. Any
button caption longer than the defined limit will be shortened and ended with
ellipsis (...).
c
Allow multiple sessions under administrator's login. By default Parallels Plesk Panel
allows multiple simultaneous sessions for several users logged in to the Panel
using the same login and password combination. This can be useful when
delegating management functions to other users or in case if you accidentally
close your browser without logging out, thus becoming unable to log in again
until your session expires. You may want to switch off this capability, if you do
not need it.
 To select the default interface language for your customers:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Languages (in the Panel Appearance group).
2. Select a checkbox corresponding to the language that will be set as
default for new Panel users and click Make Default.
Server Administration
109
Setting Up Interface Languages
Panel 10 includes language packs, the translations of user interface into different
languages. If you would like to see the list of supported languages, refer to the product
release notes available at http://www.parallels.com/products/plesk/docs/. All the
supported languages are installed during the Panel installation (either clean installation
or upgrade), and do not require any additional actions from you to start using them.
The number of languages you can use depends on the Panel license you purchased.
The Panel will alert you when you attempt to use more languages than allowed.
 To view the interface languages installed in the Panel:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Languages (in the Panel Appearance group). The
following information is displayed:

Language status icon shows the current status of the language pack:
language pack is accessible to users,
not accessible,
the language pack
is not available to users because the limit on the number of language packs
supported by your current license is exceeded.
Note: you can make a language unavailable to control panel users. To do this,
click an icon . To make a language available to users, click an icon .

Language pack contains the four-letter language code;

Language shows the name of the language;

Country displays the countries where this language is native;

Used displays the number of control panel users at all levels that use this
language in their interface.
 To select a new default language for the Panel:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Languages (in the Panel Appearance group).
2. Select the checkbox corresponding to the language you wish to set as
default and click Make Default.
110
Server Administration
Adding and Removing Custom Buttons
You can add custom hyperlink buttons to the Panel and make them visible for your
resellers and customers. The links may lead to web resources, such as your corporate
site, or to a web application that can process online requests and accept additional
information about the users who click these links.
You can specify what information about users should be passed:

Subscription ID.

Primary domain name associated with a subscription.

FTP account username and password.

Customer's account ID, name, e-mail, and company name.
You can place the buttons in the following locations of the Server Administration Panel
and Control Panel, and decide who should be able to see them:

On the Home page in the Server Administration Panel, visible only to you and to the
users logged in under additional administrator accounts. This is achieved by
selecting the Administrator's Home page option in the button properties.

On the Home page in the Server Administration Panel, visible only to your resellers.
This is achieved by selecting the Reseller's Home page option in the button properties.

On the Home tab in the Control Panel, visible to the hosting service customers and
their users who are allowed to log in to the Control Panel. This is achieved by
selecting the Customer's Home page option in the button properties.

On the Websites & Domains tab in the Control Panel, visible to the hosting service
customers and their users who are allowed to log in to the Control Panel. This is
achieved by selecting the Websites & Domains page of Subscription option in the button
properties.

On the Home page in the Server Administration Panel and Control Panel, visible to
you, all resellers and customers. This is achieved by selecting the Common access
option in the button properties.
 To add a custom hyperlink button to the Server Administration Panel or
Control Panel:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Custom Buttons (in the Control Panel Appearance
group), and click Add Link to Service.
2. Specify the following properties of the button:

Type the text that will show on your button in the Button label box.

Choose the location for your button.

Specify the priority of the button. Your custom buttons will be arranged in the
Panel in accordance with the priority you define: the lower the number, the
higher the priority. Buttons are placed in the left-to-right order.
Server Administration
111

To use an image for a button background, type the path to its location or click
Browse to browse for the desired file. It is recommended that you use a 16x16
pixels GIF or JPEG image for a button to be placed in the navigation pane, and
32x32 pixels GIF or JPEG image for buttons placed in the main frame or
desktop.

Type the hyperlink of your choice to be attached to the button into the URL box.

Using the checkboxes, specify whether you want the customer information and
other data to be transferred within the URL. These data can be used for
processing by external web applications.

In the Tooltip text input field, type in the help tip that will be displayed when you
hover the mouse pointer over the button.

Select the Open URL in Parallels Panel checkbox if you want the destination URL to
be opened in the main frame of the Panel, otherwise, leave this checkbox
cleared to open the URL in a separate browser window or tab.

If you want to make this button visible only to you, select the Show to me only
checkbox.
3. Click Finish to complete creation.
 To remove a hyperlink button from the Panel:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Custom Buttons (in the Control Panel Appearance
group).
2. Select a checkbox corresponding to the button that you want to remove
and click Remove.
112
Server Administration
Branding
Configure your own branding for Parallels Plesk Panel by modifying page titles, logo, or
applying custom Panel themes (former skins). The branding tools are available in Tools
& Settings > Panel Branding (in the Panel Appearance group).
Here we provide details about each of the options:

Title of Panel pages is the title your customers see at the top of the browser window
when they log in to Panel. By default, it is Parallels Plesk Panel 10.4.0.

Logo is a banner in the top frame visible to your customers when they log in to their
Panels. You can also make your logo a clickable hyperlink.You should use a GIF,
JPEG, or PNG format file for your logo, preferably not larger than 100 kilobytes to
minimize the download time. It is recommended that you use an image of 50 pixels
in height.
In addition to these two options, you are able to change the visual appearance and
branding of the Panel by applying custom themes. For information about using custom
themes, refer to the document Customizing Panel Appearance and Branding.
Web Server
In this section:
Adjusting Session Preferences .......................................................................... 113
Server Administration
113
Adjusting Session Preferences
You can adjust the allowed idle time for all sessions in Parallels Plesk Panel as
required.
 To adjust session security parameters:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Session Idle Time (in the Security group).
2. Specify the required Session idle time in minutes in the appropriate field.
Should a user session remain idle for the time period exceeding the one
specified as the Session idle time, the control panel terminates this
session.
3. Click OK.
 To allow IP changes during one client session (available only on Windows
hosting):
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Session Idle Time (in the Security group).
2. Select the Allow IP changes during one session checkbox. This option will
allow customers with dynamic IP addresses and unstable Internet
connection to work with Parallels Plesk Panel at the cost of increasing
the security risks.
3. Click OK.
 To reset all parameters back to their default values:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Session Idle Time (in the Security group) and click
Default. The default session idle time will be set to 30 minutes.
2. Click OK.
Statistics and Monitoring
In this section:
Configuring Statistics......................................................................................... 114
Logging Actions Performed by Your Customers in the Panel ............................ 115
Viewing Statistics .............................................................................................. 118
Tracking Server Health with Health Monitor ...................................................... 121
Monitoring Connections to the Panel and FTP Services .................................... 124
114
Server Administration
Configuring Statistics
After installation, Parallels Plesk Panel's statistics utility is set up to:

Count the inbound and outbound traffic.

Count the disk space occupied by web content, log files, databases, mailboxes,
web applications, mailing list archives, and backup files.

Keep the web statistics and traffic statistics gathered by Webalizer or AWstats
programs only for the last three months.
 To review or adjust these settings:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Settings of Server Statistics (in the General group).
2. Under the System preferences group, specify the term during which the
bandwidth usage statistics should be kept for your customers.
3. Specify the items that should be considered when disk space and
bandwidth usage is calculated.
4. Click OK.
Note: In addition to the settings related to statistics, this screen provides the means to
rename your server's hostname, and the option to allow or forbid users to create new
subdomains and domain aliases in the DNS zones belonging to other users (the Do not
let users create DNS subzones in other users' DNS superzones checkbox). We recommend
that you select this checkbox, otherwise, users will be able to create subdomains under
domains belonging to other users, and set up websites and e-mail accounts which
could be used for spamming or even phishing or identity theft.
For instruction on viewing statistics, refer to the chapter Viewing Statistics (on page 118).
Server Administration
115
Logging Actions Performed by Your Customers in the
Panel
You may wish to keep track of actions performed by various users in the system. All actions
will be recorded in a log file that you will be able to download for viewing. The following
system events (actions) can be logged:

Administrator information changed

System service restarted, started, or stopped

IP address added, removed, changed


Login settings (allowed period of inactivity for all user sessions in the control panel)
changed
Customer account created, deleted, personal or system information changed

The status of customer account changed (suspended/activated)

Customer's interface preferences changed


Customer's IP pool changed
Web applications were added to or removed from a customer's pool

The limit on disk space is reached for a customer account

The limit on traffic usage is reached for a customer account


The limit on disk space is reached for a website
The limit on traffic usage is reached for a website

Website created, deleted, settings changed


Website owner changed
Website status changed (suspended/activated)

DNS zone updated for a website

Subdomain created, deleted, settings changed


Domain alias created, deleted, settings changed
DNS zone of the domain alias changed

Resource allotments were changed for a customer account

Customer's permissions for operations were changed


Resource allotments were changed for a website
Users logged in and out of the Panel

Mail accounts created, deleted, changed

Mailing lists created, deleted, settings changed


Website hosting set up, deleted, changed
Web forwarding hosting accounts were created, deleted, reconfigured

Web application installed, reconfigured, uninstalled

Web application package installed, uninstalled, updated

License key expired or updated

Database server created, deleted, updated

Database created or deleted
116
Server Administration

Database user account created, deleted, updated


Customer's GUID updated
Domain's GUID updated

Parallels Plesk Panel component was updated or added
In this section:
Setting Up Action Logging................................................................................. 116
Downloading the Action Log ............................................................................. 116
Clearing the Action Log ..................................................................................... 117
Setting Up Action Logging
 To set up action logging:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Action Log (in the Logs & Notifications group).
2. In the Logged actions group, select the actions to be logged using the
checkboxes.
3. In the Store records in the database field, specify the action log cleaning options:
on a daily, weekly or monthly basis, or in accordance with the specified
number of records stored in the database.
4. To retain all action log records, select the Do not remove records option.
5. To apply all the changes made, click OK.
Downloading the Action Log
 To download the action log to your machine:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Action Log (in the Logs & Notifications group).
2. In the Log files section, select the time period using the drop-down boxes, and
click Download.
The dialog window will open, prompting you to select the location for the downloaded log
file to be saved to.
3. Select the location, and click Save.
Server Administration
Clearing the Action Log
 To clear the action log:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Action Log (in the Logs & Notifications group).
2. In the Log files section, click Clear Log.
117
118
Server Administration
Viewing Statistics
 To view the information on usage of server resources:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Server Information.
The following information will be presented:

Processor information.

Parallels Plesk Panel version and build number.

Operating system and its kernel version.

Parallels Plesk Panel license key number.

Server uptime.

Processor load averages for the last 1 minute, 5 minutes and 15 minutes.

The amount of RAM installed and used.

The amount of swap space used.

Hard disk usage by partitions and directories.

The connected (mounted) storage and network storage devices.

The number of hosted domains: active shows the domains that are online; problem
shows the domains that have exceeded the disk space and bandwidth allotments but
still online; passive shows the domains that are offline because they were suspended
by you or your resellers.
2. Click Refresh to update the server statistics with the latest data.
 To view a report on resource usage by your resellers, customers, and websites:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Summary Report.
2. To view a summary on bandwidth usage by months, click View Traffic History.
Operations on reports:

To get more details, select the Full Report option from the drop-down menu.

To adjust the amount of information presented in a report, edit an existing report
template or create a new one. To edit a template, click Properties, and then modify the
report template.
To create a new template, go to Report Layouts > Create Report Layout, and specify how
much information you want in each section of the report: select None if you do not
want any information, select Summary if you want a concise overview, or select Full, if
you need a detailed report. Select the Use as default report checkbox and click OK.
To delete a custom report layout, select the checkbox corresponding to the report
layout name and click Remove.

To print the report, click Print. A report will open in a separate browser window. Select
the File > Print option from the browser's menu to print the report.
Server Administration
119

To send the report by e-mail, type the recipient's e-mail address into the input box
located to the right of the Report group and click Send by E-Mail. If you are the recipient,
then you do not need to specify an e-mail address: the system assumes by default
that you are the report recipient and specifies your e-mail address registered with your
Panel account.

To have the reports automatically generated and delivered by e-mail on a daily,
weekly, or monthly basis, click Delivery Schedule and follow the instructions supplied in
the section Automating Report Generation and Delivery by E-mail (on page 119).
 To view a report on traffic usage by users and sites:
1. Click Tools & Settings.
2. Do any of the following:

To view reports on the amount of traffic used by resellers, click Traffic Usage By
Resellers (in the Resources group).

To view reports on the amount of traffic used by all resellers and customers, click
Traffic Usage By Users (in the Resources group).

To view reports on the amount of traffic used by domains (websites), click Traffic Usage
By Domains (in the Resources group).
In this section:
Automating Report Generation and Delivery by E-mail ...................................... 119
Viewing Virus and Spam Protection Statistics (Windows) .................................. 120
Automating Report Generation and Delivery by E-mail
 To schedule a report delivery on a regular basis:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Summary Report > Delivery Schedule.
2. Click Add Report Delivery Schedule.
3. To send reports to your e-mail address registered with the system, select the
the server administrator value from the Deliver to menu. To send reports to
another e-mail address, select the the e-mail address I specify option and type
the e-mail address.
4. In the Delivery frequency menu, select how often the report should be sent:
daily, weekly, or monthly.
5. Click OK.
120
Server Administration
Viewing Virus and Spam Protection Statistics (Windows)
 To view the information about viruses detected and removed by Kaspersky
Antivirus:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Mail Server Settings (in the Mail group) > Statistics tab, and
click Virus Statistics.
2. Select the period for which you want to view virus statistics.
If you want to view more detailed information about viruses, or e-mail addresses of e-mail
senders or recipients, click the respective tab.
 To view the information about spam messages detected and filtered by
SpamAssassin:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Mail Server Settings (in the Mail group) > Statistics tab, and
click Spam Statistics.
2. Select the period for which you want to view spam statistics.
If you want to view more detailed information about spam message recipients, click the
Recipients tab.
Server Administration
121
Tracking Server Health with Health Monitor
Generally, as time goes by, Panel server resources become more and more utilized: The
number of Panel users grows; customers create new sites that use different system services,
and so on. This means that at some point you can experience the lack of system resources,
such as RAM, CPU performance, or disk space. To keep you notified about the server
resources usage, we offer the component - Health Monitor. Based on its statistics, you can
promptly decide what services should be adjusted to lower the system resources usage or
what hardware components require an upgrade.
Health Monitor is an additional Panel component that tracks all main server health
parameters, such as: Memory and CPU usage by different services, hard disk utilization,
number of running processes, and so on. Besides, Health Monitor can be configured to make
visual and e-mail notifications when a certain health parameter exceeds some threshold.
This section provides the detailed information on how to install and configure Health Monitor
as well as to get statistics on a resources usage.
In this section:
Installing Health Monitor .................................................................................... 121
Tracking Server Health ...................................................................................... 121
Accuracy of Health Monitor Values .................................................................... 123
Configuring Alarms, Trends, and E-mail Notifications ........................................ 123
Updating Health Parameters After Hardware Change ....................................... 123
Installing Health Monitor
Health Monitor is an additional component that is provided with Panel by default. You can
install it during the Panel custom installation or add it later using the Server Management > Tools
& Settings > Updates.
Tracking Server Health
Health Monitor displays the information on server resources usage in two ways:

A summary report on all main health parameters.

A detailed report with graph of changes for each health parameter.
122
Server Administration
Summary Report
The summary report contains the information on all main server health parameters that are
grouped for the sake of convenience. The report displays the status of each group, the
instantaneous parameter values and their trends. To get the Health Monitor summary report,
go to the Server Administration Panel > Home > Server Health.
Note that the summary report shows you instantaneous parameters values that are relevant
only for the moment when the Home page was refreshed.
The example of summary report (random values) is shown below.
Yellow and Red Alarms
As you can see, one of the parameters exceeded some threshold and Health Monitor
alarmed about it with the yellow highlighting. There are two types of alarms for each
parameter:

Yellow alarm - a parameter is close to its critical value.

Red alarm - a parameter exceeds its critical value.
The threshold of these alarms can be set using the configuration file.
Trends
Health Monitor can also warn you if one of the parameters grows too fast. This is done with
the help of trends. Trend is a way to show how a parameter value changes over time. In this
example, the parameter, which was the source of the alarm increased ( ) for the last hour by
1.87 times comparing to the hour before (the default trend interval is one hour). If a
parameter value is insignificant, its trend is not shown.
Detailed Report
Detailed report can help you find out the time periods when the resources usage is maximal
(minimal). To view the report, go to the Server Management > Health Monitoring. To see how
server health parameters have been changing over time, select the corresponding
checkboxes. You can select a period for which the graph is generated: From the past 3 hours
to a week.
Note that the parameters values behind the graph are also instantaneous and are relevant
only for the moment when the page was refreshed.
Server Administration
123
Accuracy of Health Monitor Values
Note that Health Monitor shows instantaneous parameter values. These values are relevant
only for the moment when the web page, which contains them, was refreshed. This means
that if your server is permanently loaded, you will never see the conformity between Health
Monitor and a system resource usage monitor (for example, top in Linux or Task Manager in
Windows).
Configuring Alarms, Trends, and E-mail Notifications
After the installation, Health Monitor works with all parameters by default. If you want to
adjust some of its options, such as alarm thresholds and e-mail notifications, you should
perform the component configuration. Such configuration is available using the XML file.
 To configure Health Monitor:
1. Download the current configuration file by clicking the Download Configuration
File button in Server Management > Health Monitoring.
2. Change the configuration file in any text editor. With the help of this file you
can define:

Alarm threshold for each parameter.

Type of the alarm for each parameter: Exceeding of an absolute value, a relative value,
or a trend value.

Trend calculation parameters.

E-mail notification parameters.
The detailed file structure and description for each of the file parameters is provided in the
top of the configuration file.
1. Upload the file with changes to Panel by clicking the Upload Configuration File
button in Server Management > Health Monitoring.
Updating Health Parameters After Hardware Change
Note that the hardware configuration of your Panel server is specified in Health Monitor just
once - during component installation. Further changes in hardware parameters are not
propagated to Health Monitor. For example, if you increase the amount of RAM from 1 GB to
2 GB, Health Monitor will continue to show that the total RAM is 1 GB. To update Health
Monitor data on server configuration, use Server Management > Health Monitoring > Detect
Hardware Changes.
124
Server Administration
Monitoring Connections to the Panel and FTP Services
In this section:
Monitoring Connections to the Panel ................................................................. 124
Monitoring Connections to FTP Service ............................................................ 125
Monitoring Terminal Session Connections to Your Server (Windows) ............... 126
Monitoring Connections to the Panel
 To find out who of your customers is logged in to the Panel at the moment:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Active Sessions. All sessions including yours will be
presented and the following details will be displayed:

Type. A type of Panel user who established the session:
for server administrator.
for reseller or customer.
for mailbox owner.

Login. The login name the user is logged in as.

IP address. The IP address from which the Panel is accessed.

Logon time. The date and time when the user logged in to the Panel.

Idle time. The time that user was not doing anything in the Panel while being logged in.
2. To refresh the list of user sessions, click Refresh.
3. To end a user session, select the corresponding checkbox and click Remove,
then confirm removal and click OK.
Server Administration
125
Monitoring Connections to FTP Service
Your Parallels Plesk Panel can show active FTP sessions only when any of the following
FTP server programs is installed on the hosting server:


Microsoft FTP 7.0 (Windows hosting)
Gene6 FTP Server (Windows hosting)

Serv-U FTP Server (Windows hosting)

ProFTPd (Linux/UNIX hosting)
 To find out who is connected to your server via FTP, in what directories they
currently are and what files they are uploading to or downloading from the
server:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Active Sessions.
2. Click the FTP Sessions tab. All sessions including yours will be presented and
the following details will be displayed:

Type. The type of user who established the session:
for users not registered with the Panel.
for anonymous FTP users.
for website administrators.
for web users (owners of personal web pages without individual domain names).

Status. The current status of FTP connection.

FTP user login. The login name used for access to FTP account.

Domain name. The domain the FTP user is currently connected to.

Current location. The directory the FTP user is currently at.

File name. The file name being operated on.

Speed. Transfer speed in kilobytes.

Progress, %. The file transfer operation progress in percentage.

IP address. The IP address from which the FTP account is accessed.

Logon time. The time lapsed since the moment user logged in.

Idle time. The time that user was not doing anything while being connected to the
server through FTP.
3. To refresh the list of FTP sessions, click Refresh.
4. To end a session, select the respective checkbox and click Remove.
126
Server Administration
Monitoring Terminal Session Connections to Your Server (Windows)
 To find out who of your customers is logged in to the server via Terminal
Server session at the moment:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Active Sessions.
2. Click the TS Sessions tab. All sessions including yours will be presented and
the following details will be displayed:

S. The status of the terminal session:
- for server administrator.
- client is connected and logged in, using valid login and password.
- client is connected, but not logged in.
- client is disconnected.

Name. The name of this terminal session.
 User. The name of the terminal session user.
You can see the session details by clicking the session name in the list.
3. To refresh the list of terminal sessions, click Refresh.
4. To disconnect a terminal session, select the respective checkbox and click
Disconnect, then confirm disconnection and click OK.
5. To close a terminal session, select the respective checkbox and click
Out, then confirm disconnection and click OK.
Log
CHAPTER 8
Event Tracking
The Event Manager is designed to help you organize data interchange between
Parallels Plesk Panel and external systems. It works the following way:
1. Create a script to be executed upon a certain control panel event: Shell script file
for Linux or batch file for Windows.
2. Create an event handler that triggers the event processing. You can process a
single event by a number of different handlers.
3. Assign your script to the event handler.
For the full list of event parameters passed by event handlers, refer to Appendix A: Event
Parameters Passed by Event Handlers (on page 261).
Note for users of Linux: The server administrator can create the event handlers that
will be run on the server on behalf of user root. If you wish to restrict usage of the root
account, create an empty file with name root.event_handler.lock in the location
/parallels_panel_installation_directory/var/.
In this chapter:
Adding Event Handlers (Linux) .......................................................................... 128
Adding Event Handlers (Windows) .................................................................... 129
Removing Event Handlers ................................................................................. 130
128
Server Administration
Adding Event Handlers (Linux)
Let's, for example, create an event handler for the 'customer account creation' event.
The handler will accept a customer's name and username in the Panel from
environment variables. For simplicity, we will use a shell-script called testhandler.sh that looks as follows:
#!/bin/bash
echo "--------------" >> /tmp/event_handler.log
/bin/date
>> /tmp/event_handler.log # information on
the event date and time
/usr/bin/id
>> /tmp/event_handler.log # information on
the user, on behalf of which the script was executed (to ensure
control)
echo "customer created" >> /tmp/event_handler.log # information
on the created customer account
echo "name: ${NEW_CONTACT_NAME}"
customer's name
>> /tmp/event_handler.log #
echo "login: ${NEW_LOGIN_NAME}"
customer's username in the Panel
>> /tmp/event_handler.log #
echo "--------------" >> /tmp/event_handler.log
This script prints some information to a file so that we could control its execution (we
cannot output information to stdout/stderr, as the script is executed in the background
mode).
Note: We strongly recommend that you use shell script files to handle events. Although
you can assign direct system commands, they might not work. Say, commands with
output redirection operators < or > will not work.
Suppose that our script is located in the directory
/parallels_panel_installation_directory/bin (for instance). Let's register
it by creating an event handler via the Administrative Panel:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Event Manager.
2. Click Add New Event Handler.
3. Select the event, you wish to assign a handler to in the Event menu.
4. Select the priority for handler execution, or specify a custom value. To
do this, select custom in the Priority menu and type in the value.
When assigning several handlers to a single event you can specify the handler
execution sequence, setting different priorities (higher value corresponds to a
higher priority).
Server Administration
129
5. Select the system user, on behalf of which the handler will be executed
("root" user, for example).
6. In the Command input field, specify a command to be executed upon the
selected event. In our example it is /usr/local/psa/bin/testhandler.sh.
7. Click OK.
Note: In the script, we have specified the variables $NEW_CONTACT_NAME and
$NEW_LOGIN_NAME. During execution of the handler, they will be replaced with
name and username of the created user account respectively. The entire list of
available variables is provided in the section Event Parameters Passed by Event
Handlers (on page 261).
Now if you log in to your Parallels Plesk Panel and create a new customer account,
specifying the value 'Some Customer' in the Contact name field, and 'some_customer' in
the field Login, the handler will be invoked, and the following records will be added to
the /tmp/event_handler.log:
Fri Mar 16 15:57:25 NOVT 2007
uid=0(root) gid=0(root) groups=0(root)
customer created
name: Some Customer
login: some_customer
If you want to specify one or few handlers more, repeat the actions above for another
handler.
Adding Event Handlers (Windows)
 To add an Event Handler:
For instance, let's create an event handler for the 'customer account creation'
event. The handler will accept a customer's name as the first parameter, and the
customer's username as the second. For simplicity, we will use a batch file called
test-handler.bat that looks as follows:
echo "--------------" >> c:\windows\temp\event_handler.log
rem information on the event date and time
date /T
>> c:\windows\temp\event_handler.log
rem information on the created customer account
echo "customer created" >> c:\windows\temp\event_handler.log
rem customer's name
echo "name: %1"
>> c:\windows\temp\event_handler.log
rem customer's username in the Panel
echo "login: %2"
>> c:\windows\temp\event_handler.log
echo "--------------" >> c:\windows\temp\event_handler.log
This script prints some information to a file so that we could control its execution.
130
Server Administration
Suppose that our script is located in the directory c:\program
files\parallels\parallels panel\scripts\. Let's register it by creating
an event handler via the Administrative Panel:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Event Manager.
2. Click Add New Event Handler.
3. Select the event you wish to assign a handler to in the Event drop-down
box.
4. Select the priority for handler execution, or specify a custom value. To
do this, select custom in the Priority drop-down list and type in the value.
When assigning several handlers to a single event you can specify the handler
execution sequence, setting different priorities (higher value corresponds to a
higher priority).
5. Select the system user, on behalf of which the handler will be executed.
6. In the Command input field, specify a command to be executed upon the
selected event. In our example, it is c:\program
files\parallels\parallels panel\scripts\testhandler.bat" <new_contact_name> <new_login_name>.
Note that if directory names or the file name contains spaces, the path should be
quoted.
7. Click OK.
Note: In the command, we have specified the parameters in the angle brackets
<new_contact_name> and <new_login_name>. Before executing the handler, they
will be replaced with name and username of the created customer. The entire list of
available parameters is provided in the section Event Parameters Passed by Event
Handlers (on page 261).
Now if you login to your Parallels Plesk Panel and create a new customer account,
specifying the value 'Some Customer' in the Contact name field, and 'some_customer' in
the field Login, the handler will be invoked, and the following records will be added to
the c:\windows\temp\event_handler.log:
Mon March 15 21:46:34 NOVT 2010
customer created
name: Some Customer
username: some_customer
If you want to specify one or few handlers more, repeat the actions above for another
handler.
Removing Event Handlers
 To remove an event handler:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Event Manager.
Server Administration
2. Select the corresponding checkboxes in the list of handlers and click
Remove.
Third-Party Components
In this section:
Viewing and Selecting Software Components Used on the Server .................... 132
131
132
Server Administration
Viewing and Selecting Software Components Used on
the Server
Parallels Plesk Panel supports a variety of third-party software components, from
antivirus solutions to webmail servers. If you are using Windows-based hosting, then
you can select the components that should be used on your server.
 To see the list of available components and to select the software
components that should be used by Parallels Plesk Panel:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Server Components (in the General group).
All installed components are listed. If you are using Windows-based hosting, then
you can see the current state of components and select which components should
be used. The current state of a component is marked by an icon:

means that the Panel is using this component, and the component is
working.

means that the Panel is not using this component (usually because a license
key has expired or missing), but the component is working.

means that the Panel is not using this component, because the component is
stopped.

means that the Panel is not using this component, but the component is
installed in the system and available.
2. Click the component name (for example, Mail Server) and select the
required component from the list of available components supported by
Parallels Plesk Panel.
3. Click OK. Parallels Plesk Panel will start the selected component.
Some components (for example, Merak Mail Server) can be configured by clicking
their name in the Component version table. Individual component settings depend on
the component. After finishing the configuration of a component, click OK.
To refresh the list of available components, click Refresh.
Database Servers
 To manage a database server:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Database Servers.
2. Click the
icon corresponding to the database server you need. A web
interface of a database management tool will open in a separate
browser window.
Server Administration
133
 To change the database server administrator's password:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Database Servers.
2. Click the host name of a database server.
3. Click Change Password.
4. Type the new password and click OK.
 To unregister a database server from the Panel:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Database Servers.
2. Select the checkbox to the right of the database server’s host name.
3. Click Remove.
4. Confirm the operation and click OK.
 To unregister a database server that has databases or is assigned as
default for hosting customers' databases from the Panel:
1. Delete databases from the database server:
a. Go to Tools & Settings > Database Servers.
b. Click the host name of a database server that you wish to
unregister from the Panel.
c. Select the checkbox in the upper left corner of the list to select
all databases.
d. Click Remove.
e. Confirm removal and click OK.
2. Make another database server default:
a. Click the Database servers shortcut in the path bar at the top of the
screen.
b. Click the host name of a database server that you wish to make
default. This should be the same database server type (MySQL
or MS SQL) as the one you are going to delete.
c. Click Preferences and Select the Use this server as default for MySQL
checkbox. If you have a MS SQL database server, select the
Use this server as default for MS SQL checkbox.
d. Click OK.
3. Return to the list of database servers (Tools & Settings > Database Servers).
4. Select a checkbox corresponding to the database server that you no
longer need.
5. Click Remove.
134
Server Administration
6. Confirm the operation and click OK.
Important: You cannot remove web applications’ databases this way. To remove
them, you should first remove the respective web applications from the sites that use
them.
For instructions on managing databases, refer to the Control Panel User's Guide,
section Deploying Databases.
Applications
The majority of customers purchase web hosting accounts to run different web
applications: Webmail, CRM, e-commerce systems, blogs, image galleries and so on.
Typically, such users are unable to install the apps by themselves because they lack
technical skills and experience, so they ask their service providers to do it. Hence, the
provider's staff becomes loaded with routine operations related to the apps. To ease
the installation (and maintenance) of web apps and reduce the staff's workload,
Parallels offers a number of free and commercial apps available to Panel users right
from their Control Panel.
There are various factors that regulate what apps are available to your customers. For
example, the app list is restricted by service plan or subscription properties, local
repository settings and so on. To know how the apps list is formed, refer to the How
Apps Become Available to Your Customers section.
App Types
Parallels offers two types of apps:

Apps that are installed directly on a website (say, the WordPress blogging platform
or the Joomla! content management system).

Apps that do not require a website for the installation. These are, generally,
external apps located somewhere in the Web that only provide a link to their
services (say, the iMind videoconference service or OfficeDrive - an online office
suite).
App Installation and Maintenance
The process of installation does not require any specific skills from customers. They fill
in app settings (say, administrator credentials), and Panel installs the app for them. The
further app management is also eased as apps are updated or removed right in Panel.
Moreover, customers are able to access some functions that apps expose to Control
Panel (without the need to log in to an app). For example, customers can upload new
WordPress theme or add SugarCRM user account right from their Control Panel. Such
part of app functionality is a service the app provides to customers.
Server Administration
135
Apps Backup and Restoration
Apps are backed up by standard Panel means (the backup utility). Since the backup
unit is a subscription, it is only possible to back up all apps in a subscription at once.
The apps from a backup are restored among other subscription data.
Application Vault and Application Catalog
If there are no restrictions on apps availability, the list of available apps in Control
Panel includes all apps from the following two sources:
1. Application Catalog - the remote repository held by Parallels, the main source of
apps.
2. Application Vault - a local repository in Panel. Every Panel has own Application
Vault that is available through Server Administration Panel (Server Management >
Tools & Settings > Application Vault).
The main purposes of Application Vault are:

Extend the list of available apps by uploading your own APS packages.
This is relevant if you want to offer some apps to your customers but these apps
are not present in Application Catalog.

Apply updates to apps installed from Application Catalog.

Gain control over apps from Application Catalog.
Download an app from the Catalog into the Vault to control some of its options. For
example, you can toggle its visibility to customers or configure its server-wide
settings.
For more information on managing apps through Application Vault, refer to the Managing
Apps with Application Vault (on page 139) section.
Summing up, Application Vault is not only a local repository of apps but a tool to control
versioning, visibility, and server-wide settings of apps from Application Catalog. For
better understanding of Application Vault, refer to the scheme shown in the How Apps
Become Available to Your Customers section.
Sharing Apps among Panel Servers
Adding an APS package to Application Vault will make it available only to your
customers. If you wish to share your app with users of other Panel servers, add an app
to Application Catalog. The Catalog accepts only apps packaged according to
Application Packaging Standard (APS) - the set of rules that allows easy app
installation and management. After you packaged your app, you should pass the
certification procedure. For details on how to do it, see http://apsstandard.org/whyaps/isv.
136
Server Administration
Storefront
Since Panel 10, Parallels Partner Storefront program offers you the possibility to earn
on selling commercial apps to customers in a revenue-share model. Within this
program, you select apps you want to sell and Parallels adds them to the list of apps
available in Control Panel. Once customers choose one of the paid apps selected for
the program, they are forwarded to a store with your own branding to complete the
order. This branded store is called Storefront.
All ordering, licensing, and billing aspects are handled by Storefront. You just track the
sales and get profit from each sold app.
Note: Storefront may contain some commercial apps that are available in Application
Catalog as well. In this case, Storefront apps have a priority and customers always see
them first in the list of available apps.
Note that you should have the appropriate Panel license to participate in the program.
For more information on Parallels Partner Storefront, refer to the
http://www.parallels.com/products/plesk/storefront/.
For the details about how you can manage the availability of Storefront apps to your
customers, refer to the section How Apps Become Available to Your Customers.
Next in this section, we will provide the details on how to manage apps using
Application Vault as well as the information on how apps become available in
customer's Control Panel.
In this section:
How Apps Become Available to Your Customers .............................................. 137
Managing Apps with Application Vault ............................................................... 139
Server Administration
137
How Apps Become Available to Your Customers
The list of apps available to a customer depends on various factors, such as a service
plan settings, Application Vault configuration, and so on. Moreover, service providers
are able to forbid accessing apps for all Panel users. If you do not adjust the app
availability, your customers will see all apps from Application Catalog, Storefront (either
yours or Parallels's), and all apps you uploaded to the Vault.
To view the list of apps available to a certain customer, go to the Applications tab > All
Available Applications.
This diagram explains how the list of available apps is formed.
138
Server Administration
Before an app becomes available in the app list of a certain customer, it passes
through a series of filters. The app is filtered on the following levels:
1. Panel configuration (Storefront apps only).
Since Panel 10.4, you can specify whether you want to offer premium commercial
apps to your customers in Tools & Settings > Interface Management > the Interface
Controls Visibility tab. Turning this option on implies the following:

If you participate in the Storefront program, customers will proceed to your own
branded store to buy premium commercial apps. You will receive the
commission for each app.
If your license does not have the Storefront feature, customers will be able to
buy premium apps as well but the purchase will be performed in Parallels
Storefront (Parallels online store). In this case, you do not get any sales
revenue.
If you decide not to offer premium commercial apps, they will not be shown to your
customers in Control Panel regardless of your participation in the Storefront
program.

2. Application Vault.
Panel lets you toggle the availability of APS packages you uploaded to the Vault.
Note that this works only for your own packages: There is no way to control the
availability of apps downloaded from the Catalog. Learn more about apps
management in the Managing Apps with Application Vault (on page 139) section.
3. Service plan.
Panel allows you to specify what apps to include in a certain service plan. The filter
affects all customers with this service plan. The process of adding apps to a service
plan is covered in the Hosting Plans and Subscriptions (on page 208) section.
4. Subscription.
If you want to select apps available to a particular customer, update the apps list in
the respective subscription.
The resulting app list is available to your customers.
Server Administration
139
Managing Apps with Application Vault
Application Vault performs the functions of a local repository and an apps management
tool. The repository functionality allows you to add, update, and remove app packages.
Using the management capabilities, you can view what apps were installed in Panel,
configure apps, or make them unavailable for installation. Besides, you are able to
delete temporary installation files by clearing the Vault cache. Next in this section, you
will find the detailed instructions on performing these operations with apps.
Application Vault is available in Server Administration Panel: Server Management > Tools
& Settings > Application Vault.
In this section:
Adding Your Apps to Panel ............................................................................... 140
Configuring Server-Wide Settings of Apps ........................................................ 140
Managing Apps Availability to Customers .......................................................... 141
Removing App Packages .................................................................................. 141
Tracking App Installations ................................................................................. 141
Updating Installed Apps .................................................................................... 141
Clearing the Application Vault Cache ................................................................ 141
Troubleshooting App Installations...................................................................... 141
140
Server Administration
Adding Your Apps to Panel
If you have a web app that you want to offer to your customers in addition to Catalog
apps, you should add it to the Application Vault. Note that you can upload only apps
packaged in the APS format.
To upload your app, use the Tools & Settings > Application Vault > My Apps > Add App. After
you upload the app, it will appear in Control Panel of all customers.
Configuring Server-Wide Settings of Apps
In some cases, apps from Catalog require server-wide configuration before customers
can install them. For example, if an app installation affects some Panel services, it may
require an administrator password. When your customers attempt to install such app,
they are asked to contact their provider (you) to perform the configuration. After you
configure the settings, customers can install the app on their websites.
Generally, server-wide settings of an app are the settings that apply to all app
installations and cannot be changed by customers. For example, customers cannot
install the ePages e-commerce app until you define how customers should access the
app, either by HTTP or HTTPS.
To configure server-wide settings, complete these two steps:
1. Add the Catalog app by using the Tools & Settings > Application Vault > My Apps > Add
App.
2. Select the app from the list in the My Apps tab and submit the settings.
Server Administration
141
Managing Apps Availability to Customers
After an APS package is uploaded to the Vault, you can manage its availability to
customers. It can be useful when you want to temporarily hide your app from all
customers. In that case make the app unavailable in the Tools & Settings > Application
Vault > My Apps tab. The app will disappear from the list of available apps of all
customers. To return the app back to the list, make it available in the My Apps tab. Note
that you cannot perform these operations on apps you downloaded from the Catalog.
Removing App Packages
You can remove only packages stored in the Vault. If you remove an app from the Tools
& Settings > Application Vault > My Apps tab, the Vault will delete the app package.
This operation does not affect app installations. Installed apps can be removed only by
particular customers (installation owners) from their Control Panel.
Tracking App Installations
In general, customers install apps directly from Application Catalog bypassing the local
repository. The only exceptions are the apps that you added to the Vault. Nevertheless,
all app installations are registered in the Vault. You can view the details on the
installations in the Tools & Settings > Application Vault > Installed Apps tab. The zero
number of app installations in the list means that the app package is stored in the Vault
but is not installed by any of customers.
Updating Installed Apps
Application Vault allows updating any app installed in Panel to its latest version
available in the Catalog. There are two main scenarios of updating apps in Panel: A
certain app installation is updated by you or by your customer (installation owner). Both
scenarios require this prerequisite step: You should check for available updates in the
Tools & Settings > Application Vault > Installed Apps tab. If the updates are available, you or
your customers can apply them to an app installation.
Clearing the Application Vault Cache
After customers install an app from Application Catalog, the app package is stored in a
temporary directory on the server, the Vault cache. The files in the cache can speed up
further app installations, but you can delete these files to free disk space on your
server.
To delete temporary files from the Application Vault cache, use the Tools & Settings >
Application Vault > Installed Apps tab > Clear Cache.
Troubleshooting App Installations
142
Server Administration
When an app cannot be installed to a customer's website due to some reason, a
customer gets an error message with the recommendation to contact their hosting
provider (you). The error message also contains the brief error description that should
help you find the reason of a problem.
The most common problem that may occur during an app installation is when PHP
does not meet app requirements:

PHP version is not supported.
To resolve the problem, install the latest available PHP version in Tools & Settings >
Updates and Upgrades.

Required PHP extension is turned off.
To resolve the problem, turn on the required extension.You can do this by adding a
certain PHP directive to the server-wide php.ini file or to the custom PHP
configuration of the subscription (in case you want the extension to be available to a
certain user only). Learn how to do this in the section Customizing PHP Configuration
(on page 223).
After you add the directive, restart a web server. Learn how to do this on Linux and
on Windows.
Server Administration
143
System Time and Services
You can monitor, start, stop, restart and disable various services, and also change their
startup type from the Panel (on Windows-based servers).
 To see the status of a system service:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Services Management.
2. Click Show All to show all services from the service groups. To hide all
services, click Hide All. The current state of a service or a group of
services is marked by an icon:

means that the service or all services in a group are running,

means that the service or all services in a group are stopped,

means that several services in a group are running and some are stopped,

means that the service is not installed or its management capabilities are not
supported by the license key.

In the Startup Type field you can see whether the service is started automatically
or should be started manually.
 To start a service:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Services Management.
2. Click the
icon corresponding to the service you wish to start.
 To restart a service:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Services Management.
2. Click the
icon corresponding to the service you wish to restart.
 To stop a service:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Services Management.
2. Click the
icon corresponding to the service you wish to stop.
 To set service startup type (on Windows-based servers):
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Services Management.
2. Select the checkbox corresponding to the required service in the list.
3. Select the required startup type:

Click
Manual to start selected services manually upon the Panel startup.
144
Server Administration

Click
Auto to start selected services automatically upon the Panel startup.
 To disable a service:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Services Management.
2. Select the checkbox corresponding to the required service in the list.
3. Click
Disable.
 To make changes to a group of services:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Services Management.
2. Select the checkboxes corresponding to the required services in the list.
3. Click the button corresponding to the action you want to perform on the
selected services:

Click
Start to start selected services.

Click
Stop to stop selected services.

Click
Restart to restart selected services.

Click
Disable to disable selected services.

Click
Manual to start selected services manually upon the Panel startup.

Click
Auto to start selected services automatically upon the Panel startup.
In this section:
Adjusting System Date and Time ...................................................................... 145
Server Administration
145
Adjusting System Date and Time
You can manually set the server date and time through the interface and enable server
time synchronization with a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server.
 To adjust the system date and time settings:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > System Time (in the General group).
2. Change the time and date settings as desired, and select your time
zone.
You will need to restart your Parallels Plesk Panel-managed server for the time
zone change to take effect.
Note for users of Parallels Panel for Windows: Clear the Automatically adjust clock
for daylight saving changes checkbox, if you do not want Parallels Plesk Panel to
automatically adjust the server clock.
3. To synchronize your server time with that of a server running the
Network Time Protocol, select the Synchronize system time checkbox, and
specify a valid IP address or a domain name. For a list of available NTP
servers, visit
http://ntp.isc.org/bin/view/Servers/WebSearch?search=open+access&sc
ope=text
4. Click OK.
Note: Enabling the Synchronize system time function will override any time and date you
manually enter in the System date and time fields. Also, make sure that the domain name
or IP address you enter for synchronization is a valid NTP server. Otherwise, this
function will not work and your server will continue running with its current time
settings.
Mail
In this section:
Monitoring Mail Server Message Queue and Troubleshooting Mail Congestion
(Linux) ............................................................................................................... 146
146
Server Administration
Monitoring Mail Server Message Queue and
Troubleshooting Mail Congestion (Linux)
If your customers complain that they cannot send e-mail through your mail server, this
can mean that your mail server is overloaded and cannot cope with the amount of
received messages. This can happen when somebody is sending spam through your
mail server, or the qmail-send daemon responsible for sending mail is down.
To return your mail server to an operable state, delete the unwanted messages from
the mail server’s message queue.
 To see the messages in the message queue and to delete them:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Mail Server Settings (in the Mail group) > Mail Queue
tab.
The following information will be presented:

Total number of undelivered messages. When messages come to your mail
server, they are first added to the main queue. Then, the mail server
preprocesses them in order to find out whether they should be delivered to a
local e-mail account on the same server or sent further to a remote recipient’s email address. After preprocessing, the messages directed at local mail
recipients are put to a local queue, and the messages directed at remote
recipients are put to a remote queue. Once delivered, the messages are
removed from the queues.

Message properties: subject, sender, recipient, queue type (local, remote, not
preprocessed), date the message was sent from user’s computer, the time
lapsed since the moment when message was put to queue (age), and message
size.
2. To find a message with specific subject, select the queue in the Queues
drop-down box, type the desired combination of symbols into the Subject
box, and click Search. The messages matching your search criteria will
be listed at the bottom of the screen. To reset the filter, click Show All.
3. To find a message from a specific sender, click the Show Advanced link,
type the sender’s e-mail address into the Envelope Sender box, and click
Search. The messages matching your search criteria will be listed at the
bottom of the screen. To reset the filter, click Show All.
4. To find a message addressed to a specific recipient, click the Show
Advanced link, type the recipient's e-mail address into the Recipients box,
and click Search. The messages matching your search criteria will be
listed at the bottom of the screen. To reset the filter, click Show All.
5. To find a message by date, age, or size, click the Show Advanced link,
type the required values into the Date, Age, or Size boxes, respectively,
and click Search. The messages matching your search criteria will be
listed at the bottom of the screen. To reset the filter, click Show All.
Server Administration
147
6. To delete a message from the queue, select the corresponding
checkbox and click Remove. To delete all messages from the queue,
select the checkbox in the upper-right corner of the messages list, and
click Remove.
Scheduling Tasks
If you need to run scripts on your server at specific time, use the task scheduler facility
on your server to make the system automatically run the scripts for you.
In this section:
Scheduling Tasks on Linux-based Servers ........................................................ 148
Scheduling Tasks on Windows-based Servers .................................................. 150
148
Server Administration
Scheduling Tasks on Linux-based Servers
If you need to run scripts on your server at specific time, use the task scheduling facility
on your server to make the system automatically run the scripts for you.
Important: To prohibit control panel users from scheduling tasks on behalf of user
"root", create on the server's file system an empty file with name
root.crontab.lock in the location
/parallels_panel_installation_directory/var/.
During installation of Parallels Plesk Panel, the following tasks are automatically
created:

autoreport.php - delivers daily, weekly and monthly reports on clients and domains
(three separate tasks)

backupmng - initiates scheduled backing up of domains once every 30 minutes

statistics - generates statistics on the limits imposed on domains, such as traffic,
disk usage, and so on

mysqldump.sh - creates a backup copy of three MySQL databases: psadump,
MySQL, and Horde databases
Because all these tasks are related to domain statistics, databases and reports, it is
strongly recommended that you neither change nor remove them.
 To schedule a task:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Scheduled Tasks.
2. Select the system user account on whose behalf the task will be
executed.
3. Click Schedule New Task.
4. Specify when to run your command:

Minute - enter the value from 0 to 59

Hour - enter the value from 0 to 23

Day of the Month - enter the value from 1 to 31

Month - enter the value from 1 to 12, or select the month from a drop-down box

Day of the Week - enter the value from 0 to 6 (0 for Sunday), or select the day of
the week from a drop-down box
You can schedule the time using the UNIX crontab entry format. In this format, you
can

enter several values separated by commas. Two numbers separated by a
hyphen mean an inclusive range. For example, to run a task on the 4th, 5th, 6th,
and 20th of a month, type 4-6,20.

insert an asterisk to specify all values allowed for this field. For example, to run
a task daily, type * in the Day of the Month text box.
Server Administration
149
To schedule the task to run every Nth period, enter the combination */N, where N is
the legal value for this field (minute, hour, day, month). For example, */15 in the
Minute field schedules the task to start every 15 minutes.
You can type the contracted names of months and days of the week, which are the
first three letters: Aug, Jul, Mon, Sat, etc. However, the contracted names cannot
be separated with commas or used together with numbers.
5. Specify which command to run. Type it into the Command input box.
For example, if you want to run the backup creation task at the specified time and
have the backup file sent to your e-mail, you need to specify the following command
in the Command input box:
/usr/local/psa/admin/sbin/backupmng
6. Click OK.
 To temporarily suspend execution of a scheduled task:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Scheduled Tasks.
2. Select the system user account on whose behalf the task is executed.
3. Locate the task that you want to suspend and click on the command
name.
4. Clear the Switched on checkbox and click OK.
 To resume execution of a scheduled task:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Scheduled Tasks.
2. Select the system user account on whose behalf the task is executed.
3. Locate the task whose execution you want to resume and click the
command name.
4. Select the Switched on checkbox and click OK.
 To cancel a task:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Scheduled Tasks.
2. Select the system user account on whose behalf the task is executed.
3. Select a checkbox to the left of the task that you want to cancel.
4. Click Remove.
5. Confirm removal and click OK.
150
Server Administration
Scheduling Tasks on Windows-based Servers
If you need to run scripts on your server at specific time, use the task scheduler facility
on your server to make the system automatically run the scripts for you.
During installation of Parallels Plesk Panel, the following tasks are automatically
created:

Update Parallels Premium Antivirus database - updates antivirus database.

Statistics calculation - generates statistics on resource usage, such as traffic and
disk space.
Because these tasks are related to operation of system services, it is strongly
recommended that you neither change nor remove them.
 To schedule a task:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Scheduled Tasks.
2. Click Schedule New Task.
3. Leave the Switched on checkbox selected if you want your scheduled
task to be active immediately after the creation.
4. Type a name for your task in the Description field.
5. In Scheduler notification, specify whether the scheduler should notify you
when it runs this task. The following options are available:

Switched off - do not notify you.

Send to the default e-mail - send the notification to your default e-mail address.

Send to the e-mail I specify - send the notification to the e-mail specified in the
corresponding field. After selecting this option, you need to input the required email in the field on the right.
Click Set to save scheduler notifications settings.
6. Specify which command to run. Type it into the Path to executable file input
box. If you need to run the command with certain options, type them in
the Arguments field.
For example, if you want to run the statistics calculation task to count disc space
and see more detailed information for the example.com and example.net
domains, you need to specify the following path in the Path to executable file input
box:
C:\Program Files\Parallels\Parallels
Panel\admin\bin\statistics.exe

and the following options in the Arguments field:
--disk-usage --process-domains=example.com, example.net verbose

If you want to run your own PHP script using the task scheduler, you need to
specify the following path in the Path to executable file input box:
Server Administration
151
C:\Program Files (x86)\Parallels\Parallels
Panel\Additional\PleskPHP5\php.exe
and specify the script location in the Arguments field:
C:\Inetpub\vhosts\mydomain.tld\httpdocs\myscript.php
7. Select the appropriate priority in the Task priority field. Task priority can
be set to Low, Normal or High.
8. Specify when to run your command by selecting the appropriate
checkboxes in the Hours, Days of Month, Months or Days of Week fields.
9. Click OK to schedule the task or click Run Now to schedule the task and
immediately run it.
 To temporarily suspend execution of a scheduled task:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Scheduled Tasks.
2. Choose a task that you wish to suspend and click on the command
name.
3. Clear the Switched on checkbox.
 To resume execution of scheduled task:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Scheduled Tasks.
2. Choose a task whose execution you wish to resume and click on the
command name.
3. Select the Switched on checkbox.
 To cancel a task:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Scheduled Tasks.
2. Select a checkbox to the left of the task that you want to cancel.
3. Click Remove.
4. Confirm removal and click OK.
152
Server Administration
Additional Administrator Accounts
(Windows)
You can create additional Administrator level accounts for your technical support
engineers, enabling them to perform a virtually limitless variety of administrative tasks.
All actions performed by additional Parallels Plesk Panel administrator accounts are
logged, which gives the actual Parallels Plesk Panel administrator an unprecedented
level of control over additional administrator accounts' activities. Additional
administrator accounts have virtually all the privileges that the actual server
administrator has, except the following:

View and manage additional administrator accounts belonging to other users.


View and manage administrator account settings.
Clear Action Log.
In this section:
Creating Additional Administrator Accounts .......................................................152
Modifying Additional Administrator Accounts......................................................153
Suspending and Activating Additional Administrator Accounts ...........................153
Removing Additional Administrator Accounts .....................................................154
Creating Additional Administrator Accounts
 To create additional administrator account:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Additional Administrator Accounts.
2. Click Create Account.
3. Specify administrator account properties:

Specify account login, password and e-mail address in the corresponding fields.

Specify the name of additional administrator account user in the Contact name
field.

Use Comments field to add your own comments about this particular additional
administrator account and its user. This can be useful to differentiate between
the accounts: for example, you can create one account for a technical support
engineer who manages user accounts, and another account for a technical
support engineer who works with all mail-related issues. By adding appropriate
comments in the Comments field, you can always tell who's doing what, and
avoid confusion.
4. Click OK to finish the creation of additional administrator account.
Now you can tell account login and password to its owner.
Server Administration
153
Modifying Additional Administrator Accounts
 To modify settings of additional Administrator account:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Additional Administrator Accounts.
2. Click the required additional administrator account login in the list.
3. Specify new administrator account properties:

Specify new account login, password and e-mail address in the corresponding
fields.

Specify the new name of additional Administrator account user in the Contact
name field.

Use Comments field to add your own comments about this particular additional
Administrator account and its user. This can be useful to differentiate between
the accounts: for example, you can create one account for a technical support
engineer who manages customer accounts, and another account for a technical
support engineer who works with all mail-related issues. By adding appropriate
comments in the Comments field, you can always tell who's doing what, and
avoid confusion.
4. Click OK to update the information of additional administrator account.
Suspending and Activating Additional Administrator
Accounts
 To suspend additional administrator account:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Additional Administrator Accounts.
2. Click the required additional administrator account login in the list.
3. Clear the Allow access to control panel checkbox and click OK.
 To activate additional administrator account:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Additional Administrator Accounts.
2. Click the required additional administrator account login in the list.
3. Select the Allow access to control panel checkbox and click OK.
154
Server Administration
Removing Additional Administrator Accounts
 To remove additional administrator account:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Additional Administrator Accounts.
2. Select the checkbox corresponding to the account you want to remove
and click Remove.
3. Confirm removal and click OK.
Server Administration
155
Backup and Restoration
With the data backup and restore functions provided by your Parallels Plesk Panel, you can
perform the following operations:

Back up the entire server. The backup archive will include your Panel license key,
settings and configuration of system services, accounts, sites, and mailboxes.

Back up individual user accounts with websites. The backup archive will include all
settings and data related to user account and user's sites.

Back up individual websites. The backup archive will include all data and settings related
to a website.

Schedule backups.

Restore data from backup archives.
Your customers granted with the permission to use the backup and restore facilities can back
up and restore their own account settings and websites through the Control Panel. Your
customers, resellers and your resellers' customers will find shortcuts to their backup
repositories in their Control Panel (Websites & Domains tab > Backup Manager).
The backup and restore functions are provided by optional Panel components that are not
included in typical installations. You can install these components by using the web-based
installation and update wizard: in Server Administration Panel, go to Tools & Settings > Updates
> Add Components, and select Plesk Backup Manager in the Server backup solutions group.
Panel users are able see the role of a user who created a backup (administrator, customer,
or reseller) in the the backup tasks list (Tools & Settings > Backup Manager). This lets customers
differentiate between the backups they created by themselves and technical backups of their
subscription. The technical backups happen when administrators or resellers back up
customer subscriptions as a part of a larger backup. For example, when the Panel
administrator creates a server-level backup, all customer subscriptions are backed up as
well, and they are displayed to the customers as subscription backups created by the
administrator.
If a certain backup task fails, Panel shows the detailed error description in a separate field of
a backup task.
In this section:
Configuring Global Backup Settings .................................................................. 156
Configuring the Panel for Using FTP Repository ............................................... 156
Backing Up the Entire Server ............................................................................ 157
Backing Up Individual Accounts and Sites ......................................................... 157
Scheduling Backups .......................................................................................... 158
Restoring Data From Backup Archives .............................................................. 159
Downloading Backup Files from Server ............................................................. 160
Uploading Backup Files to Server ..................................................................... 160
Removing Backup Files from Server ................................................................. 160
Backup Logs ..................................................................................................... 161
156
Server Administration
Configuring Global Backup Settings
If you serve numerous websites, you may want to configure the backing up process so that it
does not consume much server resources.
 To reduce the server load and set the disk space usage policy:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Backup Settings (in the General group).
2. Specify the number of simultaneous backup processes in the Maximum number
of simultaneously running scheduled backup processes box. The default value is 10.
Type a lesser value.
3. Select the Run scheduled backup processes with low priority checkbox.
4. Select the Do not compress backup files checkbox to disable compression.
5. Click OK.
6. To prevent the backing up processes from consuming all available disk
space on the server, choose one of the following:

Set Panel to to start a backup only if your server has enough free disk space to store
it. Be aware that this option significantly increases the backup time as Panel
additionally has to calculate the size of the future backup.
Note: Panel for Windows does not directly calculate object sizes but takes them from
the database. As object sizes in Panel database are updated only once a day, the
overall calculated backup size can differ from its real value.

Set Panel to start a backup only if your server has the specified free disk space. This
option is convenient when you approximately know the size of the future backup and
do not want Panel to waste time and resources on calculating it.
Configuring the Panel for Using FTP Repository
 If you are going to use an FTP server for storing backup files, you should set
up the Panel appropriately:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Backup Manager > Personal FTP Repository Settings.
2. Specify the following settings:

FTP server's IP address or host name.

Directory on the server where you want to store backup files.

User name and password for access to the FTP account.
3. Click OK.
Server Administration
157
Backing Up the Entire Server
 To back up the server configuration settings and all user data you have on your
hosting machine:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Backup Manager.
2. Click Back Up.
3. Specify the following:

Backup file name prefix and description. You cannot specify an arbitrary file name,
however, you can set the control panel to add a prefix to backup file names. Note that
the control panel automatically adds the date and time of backup file creation (in
Universal Time) to backup file names.

Splitting of the backup file. To create a multivolume backup, select the respective
checkbox and specify volume size in megabytes.

Location where to store the backup file. Select the repository where you would like to
store the backup file.

E-mail notification on backup completion. If you want to be notified of the backup
completion, type your e-mail address.

What data to back up. You can back up only the server settings, or server settings
and all user data.
4. Click Back Up. The backup process will start and the progress will be shown
under the Current Back Up Tasks tab. You can use the Refresh button to update
the information on the screen.
5. When backing up is finished, the backup file will be saved to the repository
you selected.
Note: Simple view settings (that are stored as the Simple plan) are included into server-level
backups. However, the restoration of these settings is only possible if Panel has not been yet
initially configured (either by the init_conf utility or from GUI). Learn more about Simple
view (on page 25).
Backing Up Individual Accounts and Sites
 To back up a user account with or without sites:
1. Click Customers.
2. Locate the customer whose account you want to back up, and click the
corresponding Control Panel link.
3. Click the Account tab.
4. Do any of the following:

To back up a user account with sites, click Back Up My Account and Websites.
158
Server Administration

To back up only websites with content, click Back Up Websites.
5. Click Back Up.
6. Specify the following:

Backup file name prefix and description. You cannot specify an arbitrary file name,
however, you can set the control panel to add a prefix to backup file names. Note that
the control panel automatically adds the date and time of backup file creation (in
Universal Time) to backup file names.

Splitting of the backup file. To create a multivolume backup, select the respective
checkbox and specify volume size in megabytes.

Location where to store the backup file. Select the repository where you would like to
store the backup file.

E-mail notification on backup completion. If you want to send an e-mail notice on the
backup completion, type the required e-mail address.

What data to back up. You can back up only the settings, or settings and all data.
7. Click Back Up. The backup process will start and the progress will be shown
under the Current Back Up Tasks tab. You can use the Refresh button to update
the information on the screen.
When backing up is finished, the backup file will be saved to the repository you selected.
Scheduling Backups
 To schedule backing up of data:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Backup Manager.
2. Click Scheduled Backup Settings.
3. Select the Activate this backup task checkbox and specify the following:

When and how often to run the backup.

Backup file name.

Splitting of the backup file. To create a multivolume backup, select the respective
checkbox and specify volume size in megabytes. Note that volume size cannot
exceed 4095 megabytes.

Location where to store the backup file. Select the repository where you would like to
store the backup file.

Maximum number of backup files stored in the repository. Type a number if you want
to recycle backup files: When this limit is reached, the oldest backup files are
removed.

E-mail notification on backing up errors. If you want to send an e-mail notice when
something goes wrong during backing up, type the e-mail address you need.

What data to back up. You can back up only settings, or settings and user data.
4. Click OK.
Server Administration
159
Restoring Data From Backup Archives
You can restore data from backup files kept in Panel's repository on the server, a custom
FTP repository (on page 156), and you can upload a backup file (on page 160) in a ZIP
archive (on Windows systems) or tar archive (on Linux systems), and then restore data from
it.
 To restore data from a backup file:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Backup Manager.
2. Click the backup file name.
3. Specify the following settings:

Types of data to be restored.

Suspend website until restoration task is completed. Select this if you want to avoid
possible conflicts that may occur when users modify site content or settings while they
are being restored.

Send an e-mail notice when restoration task is completed. Type your e-mail address if you
want the control panel to notify you when restoring is completed.

Conflicts resolution policy. Specify what to do if any conflicts occur during restoration.
4. Click Restore.
In case if any errors or conflicts occur during restoration of data, the wizard will prompt
you to select an appropriate resolution. Follow the instructions provided on the screen to
complete the wizard.
Note: The Overwrite data restoring mode means that all objects will be restored from the
backup files regardless of their current presence in the system. The Overwrite mode
works as follows:

If an object or settings from the backup file are not present in Parallels Plesk Panel,
then they are created or set in Parallels Plesk Panel.

If an object or settings from the backup file are present in Parallels Plesk Panel, then
the object or settings from the backup file replace the corresponding object or settings
that are present in Parallels Plesk Panel.

If an object or settings are present in Parallels Plesk Panel, but are missing from the
backup file, then the object or settings currently present in Parallels Plesk Panel are
not changed.
160
Server Administration
Downloading Backup Files from Server
 To download a backup file from a backup repository within the Panel:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Backup Manager.
2. Click the icon
corresponding to the backup file you want to download.
3. Select the location where you want to save the backup file and click Save.
The backup file will be downloaded from the backup repository.
Uploading Backup Files to Server
 To upload a backup file to a backup repository within Panel:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Backup Manager.
2. Click Upload Files to Server Repository.
3. Click Browse and select the required backup file.
Note: Make sure you select the appropriate backup file format, which depends on the
operating system on which Parallels Plesk Panel is installed. On Linux/Unix systems, you
should upload tar or zipped tar archives, and on Windows, ZIP archives.
4. Click OK.
The backup file will be uploaded to the backup repository.
Removing Backup Files from Server
 To remove a backup file from the backup repository in the Panel:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Backup Manager.
2. Select a checkbox corresponding to the backup file you want to remove.
3. Click Remove.
4. Confirm removal and click OK.
Server Administration
161
Backup Logs
When Panel starts performing a backup, it reports the progress to a log. Backup logs contain
only general errors such as syntax errors (no or wrong command specified, invalid input
parameters), runtime errors and unhandled exceptions, low disk space for backup, and so
on.
Backup logs are stored in /usr/local/psa/admin/PMM/sessions on Unix/Linux
systems and %plesk_dir%\admin\PMM\sessions on Windows systems, where
%plesk_dir% is an environment variable for the Panel installation directory on Windows
systems. Each backup log is located in a separate folder that contains date and time of the
backup in its name.
You can change the level of details included into logs. This feature is available only for
scheduled backups and for backups made through command line. For more information on
how to change level of details, see the section Setting Up Backup Verbosity of Backup and Restore
Utilities Administrator’s Guide.
162
Server Administration
Remote Access (Windows)
The remote desktop (RDP) access feature allows you to remotely log in to the Parallels Plesk
Panel server and interact with it using standard Microsoft Windows desktop interface.
 To access the server via Remote Desktop interface:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Remote Desktop.
2. Set up screen resolution for the session in the Screen resolution for terminal
session menu.
Note: Higher resolutions are more taxing for your connection, decreasing the interaction
speed and spending more bandwidth.
3. Select the connection method according to your browser:

Microsoft RDP ActiveX - recommended to use with Internet Explorer browser, since it
may not work with other browsers. When you use this method for the first time, your
browser will automatically install the required ActiveX component, if Internet Explorer
security settings permit this. If your browser shows security alerts, try to temporarily
lower security measures in the browser options.

properoJavaRDP - recommended to use with Netscape, Mozilla, or Firefox browsers,
since it may not work with Internet Explorer. Only 8.0 and higher versions of Opera
are supported. This component requires Java Runtime Environment (JRE) to be
installed on your system. If you do not have JRE, you can download it from
http://java.sun.com/j2se/1.5.0/download.jsp (version 1.4 and higher) and install it
before using the remote desktop feature.
Note: You don't need to install JDK (Java Development Kit) in order for the RDP
feature to work.
If you use Internet Explorer or Mozilla, you should open the Terminal Services
Configuration console in Microsoft Windows (Start > Administrative Tasks), and set the
Licensing option to Per user on the Server Settings screen.
4. Click OK. A new window will open with an area where your interaction with
the server's desktop will take place.
5. Log in to the system. By default, the Panel uses the subscription's
FTP/Microsoft FrontPage username. You can supply any valid username and
password.
6. After logging in to the system you can start working with it as with a regular
Windows desktop.
 To finish your Remote Desktop session:

Close the browser window with the remote desktop session. This way, the session you
had will be detached from your desktop, but it will keep running on the server, so when
you log in there next time, you will see the remote desktop in the state you left it,
or
Server Administration

163
Select Start > Log off if you want to quit the session permanently (all running sessions
consume the server's resources).
Sharing Files and Folders
If you use Panel to run your own websites within a webspace, you can set up file and folder
sharing. Use sharing to achieve the following goals:

Allow users within the organization to collaborate on the same documents or other files.

Allow privileged customers or partners to access documents like product roadmaps, price
lists with discounts, marketing presentations after authorization in the system.
In this section:
Setting Up File Sharing...................................................................................... 164
Using File Sharing to Share and Access Files ................................................... 165
164
Server Administration
Setting Up File Sharing
You can access file sharing settings in both Service Provider (Server Management > Tools &
Settings > File Sharing Settings) and Power User view (Settings tab > File Sharing Settings).
 To set up file sharing in your information system:
1. Open the file sharing settings page.
2. Web Folder root URL defines the URL used for accessing the root Web Folder
used by file sharing services. If you want to change the root location of Web
Folder used for file sharing, select host name, domain name or IP address
and specify a folder name.
All other file sharing Web Folders are created inside the folder specified above. The
resulting URL will be used for mounting the root Web Folder used by file sharing.
3. If you want the Panel to generate secure links to protect file transfers with
SSL encryption, select the Generate secure links to files and folders check box.
4. If you want to grant the Panel's users the ability to publish uploaded files and
make these files accessible to all website visitors, select the Enable public files
check box.

If you want to change the folder for storing the public files, specify new folder name in
the Folder for public files storage field.

If you want to change the URL for read-only visitor access, specify new folder name in
the URL for visitor access to public files field.
5. If you want to allow uploading of files into a password-protected folder, which
can be accessed by privileged partners or customers, select the Enable
password-protection of public files, and provide the username and password for
accessing the folder.

If you want to change the folder for storing the password-protected files, specify a new
folder name in the Folder for password-protected files storage field.
6. Click OK.
Server Administration
165
Using File Sharing to Share and Access Files
When file and folder sharing is set up on the server, you can accomplish the following tasks:

Share files with other users within your organization for collaboration purposes.

Share files with privileged customers and partners. Files can be placed in a passwordprotected directory, and authorized users outside your organization will be able to access
them.

Place files to a private secured directory on the server for backup purposes, or to be able
to access them over the Internet.

Transfer files that are too large to be sent by e-mail: upload files to the server, generate a
secret link, and send the link to the intended recipients so that they could download them
from the server.

Access shared files and work with them:

Through a Web browser, using File Manager built into your information system, or

Connect the folder on the server to your computer's operating system as a Web
Folder, and work as if the files are located on your computer.
Note that all operations described below are accessible only in Power User view.
In this section:
Sharing Files with Other Users Within the Organization .................................... 166
Publishing Files for Partners .............................................................................. 167
Publishing Files for Your Customers.................................................................. 169
Uploading Your Files to a Private Directory on the Server ................................. 170
Transferring Large Files that Cannot Be Sent by E-mail .................................... 171
Accessing and Working with Files ..................................................................... 172
166
Server Administration
Sharing Files with Other Users Within the Organization
 To share files with other users within the organization, in Power User view:
1. Go to the File Sharing tab and select the files that you want to share:
a. If you have to upload new files to the Panel:Go to Shared Files in the
left navigation area and click Upload Files.
b. Click Browse and select the files you need.
c. Select the location inside the Shared Files folder where you want to
upload files.
If you want to share the files from your Personal Files folder:
d. Under the Files tab go to Personal Files in the left navigation area and
browse to the directory where required files are located.
e. Select the required files and click Share.
f. Select the location inside the Shared Files folder where you want to
upload files.
2. If you want to send an e-mail notice with links to shared files, select the
check box Send e-mail with links to uploaded files upon completion, and click Next.
Otherwise, click Upload without selecting this check box.
If you chose to send an e-mail notice, you will have to do the following on the next
screen:
a. Select whether authorization in the Panel should be required for
accessing the files and whether those who have the links to files
should be able to modify them.
b. If you selected the linked files to be accessible for everyone, select
the link expiration period. After this period has elapsed, the links will
be no longer valid.
c. Select the Panel user accounts who should receive the notice and
type e-mail addresses of other notice recipients.
d. Specify e-mail subject and body. Note that links to files will be
inserted automatically in place of <- [LINKS WILL BE INSERTED
HERE - DO NOT REMOVE] -> text.
3. Click OK.
Now the files are uploaded to the directory called shared, and all users registered in your
information system will be able to view, modify, and delete them.
Server Administration
167
Publishing Files for Partners
If publishing to the password-protected directory called protected is allowed by the server
policy, then authorized users of your information system will be able to upload files to this
directory. After that, your partners or privileged customers will be able to download files from
this directory after specifying the password that was sent to them.
 To publish files for your partners and privileged customers, in Power User
view:
1. Go to the File Sharing tab and select the files that you want to publish:
a. If you have to upload new files to the Panel:Under Public Files in the
left navigation area go to Password-protected files.
b. To view the credentials currently used for accessing password protected files, click Show Access Info in the lower right corner of the
screen. You will need to send these credentials to your partners who
should have the access to files in the protected directory.
c. Click Upload Files and select the location inside the Password-protected
files folder where you want to upload files.
d. Click Browse and select the files you need.
If you want to publish the files from Personal Files or Shared Files folder:
e. To view the credentials currently used for accessing password protected files, go to Password-protected files and click Show Access Info
in the lower right corner of the screen. You will need to send these
credentials your partners who should have the access to files in the
partners directory.
f. Browse to the directory where required files are located, select the
required files and click Publish.
g. Select the Protect access to files with a password check box.
h. Select the location inside the Password-protected files folder where you
want to publish the files.
2. If you want to send an e-mail notice with links to published files, select the
check box Send e-mail with links to published files upon completion, and click Next.
Otherwise, click Upload without selecting this check box.
If you chose to send an e-mail notice, you will have to do the following on the next
screen:
a. Select whether authorization in the Panel should be required for
accessing the files and whether those who have the links to files
should be able to modify them.
b. If you selected the linked files to be accessible for everyone, select
the link expiration period. After this period has elapsed, the links will
be no longer valid.
168
Server Administration
c. Select the user accounts in the Panel who should receive the notice
and type e-mail addresses of other notice recipients.
d. Specify e-mail subject and body. Note that links to files will be
inserted automatically in place of <- [LINKS WILL BE INSERTED
HERE - DO NOT REMOVE] -> text.
3. Click OK.
Now the files are published in the directory called protected, and only authorized users
who know the password will be able to download and view these files.
Server Administration
169
Publishing Files for Your Customers
If publishing to the public directory is allowed by the server policy, then authorized users of
the information system will be able to upload files to this directory, thus making them
accessible to your customers who visit your website, and any Internet user who knows where
these files are located.
 To publish files on the Web for your customers, in Power User view:
1. Go to the File Sharing tab and select the files that you want to publish:
a. If you have to upload new files to the Panel:Go to Public Files in the
left navigation area.
b. Click Upload Files and select the location inside the Public Files folder
where you want to upload files.
c. Click Browse and select the files you need.
If you want to publish the files from Personal Files or Shared Files folder:
d. Browse to the directory where required files are located, select the
required files and click Publish.
e. Do not select the Protect access to files with a password check box.
f. Select the location inside the Public Files folder where you want to
publish the files.
2. If you want to send an e-mail notice with links to published files, select the
check box Send e-mail with links to uploaded files upon completion, and click Next.
Otherwise, click Upload without selecting this check box.
If you chose to send an e-mail notice, you will have to do the following on the next
screen:
a. Select whether authorization in the Panel should be required for
accessing the files and whether those who have the links to files
should be able to modify them.
b. If you selected the linked files to be accessible for everyone, select
the link expiration period. After this period has elapsed, the links will
be no longer valid.
c. Select user accounts in the Panel who should receive the notice and
type e-mail addresses of other notice recipients.
d. Specify e-mail subject and body. Note that links to files will be
inserted automatically in place of <- [LINKS WILL BE INSERTED
HERE - DO NOT REMOVE] -> text.
3. Click OK.
Now the files are uploaded to the directory called public, and your customers, including any
Internet users who know where the files are located, will be able to download and view these
files.
170
Server Administration
Uploading Your Files to a Private Directory on the Server
All authorized users of your information system can use private folders on the server to:

Store backup copies of their files.

Access files in their private directories over the Internet.
 To upload your files to the private directory through File Manager, in Power
User view:
1. Go to the File Sharing tab and click Personal Files in the left navigation area.
2. Click Upload Files.
3. Click Browse to select the files you need.
4. Select the folder where you want to upload files.
5. If you want to send an e-mail notice with links to the uploaded files, select
the check box Send e-mail with links to uploaded files upon completion, and click Next.
Otherwise, click Upload without selecting this check box.
If you chose to send an e-mail notice, you will have to do the following on the next
screen:
a. Select the link expiration period. After this period has elapsed, the
links will be no longer valid. If you want to make the link permanent,
so that it will not expire, select the option never.
b. Select user accounts in the Panel who should receive the notice and
type e-mail addresses of other notice recipients.
c. Specify e-mail subject and body. Note that links to files will be
inserted automatically in place of <- [LINKS WILL BE INSERTED
HERE - DO NOT REMOVE] -> text.
6. Click OK.
Now the files are uploaded to the directory called private/username, and only the owner
of this directory will be able to view, download, modify, and delete these files.
Server Administration
171
Transferring Large Files that Cannot Be Sent by E-mail
 If you need to send someone a file that is too large to be sent by e-mail, in
Power User view:
1. Upload the file to the server, or select the file, if it has already been
uploaded to the server:
a. If you have to upload new files to the Panel:Click the Home tab, and
click the Upload Files link (in the File Sharing tab).
b. Select the folder where you want to upload files, for example, Personal
Files > admin.
c. Click Browse and select the files you want to send.
d. Select the check box Send e-mail with links to published files upon completion
and click Next.
If files are already uploaded to the Panel:
e. Go to Files tab and browse to the directory where required files are
located.
f. Select the required files and click E-Mail Link.
2. If you have chosen to send a file from locations other than a user's private
directory (Personal Folder), then also select whether authorization in the Panel
should be required for accessing the files and whether those who have the
links to files should be able to modify them.
3. Select the link expiration period. After this period has elapsed, the links will
no longer be valid.
4. Select user accounts in the Panel who should receive the notice and type e mail addresses of other notice recipients.
5. Specify e-mail subject and body. Note that links to files will be inserted
automatically in place of <- [LINKS WILL BE INSERTED HERE - DO
NOT REMOVE] -> text.
6. Click OK.
The links to files will be sent to the intended recipients, and they will be able to download the
files.
172
Server Administration
Accessing and Working with Files
There are two ways to work with shared files:


If you need to work with the files frequently, connect a Web Folder on the server to your
computer.
If you occasionally need to access the files, use the Panel interface (Files tab).
 To use the File Manager built into your information system for working with
files:
1. In the Panel, click the Files tab. The file manager opens.
2. Use the following icons and links to work with files and directories.
In the left area:

Upload Files. This starts a wizard that allows you to upload files and directories to the
server.

Personal Files. This takes you to the private directory where you can place files that
only you can access. If you need to use the storage space on the server for backup
purposes, or if you need to access files over the Internet, place your files into this
directory. For more information, refer to the section Uploading Your Files to a Private
Directory on the Server.
Shared Files. This takes you to the shared (or common) directory where you should
place files that must be available to other users within your organization. When you
need to collaborate with other employees, place files into this directory. For more
information, refer to the section Sharing Files with Other Users Within the
Organization.
The right area shows a list of files and directories located in the currently selected
directory, and a toolbar with the following items:


Share. Select files in any directory and click this to move the files to the Shared Folder.
This will make them accessible to all users authorized in your information system.

E-mail Link. Select files in any directory and click this to send an e-mail message
notifying users of files location, so that the users could download them.

Delete. Select files and click this to permanently remove them.

More. This menu provides access to the following operations: Create new folder, copy
or move files and folders.

The icon
(Link to this Folder). Click this to view or copy to clipboard the Internet
address of the current folder.
In this section:
Connecting to Web Folders on Microsoft Windows Systems ............................. 173
Connecting to Web Folders on Linux Systems .................................................. 181
Connecting to Web Folders on Mac OS ............................................................ 182
Server Administration
173
Connecting to Web Folders on Microsoft Windows Systems
 To connect a Web Folder to your computer running Microsoft Windows XP:
1. Right-click the Start menu button, and select Explore.
2. In the Tools menu, select Map Network Drive.
3. Select the drive letter that will be assigned to the network drive and click Sign
up for online storage or connect to a network server.
174
Server Administration
4. Click Next.
5. Make sure that the Choose another network location option is selected and click
Next.
Server Administration
175
6. Go to Panel and find out the address of the required Web Folder. Log in to
the Panel, go to File Sharing, find and enter the required folder and click the
icon
in the upper right corner of File Manager. The link to the current Web
Folder will be shown in the opened window. Click the Copy Link to Clipboard
button.
176
Server Administration
7. Return to the Add Network Place Wizard, specify the full URL to the required
Web Folder and click Next.
Server Administration
177
8. In the window that opens, specify the username and password that you use
for logging in to the Panel. Select the Remember my password check box and
click OK.
178
Server Administration
9. Specify a name that you want to designate for this Web Folder in your
operating system and click Next.
Server Administration
179
10. Click Finish.
Now, every time you start your computer, this Web Folder will show in your Windows
Explorer, under My Network Places.
Note for users of Microsoft Windows operating systems: If you experience problems with
connecting to a Web Folder, make sure you have installed all available operating system
updates and service packs. If you are using a 32-bit version of Windows XP, Windows Vista,
or Windows 2003 Server, then also install the hotfix available at
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?familyid=17C36612-632E-4C04-9382987622ED1D64.

 To connect a Web Folder to your computer running Microsoft Windows Vista or
Microsoft Windows 7:
1. Click the Start menu button, and select Computer.
2. Click Map Network Drive.
3. Select the drive letter that will be assigned to the network drive and click
Connect to a Web site that you can use to store your documents and pictures.
180
Server Administration
4. Go to the Panel and find out the address of the required Web Folder. Log in
to the Panel, go to File Sharing, find and enter the required folder and click the
icon
in the upper right corner of File Manager. The link to the current Web
Folder will be shown in the opened window. Click the Copy Link to Clipboard
button.
5. Return to the Map Network Drive Wizard, specify the full URL to the required
Web Folder and click Finish.
6. In the window that opens, specify the username and password that you use
for logging in to the Panel. Select the Remember my password check box and
click OK.
Server Administration
181
Now, every time you start your computer, this Web Folder will show in your Windows
Explorer, under Network Locations.
Connecting to Web Folders on Linux Systems
 To connect a Web Folder as a network drive to your Linux-based computer
using GNOME Nautilus file manager:
1. Open the file browser.
2. In the File menu, select Connect to Server.
3. From the Service type menu, select either WebDAV (HTTP) or Secure WebDAV
(HTTPS).
To find out which option you need, ask your systems administrator.
4. In the Server field, type the host name or IP address of your server.
5. In the Folder field, type the path to your shared folder.
To learn the location of your Web Folder, log in to the Panel, go to File Sharing, find and
enter the required folder and click the
icon in the upper right corner of File Manager.
The link to current Web Folder will be shown in the opened window.
6. Click Connect.
7. The shortcut to the file share will be added to the Places pane. Click this
shortcut.
8. Specify the username and password that you use for logging in to the Panel.
9. Select the option Remember password forever so that you would not have to type
it every time you connect to the server.
10. Click Connect.
 To connect to a Web Folder using KDE Konqueror file manager:
1. Open Konqueror, and type the address of the shared folder in the address
bar. Use webdav or webdavs as the protocol, instead of http or https.
To learn the location of your Web Folder, log in to the Panel, go to File Sharing, find and
enter the required folder and click the
icon in the upper right corner of File Manager.
The link to the current Web Folder will be shown in the opened window.
2. Specify the username and password that you use for logging in to the Panel.
182
Server Administration
Connecting to Web Folders on Mac OS
 To connect a Web Folder as a network drive to your Mac OS X-based computer:
1. Open Finder.
2. Click Go, and select the option Connect to Server.
3. Specify the location of your shared folder.
To learn the location of your Web Folder, log in to the Panel, go to File Sharing, find and
enter the required folder and click the
icon in the upper right corner of File Manager.
The link to the current Web Folder will be shown in the opened window.
4. Click Connect.
5. Specify the username and password that you use for logging in to the Panel.
6. Select the option Remember this password in my keychain so that you would not
have to type it every time you connect to the server.
7. Click OK.
If you use SSL, you might receive an alert that the SSL certificate on the server is invalid.
In such a case, just click through the SSL warning.
After the network drive is mounted, a shortcut to it will be placed on your desktop.
8. Open System Preferences, and select Accounts.
9. Select your user account and then click the Login Items tab.
10. Select the network drive shortcut on your desktop and drag it to the Login
Items window (in System Preferences > Accounts).
11. If you do not want the mounted drive to automatically open in Finder every
time you start your Mac, select the corresponding Hide check box.
12. Click OK.
Server Administration
183
Panel Updates and Upgrades
Panel is constantly evolving in terms of functionality and new security enhancements are
introduced with each update. To ensure that your Panel software is up-to-date, we
recommend that you switch on automatic updates.
There is also the option to upgrade Panel to the latest versions. While updates include some
minor fixes for Panel, upgrades introduce more complex changes in product functionality.
The information about current Panel version and available updates and upgrades is always
displayed in the System Overview group of the Home page.
Panel Versioning
The full Panel version identifier consists of a number of fields. For example, the identifier
Panel 10.3.0 Update #12 Release can be divided as follows.
Version number
Major
Major
Minor
10
3
0
Update
Quality tag
12
Release
184
Server Administration
The information about how updates and upgrades affect these fields is provided next in this
section.
Panel Updates
Update is a number of fixes that enhance Panel security and stability. Updates can be
applied only to a current Panel version. Thus, Panel does not change its version after an
update: Information about the applied update is just added after a product version; say,
Panel 10.3.0 Update #12.
You can update Panel in two ways:

Manually from the System Overview group of the Home page.

Automatically (recommended). If you activate automatic updates at Tools & Settings >
Update and Upgrade Settings, Panel will check for updates once a week. If updates are
available, Panel automatically downloads and installs them.
Updates are free of charge and available to all Panel installations regardless of their license.
Panel Upgrades
Upgrade implies a significant number of Panel enhancements (a set of updates) or even
introduces new Panel features and behavior. Typically, upgrades change Panel major or
minor versions:

If an upgrade is a set of updates, then Panel increments its minor version number (say,
from 10.3.0 to 10.3.1).

If an upgrade includes more complex changes in Panel, then the major version number is
incremented (say, from 10.3.1 to 10.4.0).

If an upgrade affects third-party packages only (say, Apache or MySQL), then Panel does
not change its version.
Panel Upgrades and Quality Tags
Panel, during its lifecycle, passes through a number of development stages (see the diagram
below for the convenience). It is natural that on earlier stages, when all new features are just
implemented, Panel builds are less stable comparing to the following ones. To indicate the
stage of the current Panel version, we add a quality tag to it:

Testing version.
We start each release cycle with publishing a number of testing versions for preview
purposes and let you sequentially upgrade from the first one to the last, and then upgrade
to more stable versions. We do not provide technical support for such builds even if they
were upgraded to more stable versions. Thus, avoid using this build in a production
environment.
Notes:
1. By default, testing builds are not shown as available for installation. You can install the
testing Panel version only by running Parallels Installer with one of the special options.
Learn more in the Installation and Upgrade Guide, Installing Panel.
2. Upgrade to the next testing version is available only to the owners of a testing build.
More stable Panel builds do not have the corresponding option in the GUI.
Server Administration
185

Pre-release version.
A pre-release version has all claimed features and previous versions successfully
upgrade to it. The quality of this version is eventually improved by updates. By selecting
the pre-release version you become the first to see the new features and receive the
most fresh updates.

Release version.
A release version has passed all quality tests. Minor stability issues are promptly fixed by
updates. We recommend that you always upgrade Panel to release versions.

Stable version.
A stable version has received all updates and a number of service providers successfully
use it for some time. When a version is considered stable, it no longer receives any
updates.
The decision on what version to use is absolutely up to you. For example, consider
upgrading to the pre-release Panel version, if you want to try new Panel features before an
official release. On the contrary, if you want to get the safest solution, wait until Panel enters
its stable phase (it may take a couple of months after the official release).
Once you decided what version you need, set up Panel to notify you when upgrades to the
chosen version become available. After you select the version type in Tools & Settings > Update
and Upgrade Settings, Panel will check for upgrades once a day. When an upgrade with the
selected quality tag becomes available, Panel will notify you on the Home > System Overview.
Note: Panel always notifies you when more stable versions are available. For example, if
you set Panel to notify you about pre-release versions, you will still receive all release and
stable upgrade notifications. But if you decide to use only stable versions, notifications for all
pre-release and release upgrades will be skipped.
The diagram below shows the rough Panel lifecycle (the version numbers are given just for
example and do not have any correlation with the real ones).
186
Server Administration
Applying Panel Upgrades
The main scenario of upgrading Panel is manual: You get the notification about available
upgrade on the Home page and then perform the upgrade from the Home > System Overview or
Tools & Settings > Updates and Upgrades at any time that suits you. Nevertheless, Panel can
perform automatic upgrades but only to stable versions. After you set up automatic upgrades
in Tools & Settings > Update and Upgrade Settings, Panel will check for stable upgrades and apply
them once they become available.
Panel Upgrades and License Keys
Note that some Panel licenses do not grant the permission to perform complex upgrades
(upgrades that change the major version number: Say, from 10.3.1 to 10.4.0). On attempt to
perform such an upgrade, Panel will warn you about license limitations. Nevertheless, you
will still be able to perform the upgrade. When it is finished, you will need to obtain and install
the license key for the new Panel version. For more information about installing a license key
after upgrade, refer to the section Upgrading Your License Key (on page 34). If you experience
any problems with installing a license key, please contact Parallels technical support:
http://www.parallels.com/contact/.
Notes on updating procedures:

When upgrading to a new control panel version, you will be notified by e-mail of upgrade
procedure start and end. The notification message will include the event log and a list of
installed packages, if upgrade is successful. However, you may not receive any error
notice if your mail server fails. In this case you can check for errors in the
autoinstaller3.log file located in the /tmp directory on the server hard drive.

All control panel operations are suspended during installation of the so-called “base”
packages that affect the control panel’s core functionality.

Starting from 10.3 Panel provides the ability to install alternative component versions
(PHP 5.3, MySQL 5.5, etc.) right from the Updates and Upgrades page.
In this section:
Changing Updater Settings ............................................................................... 187
Reporting Installation and Upgrade Problems ................................................... 187
Server Administration
187
Changing Updater Settings
By default, updates for Parallels Plesk Panel and your operating system are downloaded
from the official updates server at http://autoinstall.plesk.com.
 If you want to receive Parallels Plesk Panel updates from another location on
the network:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Updates. Updater will open in a new browser window or
tab.
2. If Updater starts downloading updates and you would only like to change
settings at the moment, click Cancel.
3. Click Updates source and installation settings, and specify the source of update
packages:

By default, the Official Parallels Updates server is selected. Specify the location where the
installation files will be stored. By default, the installation files are stored in the
/root/parallels directory.

If you select Mirror server, specify the .inf3 file location in the URL to the directory with
.inf3 file field. Specify the location where the installation files will be stored. By default,
the installation files are stored in the /root/parallels directory.

If you select Local media, specify the .inf3 file location in the Absolute path to the .inf3
file field.
4. If you use a proxy server, select the Connect using a proxy checkbox and
specify the following settings:

Specify proxy host name and port number in the Proxy address and port fields.

If this proxy server requires authentication, select the Require authentication checkbox
and specify username and password.
5. Click Save to save the settings.
Reporting Installation and Upgrade Problems
During Panel installation or upgrade, Parallels Installer captures all the problems it
encounters and sends them to Parallels. These reports do not contain any personal or
sensible information. Our technical experts analyze and resolve these problems making
future installations and upgrades more reliable.
It is up to you whether to let Parallels Installer submit problem reports to Parallels. The
Installer asks your decision during the first installation or upgrade and remembers it for the
Panel lifetime. If you decide to stop sending the reports to Parallels, run the Installer with the
following option:
<full path to Parallels Installer> --disable-feedback
Alternatively, to start submitting the reports, use:
<full path to Parallels Installer> --enable-feedback
CHAPTER 9
Mass E-mail Notifications
When you need to inform your customers of scheduled server maintenance, or to
introduce new service offerings, you can use the mass e-mail function (Tools & Settings
> Mass E-mail Messages) to send notices to all of your customers at once.
You may want to create message templates and use them when needed, or you can
send messages without using any templates.
Read this chapter to learn how to:

Create message templates for further use.

Send e-mail to multiple customers.
In this chapter:
Creating, Editing and Removing Message Templates ........................................189
Sending E-mail Notices......................................................................................191
Server Administration
189
Creating, Editing and Removing Message Templates
 To create a new message template:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Mass E-mail Messages (in the Tools group), and click
Add Mass E-Mail Template.
2. Specify template name in the Template name field.
3. Specify sender's name and e-mail address in the From field.
You can specify name, e-mail address or both. To specify both name and e-mail
address, use the following format: Name <your@e-mail.address>. For
example: John Doe <admin@server.com>.
4. Select the recipients for your e-mail message:

If you want to send a message to resellers, select the Resellers checkbox and
select the required group of recipients: All to send message to all resellers,
Selected only to send message only to the resellers you select manually, All
except selected to send message to all resellers except the ones you select
manually.

To select several resellers, click Select Addresses to the right of the Resellers
checkbox (note that this button is not available if All mode is selected), select the
required resellers in the Available resellers field and click Add >>. To remove
resellers from the list of selected resellers, select the required resellers in the
Selected resellers field and click << Remove.

If you want to send a message to customers, select the Customers checkbox and
select the required group of recipients: All to send message to all customers,
Selected only to send message only to the customers you select manually, All
except selected to send message to all customers except the ones you select
manually.

To select several customers, click Select Addresses to the right of the Customers
checkbox (note that this button is not available if All mode is selected), select the
required customers in the Available customers field and click Add >>. To remove
customers from the list of selected customers, select them in the Selected
customers field and click << Remove.

You can see your choice of selected recipients at any time by clicking the
respective Show/Hide Selected button.

If you want a copy of the message to be sent to your mailbox, select the Parallels
Panel administrator checkbox.
5. Specify the subject of your message in the Subject field.
6. Enter your message in the Message text field in plain text format. If you
want the Panel to automatically insert the recipient names into your
message, use <name> variable. The names will be taken from the
information specified in the Contact name field.
7. Click OK to save the template.
190
Server Administration
 To edit a message template:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Mass E-mail Messages (in the Tools group), and click
the required template in the list.
2. Make the required changes and click OK.
 To remove a message template:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Mass E-mail Messages (in the Tools group).
2. Select the checkbox corresponding to the message template you want
to remove and click Remove.
3. Confirm the removal and click OK.
Server Administration
191
Sending E-mail Notices
 To send an e-mail message to multiple customers at once:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Mass E-mail Messages (in the Tools group).
2. If you want to use a message template that you previously created (as
described in Creating, Editing and Removing Message Templates (on
page 189)), click the corresponding icon in the Send column. If you want
to send a custom message, click Send Mass E-Mail.
3. To insert text from a template, select the template you need and click
Insert.
4. Specify sender's name and e-mail address in the From field.
You can specify name, e-mail address or both. To specify both name and e-mail
address, use the following format: Name <your@e-mail.address>. For
example: John Doe <admin@server.com>.
5. Select the recipients for your e-mail message:

If you want to send a message to resellers, select the Resellers checkbox and
select the required group of recipients: All to send message to all resellers,
Selected only to send message only to the resellers you select manually, All
except selected to send message to all resellers except the ones you select
manually.

To select several resellers, click Select Addresses to the right of the Resellers
checkbox (note that this button is not available if All mode is selected), select the
required resellers in the Available resellers field and click Add >>. To remove
resellers from the list of selected resellers, select the required resellers in the
Selected resellers field and click << Remove.

If you want to send a message to customers, select the Customers checkbox and
select the required group of recipients: All to send message to all customers,
Selected only to send message only to the customers you select manually, All
except selected to send message to all customers except the ones you select
manually.

To select several customers, click Select Addresses to the right of the Customers
checkbox (note that this button is not available if All mode is selected), select the
required customers in the Available customers field and click Add >>. To remove
customers from the list of selected customers, select them in the Selected
customers field and click << Remove.

You can see your choice of selected recipients at any time by clicking the
respective Show/Hide Selected button.

If you want a copy of the message to be sent to your mailbox, select the Parallels
Panel administrator checkbox.
6. Specify the subject of your message in the Subject field.
192
Server Administration
7. Enter your message in the Message text field in plain text format. If you
want Parallels Plesk Panel to automatically insert the recipient names
into your message, use the <name> variable. The names will be taken
from the information specified in the Contact name field.
8. If you want to save this message (both the text itself and information
about its recipients) as a template for further use, select the check box
to the left of Save text to a new template named field and specify the template
name in this field.
9. Click OK to send the message. If you have chosen to save the message
contents as a template, a template will be created and placed in the list
of available templates.
Server Administration
193
Managing Panel from Mobile Devices
If you need a mobile app to keep pulse on Panel 10.4+ server indicators, use the
Parallels Plesk Mobile Server Manager. If you also require to take immediate actions
on Panel servers right from your mobile device, take advantage of the other
application, Parallels Plesk Mobile Server Manager. This section discusses the
features of these apps, their installation and usage instructions.
Application Features
With Mobile Server Monitor, administrators can:

View the list of services on a particular server.

View information about a server: OS, CPU, Panel version and so on.

View vital indicators of a server health: CPU load average, memory consumption,
swap usage, etc.
Receive information about certain Panel events.

Mobile Server Manager incorporates the features of Mobile Server Monitor and
additionally gives administrators control over core Panel administration functions.
With Mobile Server Manager, administrators can:

View the list of services on a particular server.

View information about a server: OS, CPU, Panel version and so on.


View vital indicators of a server health: CPU load average, memory consumption,
swap usage, etc.
Receive information about certain Panel events.

Authenticate themselves by a secret key.

View health monitor events.

Roll back and retrieve a Panel license key.

Restart a server.

Stop and start services on a particular server.
Note: Mobile Server Manager works only with servers which license includes Parallels
Plesk Panel Power Pack. This is the license add-on that can be acquired when
purchasing a Panel license or added to the license later on. Along with mobile server
management, Power Pack offers premium commercial antivirus protection, web hosting
of Tomcat applications and many other features. Learn more about Power Pack at
http://www.parallels.com/products/plesk/power-pack/. You are welcome to try Mobile
Server Monitor for free; if you feel you need control over your servers, add Power Pack
to your Panel servers and enjoy Mobile Server Manager.
Supported Operating Systems and Devices
194
Server Administration
Currently, Monitor and Manager apps are supported on Android, Blackberry, and
iPhone. Use the following links to download the apps from the respective app stores.
Operating System and Devices
Server Monitor
Android 2.2+ compatible
devices.
https://market.android.com/details?id= Not available yet
com.parallels.panel.monitor
BlackBerry OS 5.0+ compatible
devices:
http://appworld.blackberry.com/webst
ore/content/62901?lang=en

Bold 9000, 9650, 9700,
9780, 9788, 9790, 990,
9930

Curve 9330, 8350i,
8520, 8530, 8900, 8910,
8980

Curve 3G 9300, 9330,
9350, 9360, 9370, 9380
Pearl 3G 9100, 9105


Storm 9500, 9530

Torch 9800, 9810,
9850, 9860

Server Manager
Not available yet
Tour 9630
iPhone
http://itunes.apple.com/us/app/parallel Not available yet
s-panel-servermonitor/id477441966?mt=8
Installation and Usage Instructions
If you have a Panel installation, find guidelines on how to install and use the mobile
apps at the following URLs:

Mobile Server Monitor - https://Server_URL:8443/enterprise/mobile-monitor/
Mobile Server Manager - https://Server_URL:8443/enterprise/mobile-manager/ Here
Server_URL stands for the IP address or host name of your server.
CHAPTER 10
Migrating Data from Other Hosting
Platforms
You can transfer data (user accounts, settings, websites and e-mail) to your Parallels
Plesk Panel installation from other hosting servers managed by Plesk or other web
hosting software. If a migration fails, you can now easily find out the reason of the
failture in the log field of a migration task.
For a full list of web hosting platforms from which data transfer is supported, refer to the
Migration Guide at http://www.parallels.com/products/plesk/documentation/.
Important: Before transferring data from Windows-based servers, you need to obtain
the Parallels Panel Migration Manager Agent installer from Tools & Settings > Migration
Manager.
 To transfer user accounts and websites with applications from other
hosting servers:
1. Go to Tools & Settings > Migration Manager.
2. Click Start New Migration.
3. Leave the Transfer data from another server option selected, and specify the
following options:

The source server's address and port number (on Linux/Unix systems). Specify
either the IP address or the host name of the server, from which you want to
transfer data. If the source host is on an IPv6 address, then you should specify
the server's host name instead of IP address.

The administrator's username and password used for logging in to the source
server.
Note: The option Transfer data already processed by the migration agent and located on the
local host can be used to import data from a file, as described in the section
Importing Data From a File (on page 197). This is another way to transfer data,
which can be used in cases when the source server is offline, and you have
previously gathered data from it.
4. If you use Parallels Plesk Panel for Linux, you can also specify the
directory on the source server where the migration agent should be
uploaded.
5. Specify the path to the directory where temporary files will be stored.
6. Specify whether you want to transfer all data related to user accounts
and sites from the source server, or only specific items.
196
Server Administration
7. If some of objects from the source server (say, user accounts, domains,
and so on) already present on the destination server, you can replace
them by choosing the Replace existing objects checkbox.
8. If your source and destination servers are Linux-based, select the Use
rsync transport option to preserve disk space on the source and target
servers during migration.
This is extremely important in case you do not have much spare disk space on
either server.
9. Click Next>>. The migration manager will connect to the specified server
and gather information about the business objects of the source hosting
platform.
10. If you are transferring data from hosting platforms other than Parallels
Plesk Panel, select the version of the migration agent that must be used
and then click Next >>. Parallels Plesk Panel automatically selects the
appropriate agent version; however, if data transfer fails, you can try
selecting another version of migration agent.
11. If you have chosen to transfer only specific items, at this step, select
the checkboxes corresponding to the user accounts and websites that
you want to transfer. Panel shows what objects from a source server
already exist on a destination server. Also, specify what types of data
should be transferred:

All settings and content.

All settings and content except mail.

Only mail accounts with e-mail messages.
If you migrate the entire server, you are able to specify whether the source Panel
license if also migrated.
12. Click Next >>.
13. Once the data are retrieved from the source server, specify the new IP
addresses that should be used. If you have a great number of IP
addresses, at this step, you can download the current IP mapping file,
correct it in a text editor or by running a custom find-and-replace script,
and then upload it back to the server.
The syntax of the IP mapping file is shown in the following example:
10.10.10.10 192.168.1.2
Where 10.10.10.10 is an IP address used on the source server and
192.168.1.2 is a new IP address that should be used on the destination server.
There is a white space between the two IP addresses. When compiling the list of
addresses, place each mapping entry on a separate line.
14. Click Next >>. The data transfer process should start immediately.
In this chapter:
Importing Data From a File ................................................................................ 197
Server Administration
197
Importing Data From a File
In addition to using the Migration Manager function of Parallels Plesk Panel for
transferring data online from another server, you can use the Migration Manager
utilities to gather the data you want to transfer from a source server, store them as
archive files, and then import these data to a destination server.

For gathering data on Windows-based hosting servers, you will need to install and
use the migration-agent.msi program. Installation of the migration agent program is
described in the Migration Guide available at
http://www.parallels.com/products/plesk/resources/. After the migration agent is
installed on the source server, then you can continue with importing data as
described in the section Importing Data From Windows-based Servers (on page
199).

For gathering data on Linux/Unix-based servers, you will need to use the PleskX.pl
command line utility. This utility is typically located in
<parallels_panel_installation_directory>/PMM/Agents/PleskX/
on Linux/Unix-based servers, and in
<parallels_panel_installation_directory>\PMM\Migration\Platforms\Un
ixShared\PleskX\ on Windows-based servers. This procedure is described in the
section Importing Data From Linux/Unix-based Servers (on page 198).
In this section:
Importing Data From Linux/Unix-based Servers ................................................ 198
Importing Data From Windows-based Servers .................................................. 199
198
Server Administration
Importing Data From Linux/Unix-based Servers
 To transfer your data using the data import function:
1. Locate the following folders on your Parallels Plesk Panel server, and
copy all files from them to a single directory on the server, from which
you want to transfer data.

On Windows platforms, you need to copy all files from the following folders:
C:\Program
Files\Parallels\Plesk\PMM\Migration\Platforms\UnixShared\Pl
eskX\ and C:\Program
Files\Parallels\Plesk\PMM\Migration\Platforms\UnixShared\sh
ared\

On Linux/Unix platforms, you need to copy all files from the following folders:
<parallels_panel_installation_directory>/PMM/Agents/PleskX/
and
<parallels_panel_installation_directory>/PMM/Agents/shared.
2. On the source server, run the PleskX.pl utility with the appropriate
command line options:
 To make a copy of all data, issue the command
# PleskX.pl -dump-all  To make a copy of specific domains, issue the command
# PleskX.pl -dump-domains=<comma-separated list of domain
names>
 To make a copy of specific user accounts, issue the command
# PleskX.pl -dump-resellers=<comma-separated list of
resellers' IDs assigned by the source Parallels Panel system>
or
# PleskX.pl -dump-clients=<comma-separated list of clients'
IDs assigned by the source Parallels Panel system>
To read about additional command line options supported by the PleskX utility,
issue the command
# PleskX.pl --help

3. Once all the required files are created, open the file contentlist.xml to see what files were created. Move all these files,
including dump.xml, to the destination server.
4. In a web browser, log in as administrator to your Server Administration
Panel, go to Tools & Settings > Migration Manager, and then click Start
Migration.
5. Select the option Transfer data already processed by the migration agent and
located on the local host.
Server Administration
199
6. In the Migration data file location box, type the path to the directory where
you saved the data at the step 3.
7. Click Next >>.
If the XML file with information about business objects of the source host is found in
the specified directory, then the data import starts.
Importing Data From Windows-based Servers
In case if you tried transferring data online from Windows-based servers, and data
transfer failed, you can attempt to import these data. The data, if gathered successfully,
should be located on the destination server, in the temporary folder that you specified
in Parallels Plesk Panel during the previous attempt.
 To complete the data transfer using the data import function:
1. Log in as administrator to your Server Administration Panel, go to Tools
& Settings > Migration Manager, and then click Start Migration.
2. Select the option Transfer data already processed by the migration agent and
located on the local host.
3. In the Migration data file location box, type the path to the temporary
directory where the data were saved during the previous attempt.
For example, C:\temp.
4. Click Next >>.
If the xml file with information about business objects of the source host is found in
the specified directory, then the data import starts.
CHAPTER 11
Serving Your Customers and Employing
Resellers
In this chapter:
Understanding Plans and Subscriptions ............................................................ 201
Properties of Plans and Subscriptions ............................................................... 207
Serving Non-Technical Customers .................................................................... 233
Serving Customers ............................................................................................ 234
Employing Resellers.......................................................................................... 247
Adding Services to Your Offerings..................................................................... 250
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
201
Understanding Plans and Subscriptions
Parallels Plesk Panel lets you organize your business by means of service plans and
subscriptions.
Hosting service customers
Service plan is a set of services and resources offered to hosting service customers.
Typically, the resources include disk space on the server and bandwidth for hosting
websites, and the services include web hosting service, mail hosting service, and such. It is
assumed that a service plan you create in the Panel represents your particular business
offer.
There are also add-on plans which let you broaden the amount of resources and/or services
provided to a customer with a particular service plan.
Subscription is an instance of service plan assigned to a customer. To provide a particular
customer with services and resources offered with a service plan, you subscribe the
customer to the service plan, or, in other words, you create a subscription for the customer.
For more details about how subscriptions are related to service plans and add-ons, refer to
the section titled Relations Between Subscriptions and Service/Add-on Plans (on page 203).
Actually, not only customers can be subscribed to hosting services and host their websites
and mail, the Panel administrator and resellers can have their own subscriptions as well,
which they may use for their own purposes.
Subscriptions are meant for multi-domain hosting, each hosting subscription provides disk
space and other resources, and services defined by the plan and necessary for hosting
several sites. Each subscription is assigned a system user account, used by a hosting
customer to connect to the server over FTP and SSH or Remote Desktop connection, and an
IP address, which can be exclusively allocated for the subscription or shared with other
subscriptions. Each subscription is also linked to a domain, called 'main domain' - a domain
created along with the subscription, which is necessary for allocating system resources. All
subscriptions are named after their 'main domains', and such domains cannot be transferred
from one subscription to another. The following diagram explains how domains and websites
are hosted with subscriptions.
202
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
Here, example.com and jenny.net are main domains of the subscriptions, and other domains
depicted as orange rectangles are websites hosted with these subscriptions.
Resellers
If your business model employs resellers, plans and subscriptions work as well, almost in the
same way as they do for the hosting service customers. The differences are as follows:

In such a case, we are talking about reseller plans and reseller subscriptions.

Reseller add-on plans are not implemented.

A reseller subscription is not linked to a domain, a reseller subscription provides a set of
resources and services that the subscribed reseller redistributes by the means of service
subscriptions belonging to their customers or to themselves.
Note that Panel business model has some limitations. It is not possible to:

Convert customer accounts into reseller accounts.

Move customer accounts from one reseller to another. You can perform this operation
indirectly by moving the customer subscription from one account to another. For more
details on how to change a subscription owner, refer to the section Managing Service
Subscriptions (on page 244).
In this section:
Allocation of Resources and Services ............................................................... 203
Relations Between Subscriptions and Service/Add-on Plans ............................ 203
Syncing Subscriptions and Plans. States of Subscriptions ................................ 205
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
203
Allocation of Resources and Services
Hosting service customers
Service plans define potential services, the Panel does not check if a service or a resource
that a service plan should provide is actually available in the system. For example, when
creating a plan, you can select to provide ColdFusion when ColdFusion is not installed on the
server, and the Panel will let you do it and will show no error or warning messages.
Subscriptions provide actual resources and services, which are allocated during creation of
each subscription.
Resellers
Said above is true for reseller subscriptions, and for the service plans that resellers create. A
reseller can create a service plan which includes unlimited amounts of all resources, and all
services and privileges, no matter how many of the resources and services are actually
provided with their reseller subscription.
Relations Between Subscriptions and Service/Add-on
Plans
Hosting subscriptions
Normally, a subscription is associated with a service plan, and this association is reflected in
a list of subscriptions: each subscription name contains the service plan name put in
brackets at the end. The amount of resources and services provided with a subscription can
be extended by associating the subscription with add-on plans. A subscription can be
associated with several add-ons, but each add-on can be added to the subscription only
once.
The following chart represents how hosting plan subscriptions are associated with plans and
add-ons.
204
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
205
It is also possible that a subscription is not associated with a service plan, and so it cannot
be associated with any add-on plans: add-ons are only added to a "main" service plan. We
call such subscriptions custom subscriptions, and their names are extended with "(Custom)" in
the list of subscriptions. Having a custom subscription may be useful in case you want to
provide services on some specific terms which outstand from the usual offerings in your
business model.
You can change the association between a subscription and plans at any time as follows:

Associate the subscription with another service plan.

Add and remove add-on plans.

Remove the subscription association with the service plan and add-ons.
Reseller subscriptions
Reseller subscription is either associated with a reseller plan, or is a custom subscription not
associated with any plan.
Syncing Subscriptions and Plans. States of Subscriptions
Subscriptions associated with a particular plan are synchronized, or synced, with it: any
changes made to the plan are automatically applied to all its subscriptions. This is true for all
kinds of plans: service plans, their add-ons, and reseller plans.
The Panel allows the following deviations from the default subscription state of being synced
with its plans:

Locked state, which means locked for syncing, indicates that a subscription is excluded
from syncing with the associated plans.
A subscription gets locked if you change the parameters of the subscription, without
changing the associated service plan. Such locking secures your customizations so that
they are not overwritten the next time you change the plan and all its subscriptions get
synced.

Unsynced state indicates that some services or resources offered with the associated
plan(s) cannot be actually provided with the subscription.
Unsynced subscriptions
A subscription is automatically marked as 'Unsynced' if the Panel cannot provision the
resources and/or services defined by the plan. This may happen in the following cases:

When the subscription is created.


When properties of the associated plan are changed.
When an add-on plan is added to or removed from the subscription.
206
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
Hosting Subscriptions
In case a plan offers a privilege which makes it possible for a subscriber to change a
particular resource or service, this resource/service allocation is not synced. For example, if
a subscription provides the privilege of DNS zone management, then the DNS zone settings
of the associated service plan are ignored during synchronization.
 To know which of the subscription's resources or services are not synced with
the plan:
1. Go to Subscriptions, and click the unsynced subscription name.
2. Click Sync.
The Panel will retry syncing the subscription with associated plans, and will display the
conflicting properties if syncing fails.
Be sure to take the note of the conflict report: which properties are affected, and what the
Plan value and the Available value are.
Clicking OK at this page will initiate setting the subscription values according to the
available values, Cancel will leave everything unchanged.
Once you have identified the problem, you can resolve it. There are two possible ways:
1. Fine-tune the plan to conform to the system actual state.
2. Fine-tune the system to provide resources and services offered with the plan.
 To change the plan properties to conform to the system:
1. Go to Service plans > <plan name>.
2. Adjust values of the problem properties so that they correspond to the
Available values (see above).
3. Click Update & Sync.
The subscriptions will be synced automatically.
 To adjust the system and re-sync a subscription:
1. Adjust your system: install missing components, add hard disks - whatever is
indicated by the conflict report.
2. Go to Subscriptions, and click the unsynced subscription name.
3. Click Sync.
The Panel will retry syncing the subscription with associated plans.
Reseller Subscriptions
 To know which of the subscription's resources or services are not synced with
the plan:
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
207
1. Go to Resellers, and click the unsynced reseller name.
2. Click Sync.
The Panel will retry syncing the subscription with the associated plan, and will display the
conflicting properties if syncing fails.
Be sure to take the note of the conflict report: which properties are affected, and what the
Plan value and the Available value are.
Clicking OK at this page will initiate setting the subscription values according to the
available values, Cancel will leave everything unchanged.
Once you have identified the problem, you can resolve it. There are two possible ways:
1. Fine-tune the plan to conform with the system actual state.
2. Fine-tune the system to provide resources and services offered with the plan.
 To change the plan properties to conform with the system:
1. Go to Service plans.
2. Click the Reseller Plans tab and click the <plan name> in the list.
3. Adjust values of the problem properties so that they correspond to the
Available values (see above).
4. Click Update & Sync.
The subscriptions will be synced automatically.
 To adjust the system and re-sync a subscription:
1. Adjust your system: configure IP addresses, add more hard disks - whatever
is indicated by the conflict report.
2. Go to Resellers, and click the unsynced reseller name.
3. Click Sync.
The Panel will retry syncing the reseller subscription with associated plans.
Properties of Plans and Subscriptions
In this section:
Hosting Plans and Subscriptions ....................................................................... 208
Reseller Plans and Subscriptions ...................................................................... 230
208
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
Hosting Plans and Subscriptions
Properties of a hosting plan and subscription are grouped as follows:

Resources
Includes validity period, policy on overusing resources, system resources like disk space
and traffic, and service resources like websites, subdomains, mailboxes, databases and
so on.

Permissions
Includes provided services and privileges.
Note: Some permissions prevent settings of the following services from syncing (on page
205). See the details in the Permissions section (on page 214).

Hosting Parameters (service plan only)
Includes parameters of the provided hosting service. .

PHP Settings
Includes the customizable PHP settings.

Mail (service plan only)
Includes parameters of the provided mail service.

DNS (service plan only)
Specifies if the DNS zones of the subscription's domains should be master or slave.
Note: In case the DNS zone management privilege is provided, this parameter is not synced,
and subscribers can set up this parameter on a per-domain basis.

Performance (service plan only)
Includes parameters that affect performance of all services provided with the plan.

Logs & Statistics (service plan only)
Includes settings of how statistics and logs of the plan's subscriptions should be stored
Note: Hosting, Mail, DNS, Performance, Logs & Statistics parameters are fully visible and
editable in the Server Administration Panel only for service plans. For subscriptions,
these parameters are available only in the Control Panel. To view or modify the
parameters of a particular subscription, go to Subscriptions and click Control Panel to the
right of the subscription name. Also note that the availability of these parameters to a
subscriber depends on the permissions.

Applications
Lets you select which applications should be available to subscribers.
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
In this section:
Visibility of Hosting Features in Control Panel ................................................... 210
Resources......................................................................................................... 210
Permissions ...................................................................................................... 214
Hosting Parameters .......................................................................................... 218
Scripting Options............................................................................................... 220
PHP Settings .................................................................................................... 222
Customizing PHP Configuration ........................................................................ 223
Mail ................................................................................................................... 227
DNS .................................................................................................................. 228
Performance ..................................................................................................... 228
Logs & Statistics ............................................................................................... 228
Applications ...................................................................................................... 229
Additional Services ........................................................................................... 230
209
210
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
Visibility of Hosting Features in Control Panel
Since version 10.4, Panel hides from customers those hosting features that are not provided
in their subscription. The visibility of GUI elements responsible for a certain feature is
determined by permissions and resource limits of a subscription. Note that when you (as the
administrator) log in to the customer's Control Panel, you see GUI elements regardless of
customer's permissions. The table below explains GUI visibility logic.
Resource Limit > 0
Visible to a
Customer
Visible to the
Administrator
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Permission = True
Resource Limit > 0
Permission = False
Resource Limit = 0
Permission = True
Resource Limit = 0
Permission = False
For example, when the number of Domains in a subscription is 10 and the Domains management
permission is off, a customer does not see the Add New Domain button in Control Panel.
Nevertheless, this button is available to the administrator that logs in to the customer's
Control Panel.
Resources Without Numerical Limits
If the resource type is logical or in other words, it can be just switched on or off (say, a
scripting language support), its visibility is controlled by a certain permission only. For
example, if the Hosting settings management permission is granted, a customer is able to toggle
the support of various scripting languages for their site. If the permission is not granted, the
customer sees the list of languages that are switched on for their site in the read only mode.
The disabled languages are not shown in the list.
Resources
Overuse policy
This policy defines what happens if a subscription's usage of resources reaches limit values.
There are three different overuse scenarios, feel free to select the one that fits you best:

Suspend a subscription.

Allow overusing only disk space and traffic.

Allow overusing all resources.
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
211
Note: The overuse policy does not apply to the limits set on size of mailboxes. Therefore,
even if you enable overuse, be sure to allocate enough disk space to mailboxes.
Disk space
The total amount of disk space allocated to the subscription. It includes disk space occupied
by all files related to the subscription: contents of websites, databases, applications,
mailboxes, log files and backup files.
Traffic
The amount of data that can be transferred from the subscription's websites and FTP/Samba
shares during a month.
Notify upon reaching
Available only if overuse is not allowed. Sets the soft quota for disk space or traffic usage in
order to prevent subscriptions from suspension. When the quota is reached, the Panel sends
notifications to users and/or e-mail addresses specified at Settings > Notifications: Resource
usage limits exceeded by subscription option.
Sites published with Web Presence Builder
The number of websites that can be published with Web Presence Builder.
Domains
The total number of domain names that the subscriber will be able to host within the
subscription. This includes websites, web forwardings that point to websites hosted on other
servers, and domain names on which a website or a web forwarding is not yet set up
(domains with no hosting).
Mobile sites
The total number of websites that the subscriber will be able to host with the UNITY Mobile
online service, which optimizes sites for viewing on mobile devices.
Subdomains
The total number of subdomains that the subscriber will be able to host within the
subscription.
Domain aliases
The total number of additional alternative domain names that the subscriber will be able to
use for their websites.
Mailboxes
The total number of mailboxes that the subscriber can host within the subscription.
Mailbox size
212
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
The amount of disk space that is allocated to each mailbox in a subscription for storing e-mail
messages and auto-reply attachment files.
Total mailboxes quota (available only for Windows hosting)
The total amount of disk space in megabytes available for all mailboxes within the
subscription.
Mailing lists
The total number of mailing lists that the subscriber can host within the subscription.
Additional FTP accounts
The maximum number of FTP accounts used to access the files and folders created within a
subscription. This number does not include an account that is always created during the
subscription creation.
Databases (Unix hosting)
The total number of databases that can be created on the Panel database servers and used
by the subscription's websites.
MySQL databases and Microsoft SQL Server databases (Windows hosting)
The maximum number of MySQL and Microsoft SQL Server databases respectively that can
be created on the Panel database servers and used by the subscription's websites.
MySQL databases quota and Microsoft SQL databases quota (Windows hosting)
The maximum amount of disk space (in megabytes) that the subscription's MySQL and
Microsoft SQL Server databases respectively can occupy.
Validity period/Expiration Date
The term for a subscription.
In service plan properties, it is Validity period: it is used only when a subscription is created:
the Panel derives the subscription expiration date from it.
In subscription properties, it is Expiration date: At this date, the subscription will be suspended,
meaning that all sites within the subscription will be suspended, their web, FTP and mail
services will no longer be accessible to the Internet users, and the subscriber and their users
will not be able to log in to the Control Panel.
Subscriptions are not renewed automatically, so to bring a subscription's services back to
operation, you will need to manually activate the subscription (on page 244).
Java applications
The total number of Java applications or applets that can be hosted on the subscription's
websites.
Web users
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
213
The total number of personal web pages that the subscriber can host for other users under
their websites. This service is mostly used in educational institutions that host noncommercial personal pages of their students and staff. These pages usually have addresses
like http://example.com/~webuser.
FrontPage accounts (Windows hosting)
The maximum number of Microsoft FrontPage accounts that the subscriber can create within
the subscription.
Shared SSL links (Windows hosting)
The total number of shared SSL links that the subscriber can use within the subscription.
ODBC connections (Windows hosting)
The total number of ODBC connections that the subscriber can use within the subscription.
ColdFusion DSN connections (Windows hosting)
The total number of ColdFusion DSN connections that the subscriber can use within the
subscription.
214
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
Permissions
Permissions define what privileges and services are provided with the subscription. To view
the full list of resources provided in a service plan and subscription, refer to Hosting Plans and
Subscriptions (on page 208).
DNS zone management
Allows the subscriber to manage the DNS zones of their domains.
Note: If this permission is provided, then the DNS service settings are not synced.
Hosting settings management
Allows modifying parameters of hosting service provided with the subscription: changing
hosting account features and switching on or off support for programming and scripting
languages, custom error documents, SSL support, and (Windows only) Microsoft FrontPage
support. In addition, it allows you to toggle the following permissions: Hosting performance
settings management and Common PHP settings management.
Note: If this permission is provided, then the mentioned hosting parameters are not synced.
Common PHP settings management
Allows the subscriber to adjust common PHP settings individually for each website
(subdomain) in their subscription.
Note: If this permission is provided, then the common PHP settings are not synced.
Setup of potentially insecure web scripting options that override provider's policy. Allows the
subscriber to override the hosting security policy, if it is set up. To learn about configuring the
policy, refer to the section Scripting Options (on page 220).
Management of access to server over SSH (Linux\Unix hosting)
Provides the Access over SSH service, which lets the subscriber access a server shell over
SSH under their system user account. Also, lets the subscriber set up such hosting
parameter as SSH access to server shell under the subscription's system user.
Note: If this permission is provided, then the mentioned hosting parameter is not synced.
Management of access to server over Remote Desktop (Windows hosting)
Lets the subscriber access the server via Remote Desktop protocol.
Anonymous FTP management
Provides the anonymous FTP service, which lets the subscriber set up a directory shared
over FTP protocol and available to anonymous users. A subscription should reside on a
dedicated IP address in order to provide this service.
Scheduler management
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
215
Provides the Scheduler service, which lets the subscriber schedule running of scripts or
utilities.
If you are running Parallels Plesk Panel on Linux, you can learn about the new security
settings applied to scheduled tasks in the section Execution of Scripts via Cron Task
Scheduler (on page 222).
Spam filter management
Lets the subscriber customize filtering settings of SpamAssassin spam filter.
Antivirus management
Lets the subscriber change settings of server-side protection of incoming and outgoing mail
from viruses.
Data backup and restoration using the server repository
Provides the Backup/Restore service which lets the subscriber use storage on the server for
their backups.
Data backup and restoration using a personal FTP repository
Provides the Backup/Restore service which lets the subscriber use external FTP servers for
storing their backups.
Web statistics management
Lets the subscriber set up such hosting parameter as Web statistics, that is, selecting which
web statistics engine should be used, and toggling if the data is accessible via a specific
password-protected directory.
Note: If this permission is provided, then the mentioned hosting parameter is not synced.
Log rotation management
Lets the subscriber adjust the cleanup and recycling of processed log files for his or her sites.
Also, lets the subscriber remove log files.
Note: If this permission is provided, then the Logs & Statistics parameters (on page 228) are
not synced.
Access to Application Catalog
Provides the subscriber with access to prepackaged applications that can be installed on
websites. If you select this option, be sure to that PHP support is activated on the Hosting
Parameters tab and the PHP safe mode is off (Hosting Parameters > PHP Settings).
Domains management
Lets the subscriber add and remove domains, create websites and set up web forwardings.
Subdomains management
216
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
Lets the subscriber set up additional websites accessible by <subdomain>.<domain>
addresses.
Domain aliases management
Lets the subscriber set up additional alternative domain names for their websites and allow.
Additional FTP accounts management
Lets the subscriber manage FTP accounts for accessing the subscription's files and folders.
Java applications management
Lets the subscriber install Java applications and applets on their websites.
Mailing lists management
Lets the subscriber use mailing lists provided by the GNU Mailman software.
Note: If this permission is provided, then the Enable mailing lists parameter (on page 227) is
not synced.
Hosting performance settings management
Allows the subscriber to adjust performance PHP settings individually for each website
(subdomain) in their subscription. In addition, lets the subscriber set up the limits on
bandwidth usage and number of connections to their websites.
Note: If this permission is provided, then the following settings are not synced: PHP
performance settings, performance settings (on page 228) for bandwidth usage and the
number of connections.
IIS application pool management (Windows hosting)
Provides the dedicated IIS pool service, and lets the subscriber manage their IIS application
pool: enable or disable it, and set up the maximum amount of CPU that the pool may use.
Note: If this permission is provided, then the Performance parameter (on page 228) called Use
dedicated pool is not synced.
Additional write/modify permissions management (Windows hosting)
Lets the subscriber toggle such hosting parameter as Additional write/modify permissions.
These permissions are required if a subscriber's web applications use a file-based database
(like Jet) located in the root of httpdocs folder. Please note that selecting this option might
seriously compromise the websites security.
Note: If this permission is provided, then the mentioned hosting parameter is not synced.
Shared SSL management (Windows hosting)
Provides the shared SSL service, and lets the subscriber set up shared SSL links for their
websites within the subscription.
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
Hard disk quota assignment
Lets the subscriber set up such hosting parameter as Hard disk quota.
Note: If this permission is provided, then the mentioned hosting parameter is not synced.
Database server selection
Lets the subscriber select a database server of each type for creating their databases, as
opposed to always using the default database server.
Access to advanced operations: Website Copying and Website Maintenance Mode
Specifies whether the website copying and maintenance mode are available to the
subscriber in Control Panel > Websites & Domains > Show Advanced Operations. If denied, the
Website Copying and Website Maintenance Mode links are not shown to the subscriber.
Password-protected directories management
Specifies whether the protected directories feature is available to the subscriber in Control
Panel > Websites & Domains > Show Advanced Operations. If denied, the Password-protected
directories link is not shown to the subscriber.
Ability to manage auxiliary user accounts
Specifies whether a subscriber can manage auxiliary user accounts on the Control Panel >
Users tab. If even a single subscription under a customer's hosting account has this
permission, the Users tab is available to auxiliary users who have the Manage users and roles
permission. Thus, users may have access to user management even if it is explicitly
prohibited for a certain subscription but is allowed on another subscription under the same
customer's account.
217
218
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
Hosting Parameters
These parameters define the hosting service provided with the plan.
Note: Unless specifically noted, the parameters are not synced if the Hosting management
permission is selected.
Enable hosting
Defines if the hosting service is actually provided with the plan.
Clear this option to make up a service plan that provides only mail service. Subscribers of
such a plan will be able to have 'domains without hosting' which will serve mailboxes.
Hard disk quota
Hard quota imposed on disk space in addition to the soft quota (set with the option Notify
when reaching (on page 210)). Hard disk quota will not allow writing more files to the web
space when the limit is reached: users will get an "Out of disk space" error at an attempt to
write files.
Note: (Linux/Unix hosting) Confirm that your operating system supports hard disk quota
before you set any value other than Unlimited. In case you define a hard quota when it is not
supported, you will get a synchronization conflict on all the plan's subscriptions. For details
on syncing subscriptions with plans, refer to the section Syncing Subscriptions and Plans (on
page 205).
SSL support
Allows setting up SSL encryption on websites hosted within the subscription.
Web statistics
Selects a statistics engine that will create reports on how the subscription's websites are
visited: how many people visited a site, and which webpages they viewed.
The accessible via password protected directory /plesk-stat/webstat option allows a subscriber view
website statistics at URLs like https://example.com/plesk-stat/webstat using their system
user account login and password.
Note: This parameter is not synced if the Web statistics management permission is selected.
Custom error documents
Allows subscribers to design and use their own error pages that the web server returns with
HTTP error codes.
SSH access to server shell under the subscription's system user (Linux/Unix hosting)
Allows subscribers to upload securely web content to the server through SSH.
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
219
Note: This parameter is not synced if the Management of access to server over SSH permission is
selected.
Scripting
Support for programming and scripting languages that should be interpreted, executed or
otherwise processed by a web server: Microsoft ASP.NET framework, PHP hypertext
preprocessor (PHP), Common Gateway Interface (CGI), Perl, Python, Fast Common
Gateway Interface (FastCGI), Microsoft or Apache Active Server Pages (ASP), Server Side
Includes (SSI), ColdFusion, and Miva scripting required for running Miva e-commerce
solutions.
To learn more about adjustable PHP settings, see the section PHP Settings (on page 222).
Additional write/modify permissions (Windows hosting)
This option is required if subscriber's web applications use a file-based database (like Jet)
located in the root of httpdocs folder. Please note that selecting this option might seriously
compromise the website security.
Allow web users to use scripts
Allows scripting at web pages available at URLs like
http://example.com/~<username>/<webpage>, where <username> refers to a web user.
Web users are individuals who do not need their own domain names. This service is popular
with educational institutions that host non-commercial personal pages of their students and
staff.
FrontPage support (Windows hosting). The options in the FrontPage support group allow
subscribers to connect to the server and create websites with Microsoft Frontpage.
220
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
Scripting Options
To isolate sites in shared hosting environments, you can apply a server-wide security policy.
The policy enforces execution of PHP scripts through FastCGI handlers and prohibits Panel
users from switching on insecure hosting features and options.
You can set the policy to prohibit the Panel users from changing the following hosting
options:

PHP support

PHP handler type (Apache module, ISAPI, FastCGI, CGI)

PHP safe mode

Python support

Perl support

FastCGI support

Miva support

SSI support


SSL support
Access to the server console over SSH or Remote Desktop

ASP support

ASP.NET support (applicable only to Windows-based servers)


ColdFusion support
Additional write/modify permissions (applicable only to Windows-based servers)

Dedicated IIS application pool (applicable only to Windows-based servers)
 To set up and apply the policy:
1. Modify the file site_isolation_settings.ini located in
/usr/local/psa/admin/conf/ directory on Linux systems, and
%plesk_dir%\admin\conf\ on Windows systems, where %plesk_dir%
is an environment variable for the Parallels Plesk Panel installation directory
on Windows systems.
The file contains the following predefined entries:
;php = any
;php_handler_type = fastcgi
;python = off
;perl = off
;fastcgi = any
;miva = off
;ssi = any
;ssl = on
;shell = /usr/local/psa/bin/chrootsh
;asp = any
;php_safe_mode = on
;coldfusion = off
On means that an option should be switched on, off means switched off, and any means
that an option is not restricted.
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
221
You can uncomment the corresponding lines by removing the semicolons (;) and use the
predefined values, or use custom settings for the policy. The policy settings can take the
following values:
php = on | off | any
php_handler_type = (Unix: module | Windows: isapi) | fastcgi | cgi
| any
python = on | off | any
perl = on | off | any
fastcgi = on | off | any
miva = on | off | any
ssi = on | off | any
ssl = on | off | any
shell = (Unix: <string> Windows: on | off) | any
asp = on | off | any
asp_dot_net = on | off | any
php_safe_mode = on | off | any
coldfusion = on | off | any
write_modify = on | off | any
iis_app_pool = on | off | any
2. To ensure that your policy settings are applied to newly created accounts
and hosting service subscriptions, set the following settings when creating
service plans:

In reseller plan properties, click the Permissions tab, clear the checkbox Setup of
potentially insecure hosting web scripting options that override provider's policy.

In hosting plan properties, click the Permissions tab, and clear the checkbox Hosting
settings management. If you decide to allow your users to manage hosting settings, then
clear the checkbox Setup of potentially insecure hosting web scripting options that override
provider's policy. Alternately, you can apply the policy and override any previously
allowed permissions for hosting settings management by clicking the Hosting
Parameters tab, and then clicking the link apply secure settings preset.
If the Hosting settings management permission is granted, but the permission Setup of potentially
insecure hosting web scripting options that override provider's policy is not, the users will be able to
change only the hosting options that are not restricted by the server-wide security policy. If
these both permissions are granted, the users will be able to change all available hosting
options, regardless of the security policy. When a Panel user, who is allowed to override the
security policy, changes through the Control Panel an option restricted by the policy, the
Panel warns them about that and asks to confirm the operation.
If you want to allow a specific user to override the policy, go to Subscriptions > subscription
name > Customize > Permissions tab, and select the option Setup of potentially insecure hosting
web scripting options that override provider's policy.
If you want to allow all users subscribed to a service plan to override the policy, go to Service
Plans > plan name > Permissions tab, or Service Plans > Reseller Plans > plan name > Permissions
tab, and select the option Setup of potentially insecure hosting web scripting options that override
provider's policy.
In this section:
Execution of Scripts via Cron Task Scheduler (Linux Hosting) .......................... 222
222
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
Execution of Scripts via Cron Task Scheduler (Linux Hosting)
In previous versions of Panel, the users who were granted the permission to schedule tasks
with cron but were not allowed access to server shell, could still run scripts in the shell under
which the cron was running. This allowed them to gain access to the data that could be
potentially used to compromise the server. Starting from Parallels Plesk Panel 10.1,
execution of cron tasks is automatically restricted to the chrooted shell environment. This is
the default setting applied on clean installations of Panel 10.1 and in cases when data were
migrated from other platforms or earlier Plesk versions. If you upgraded to Parallels Plesk
Panel 10.1 from previous versions (including 10.0), then the chrooted shell is not
automatically selected so as not to break execution of any scheduled tasks that your
customers could have running.
If you trust your customers enough to allow execution of scripts in a non-chrooted
environment, then you can select the required shell by issuing the following command in the
console:
# /usr/local/psa/bin/server_pref -u -crontab-secure-shell "/bin/sh"
If you want to revert this setting and set again the default shell used by the system, issue the
following command in the console:
# /usr/local/psa/bin/server_pref -u -crontab-secure-shell ""
PHP Settings
You can adjust the following PHP settings on the Hosting Parameters tab:

PHP handler type.

ISAPI (only on Windows). This mode uses less server resources, but a website is
isolated only if it is operating in a dedicated IIS application pool.

Apache module (only on Linux). This mode uses less server resources, but it is the least
secure option. A site is isolated only if PHP safe mode is switched on.

FastCGI application. This mode is faster than CGI, but consumes more memory. It
provides site isolation.

CGI application. This is the slowest mode of operation, but it uses the least amount of
memory.
Note: Switching PHP from Apache module to FastCGI application may break functionality of
existing PHP scripts.

PHP version (only on Windows).

Version 4.x is outdated, you should use it only if you need to host some old PHP
application versions.

Version 5.x is current and its use is recommended.
You have the ability to adjust PHP configuration individually for each hosting plan or
subscription. For this purpose, Panel exposes a number of PHP configuration settings on the
PHP Settings tab. To learn more about custom per-subscription PHP configuration, refer to the
section Customizing PHP Configuration (on page 223).
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
223
Customizing PHP Configuration
PHP is one of the most popular scripting languages for creating dynamic web pages. The
majority of today's websites and web applications are based on PHP scripts. Thus, site
administrators should understand how they can control the execution of PHP scripts.
Typically, PHP behavior is defined by a number of configuration settings. These settings
specify various script execution aspects, like performance (for example, the amount of
memory a script can use), security (for example, access to file system and services), and so
on. Administrators may adjust these settings for a number of reasons:

Preventing a memory leak or server hang-up by poorly written scripts.

Protecting data from malicious scripts.

Meeting the requirements of a certain web app.

Testing own scripts and other.
Custom PHP Settings in Panel
Generally, PHP settings are defined by the server-wide configuration file. For Linux it is,
typically, /etc/php.ini and for Windows %plesk_dir%\Additional\PleskPHP5\php.ini. This file defines PHP configuration
for all websites hosted on your server. Since Panel 10.4, PHP settings are exposed to Panel
GUI and you have the ability to adjust them individually for each hosting plan or subscription.
Moreover, your customers (if allowed) can adjust your PHP settings preset individually for
each of their websites and subdomains. See the PHP settings hierarchy on the diagram
below.
224
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
225
You can set the custom PHP configuration on the PHP Settings tab of a certain service plan,
add-on plan, or subscription. PHP settings from a higher level act as a preset for a lower
level, thus each lower level overrides them. For example, you can consciously apply some
PHP limitations to a service plan and then offer your customers the add-on plan that removes
the limitations. PHP settings of the add-on plan will override the settings defined in the main
service plan.
If customers have the corresponding permissions, they can specify the PHP configuration
that is unique for each website (or subdomain) in their subscription.
Groups of PHP Settings
For convenience, all PHP settings in Panel are divided into three groups:

Performance settings.
These settings define how scripts work with system resources. For example: Use the
memory_limit parameter to limit the amount of memory for a script and, as a
consequence, to prevent memory leaks; or prevent scripts from tying up the server by
limiting the maximum time scripts are allowed to run in max_execution_time.

Common settings.
This group contains other commonly used PHP settings. Generally, these are: Security
settings (say, the PHP safe mode toggle or the permission to register global variables),
error reporting settings (say, the directive to log errors), and other.

Additional directives.
If you cannot find particular parameters among performance or common settings, add
them in the PHP Settings > Additional configuration directives field. All directives from that field
will be included in the final PHP configuration. Say, if you want PHP to log errors to your
own file, add the line: error_log=/tmp/my_file.log.
You can use the {DOCROOT} placeholder in your directives. It stands for the document
root directory of a domain which gets custom PHP configuration.
Note that additional directives are available only to the Panel administrator. Your
customers do not have a corresponding field in Control Panel.
Important: If you use Panel for Windows or Panel for Linux where PHP runs not as an
Apache module, your customers are able to override some PHP settings regardless of any
permissions. They can use the ini_set() function in their scripts to change values of the
following parameters: memory_limit, max_execution_time, and those of your
additional directives that PHP allows to set anywhere (PHP_INI_ALL directives; learn more
at http://php.net/manual/en/ini.list.php (http://php.net/manual/en/ini.list.php)).
The Default Values of PHP Parameters
You can set the value of each parameter in PHP Settings either by selecting a value from a
preset, typing a custom value, or leaving the Default value. In the latter case, Panel takes the
parameter value from the server-wide PHP configuration. The only exceptions are add-on
plans: the value set to Default on the add-on's PHP Settings tab will keep the parameter's value
from the main service plan.
Allowing Customers to Change PHP Settings
226
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
You can allow your customers to override subscription PHP settings with their own perwebsite and per-subdomain PHP configuration. For this purpose, you should use the
following permissions on the Permissions tab of a certain service plan or subscription:

Hosting performance settings management.
Along with management of some other settings, this permission grants customers access
to PHP settings from the performance settings group.

Common PHP settings management.
If granted, allows customers to adjust PHP settings from the common settings group.
Note that you can toggle these permissions for a plan (subscription) only if it has the granted
Hosting settings management permission.
Even if your customers do not have permissions to adjust PHP settings, you (as the
administrator) can always perform such per-website (subdomain) PHP configuration. To do
this, open a certain hosting account from Server Administration Panel and apply changes on
the PHP Settings tab of a particular website (subdomain). The Additional configuration directives
field will be also available to you.
Location of Website-Level PHP Settings in Panel for Windows
After you apply all the necessary modifications, you can view the modified php.ini for a
certain website. The paths to the ini files are kept in the Windows registry, under
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\PHP\Per Directory Values. For example:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\PHP\Per Directory
Values\C\Inetpub\vhosts\<DOMAIN NAME>\httpdocs
where <DOMAIN NAME> stands for a certain domain name.
Learn more about PHP settings in Windows registry at
http://php.net/manual/en/configuration.changes.php.
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
227
Mail
These parameters define the mail service provided with the plan.
Webmail
Provides the webmail service, which allows users of mailboxes within the subscription to
work with their mail using a web-based mail application.
Enable mailing lists
Turns on the mailing lists service provided by the GNU Mailman software on the
subscription's websites.
Note: This parameter is not synced if the permission Mailing lists management is selected.
Policy on mail for non-existent users
Defines how mail server should treat e-mail messages sent to e-mail addresses that are
supposed to be registered under the subscription's domains but actually do not exist. The
following options are available:

Bounce with message returns the mail back to sender with a notice.

Forward to address forwards the mail to another e-mail address.

Reject silently rejects the mail without accepting it. This setting can decrease mail server
load caused by a large amount of spam, which is often directed at randomly generated
user names. However, this might be useful to spammers because scanning your mail
server for valid e-mail addresses will speed up in such a case.

Redirect to external mail server with IP address (on Windows hosting), forwards the mail to the
specified mail server.
228
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
DNS
These parameters define how the DNS service running on the Panel-managed server will
serve DNS zones for websites hosted on the plan.
Master
A master or primary name server stores locally the zone file it serves, while a secondary
server only retrieves a copy of this file from the primary.
Slave
A slave or secondary server retrieves a copy of the zone file from the primary name server.
Performance
These system parameters define performance of all services provided with the plan.
Use dedicated IIS application pool (Windows hosting)
Enables the use of dedicated IIS application pool for web applications within the subscription.
Using dedicated IIS application pool dramatically improves the stability of web applications
due to worker process isolation mode. This mode gives each site hosted on the server a
possibility to allocate a separate process pool for execution of its web applications. This way,
malfunction in one application will not cause stopping of all the others. This is especially
useful when you are using shared hosting package. The Maximum CPU use (%) option limits the
amount of the server CPU that the pool can use.
Maximum bandwidth usage
Defines the maximum speed (measured in KB per second) that a domain can share among
all its connections.
Connections limited to
Defines the maximum number of simultaneous connections to web server for all websites
within the subscription. This setting is intended for preventing the websites from Denial of
Service (DOS) attacks and excessive usage of bandwidth.
Logs & Statistics
These parameters define how statistics and logs of the subscription should be stored.
Retain web and traffic statistics
Sets a period (in months) for which reports on the subscription's web statistics (generated by
selected web statistics component) and traffic statistics (generated by the Panel) should be
available.
Log rotation
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
229
Enables automatic cleanup and recycling of web server log files. You can also switch on
compression of processed log files and sending them to a specific e-mail address.
Applications
Depending on your Panel license, a number of prepackaged applications may be available to
you from the Panel. You can install them on your own sites and provision them to your users.
The applications are provided by the Application Catalog - an external repository of web
applications. The Application Catalog may be configured by providers to include applications
packaged by Parallels and its partners (the default setting), or point to a custom applications
repository.
The list of available applications can be expanded: You can upload to the server your custom
applications packaged in APS format and specify which of them should be available for
installation on websites. For more information about working with application packages, refer
to the section Prepackaging Applications.
When setting up a service plan, you can select which of the apps should be provisioned to
the subscribers:

To provide all applications available from the Application Catalog, plus those that you
manually uploaded to the server and marked as available to users, on the Permissions tab,
select the option Access to Application Catalog.

To provide only selected applications, on the Permissions tab, select the option Access to
Application Catalog, and then go to the Applications tab and select the option Provide only
applications that I select. Use the button >> to add the selected applications to the plan.
230
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
Additional Services
After you add custom services, as described in the section Adding Services to Your Offerings
(on page 250), the Additional Services tab appears in hosting plan properties. On this tab, you
can select the services that you want to provide to subscribers.
Reseller Plans and Subscriptions
Properties of a reseller plan are grouped as follows:

Resources
Includes policy on overusing and overselling of resources, the number of customer
accounts a reseller can create, system resources like disk space and traffic, and service
resources like websites, subdomains, mailboxes, databases, and so on.

Permissions
Reseller permissions either denote the operations available to a reseller in the Panel, or
define which services and privileges can be enabled in the service subscriptions of the
reseller's customers. If a particular permission in a reseller subscription is Off, then a
service subscription will not provide the corresponding service or a privilege. A disabled
permission also means that a reseller is prohibited to perform the designated action in
Control Panel. For example, if a reseller subscription does not provide a privilege to use
Scheduler (Scheduler management is Off), then none of the reseller's subscribers will be
able to use it, and neither will the reseller themselves when they go to the Control Panel.

IP addresses
Defines IP addresses that will be allocated to resellers. It is important that a reseller has
at least one IP address allocated to them, otherwise, they will not be able to create a
single service subscription.
In this section:
Resources ......................................................................................................... 231
Permissions....................................................................................................... 232
IP Addresses ..................................................................................................... 232
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
231
Resources
Overuse policy
Defines what happens to the reseller subscription if the total disk space and traffic usage by
the reseller's service subscriptions (own reseller's service subscriptions and those belonging
to the reseller's customers) reaches the limit values defined by the reseller plan.

Overuse is not allowed will suspend the reseller subscription and all their customers only if
you select the checkbox Suspend reseller when their disk space or traffic usage goes beyond the
limit. If you do not select it, reseller subscriptions and their customers will not be
suspended; only a notice will be sent to recipients specified in Settings > Notifications:
Resource usage limits exceeded by reseller account option.
You can also set up sending notifications as soon as usage of disk space or traffic
reaches a particular value (the Notify upon reaching options), in order to prevent
subscriptions from suspension. The notifications will be sent to users and/or e-mail
addresses specified at Settings > Notifications: Resource usage limits exceeded by reseller
account option.

Overuse is allowed will let the subscription operate properly.
The option When limit on usage of a resource is reached, send email according to server
notification settings triggers sending notifications to users and/or e-mail addresses
specified at Settings > Notifications: Resource usage limits exceeded by reseller account option.
Note: The overuse policy does not apply to the limits set on size of mailboxes. Therefore,
even if you enable overuse, be sure to allocate enough disk space to mailboxes.
Overselling policy
Defines whether a reseller can sell more resources than allocated to them with the plan.
If overselling is allowed, a reseller is governed by actual resource usage instead of initial
resource allocation. Overselling is a marketing strategy based on the following scheme: a
reseller, who was allotted, for example, ten gigabytes of disk space, allocates five gigabytes
of disk space for each of their customers, assuming that none of them will actually use all of
their allocated disk space.
Customers
Defines the total number of customer accounts that a reseller can create.
Other Resources
Note: Other resources have the same meaning as the ones defined in the hosting plans and
subscriptions (on page 210). The only difference is that a reseller does not use the provided
resources directly, but redistributes them by means of service subscriptions they create for
their customers or for hosting their own websites.
232
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
Permissions
Reseller-specific privileges (the ones that do not affect service subscriptions they create for
their customers) are as follows:
Ability to use remote API
Defines if a reseller can remotely manage websites through custom applications. The remote
API is an interface that can be used for developing custom applications integrated with
websites, which could be used, for instance, for automating setup of hosting accounts and
provisioning of services for customers purchasing hosting services from your site. To learn
more, refer to the Parallels Plesk Panel API documentation available at the PTN portal
(http://www.parallels.com/ptn/documentation/ppp/).
Access to the Panel
Defines if a reseller can use the Panel graphical user interface.
Customer account creation
Defines if a reseller can create user accounts and subscriptions for their customers in the
Panel.
Allow overselling
Defines if a reseller can set up overselling policy, meaning that a reseller can themselves
define if overselling is allowed to them or not.
Other Permissions
Note: Meanings of the other permissions are the same as in the service subscriptions (on
page 214).
IP Addresses
These parameters define IP resources provided with the plan.
Allocate shared IP addresses
Defines shared IP addresses that will be available to a reseller.
Allocate dedicated IPv4 addresses and Allocate dedicated IPv6 addresses
Defines that a specified number of dedicated IP addresses of the corresponding type should
be allocated to a reseller. The IPs are provisioned automatically: the required amount is
taken from the number of free dedicated IP addresses in your IP pool.
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
233
Serving Non-Technical Customers
Some of your customers may lack technical background in system administration, so it is
natural for them to feel uncomfortable when they see the full set of tools that Control Panel
offers. Even worse, they may corrupt configuration files and complicate troubleshooting if
they attempt to use the tools. To avoid these situations and present your customers with a
simple and lightweight Control Panel, we recommend that you subscribe them to the Default
Simple hosting plan available in Service Plans > the Hosting Plans tab.
This plan allows customers to self service only simple routine operations leaving more
complex tasks to your support service. Though it already contains only the most frequently
used and popular tools, you are free to fine-grain the plan settings.
If you do not intend to create special plans for such audience, it is possible to limit the
number of tools and settings on the per-subscription basis using the instructions we provide
in this section. The instructions below explain how to achieve the successful user interface
simplification: Practically, you should hide resources and tools your customers are not going
to use.
Hiding Redundant Resources
The idea of this modification is straightforward: In hosting plan or subscription settings, the
Resources tab, set all unused limits to 0. According to Visibility of Hosting Features in Control
Panel (on page 210), this will hide such resources in Control Panel.
For example, if you set the mailboxes limit to 0, the Mail tab will not be shown in Control
Panel. Read more about the resources in the Resources section (on page 210).
Hiding Redundant Tools
The set of tools available to customers in Control Panel is defined by the subscription or plan
settings, the Permissions tab. For example, if you clear the DNS zone management option, the
tools to manage DNS will not be shown in Control Panel. Read more about the permissions
in the Permissions section (on page 214).
Resources and Tools of Default Simple
Initially, the Default Simple hosting plan includes the following tools:

Web Hosting Access

Web Presence Builder

File Manager

Website Statistics

Secure Your Site with SSL

Applications

Databases
234
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
Serving Customers
To learn about the new hosting model which employs service plans and subscriptions, refer
to the section titled Understanding Plans and Subscriptions (on page 201).
In this section:
Managing Service Plans .................................................................................... 235
Subscribing to Hosting Services ........................................................................ 237
Changing Services Provided to Customers ....................................................... 239
Managing Customers ........................................................................................ 241
Managing Service Subscriptions ....................................................................... 244
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
235
Managing Service Plans
To learn about service plans, refer to the section titled Understanding Service Plans and
Subscriptions (on page 201).
If you installed the Customer and Business Manager component and configured it to work
with your Panel, then you should create and manage hosting plans only through Business
Manager. Otherwise, your customers will not be billed.
After you set up plans through Business Manager, you can change their settings by clicking
the corresponding Business Manager links in the list of hosting plans. For information about
working with plans through Business Manager, refer to the chapter Using Integrated
Customer and Business Manager (on page 252).
 To create a service plan:
1. Go to Service Plans.
2. Click Add New Plan.
3. Define the plan name and properties (on page 207).
4. Click OK.
 To create an add-on plan:
1. Go to Service Plans.
2. Click Add New Add-on.
3. Define the plan name and properties (on page 207).
Note that the resources and services defined in add-on plans are always added to the
ones provided with a service plan. If a service is not selected in the add-on properties, it
does not mean that the service will be removed from associated subscriptions. On the
contrary, it does not affect anything.
4. Click OK.
 To change the resources and/or services provided with a plan:
1. Go to Service Plans and click the service plan name in the list.
2. Update the plan properties (on page 207).
3. Apply the properties:

Click OK - in case the plan does not have any subscriptions.

Click Update & Sync - in case the plan has at least one subscription.
Your changes will be applied, and all subscriptions associated with the plan will be
synced (on page 205).
 To remove plans:
236
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
1. Go to Service Plans and select the plans you want to remove.
Note that the Panel prohibits removing plans that are associated with at least one
subscription, that is why such plan's checkboxes cannot be selected.
2. Click Remove.
3. Click Yes at the confirmation box.
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
237
Subscribing to Hosting Services
Anyone who has a user account created in Panel can be subscribed to a service plan. This
includes: Customers, resellers, and the Panel administrator. Every user can be subscribed to
several service plans at once, meaning that they will have several service subscriptions,
some of which may be custom, and some of which may be associated with different add-on
and service plans.
Subscribing a new customer generally means creating the customer account together with
their first subscription. However, starting with Parallels Plesk Panel 10.2, you can also create
customer accounts without subscriptions. This can be useful if you do not need to set up a
website for a customer at the moment, and want to transfer a subscription from another
customer account, or set up a subscription later. Note that customers without subscriptions
cannot log in to Control Panel.
 To create a new customer account without a subscription:
1. Go to Customers, and click Add New Customer.
2. Specify the customer's contact and billing information, Control Panel account
username and password.
3. Clear the Create subscription for the customer checkbox.
4. Click OK.
 To subscribe a new customer to a service plan and, optionally, add-ons:
1. Go to Customers, and click Add New Customer.
2. Specify the customer contact/billing information, Panel account username
and password, attributes of the domain linked with the subscription.
3. Select a service plan with which the subscription should be associated.
4. Select add-on plans if you wish to add any.
5. Leave the Proceed to customizing the subscription... checkbox cleared.
6. Click OK.
 To subscribe a new customer to a service plan and add-ons on specific terms
(customize subscription associated with plans):
1. Go to Customers, and click Add New Customer.
2. Specify the customer contact/billing information, Panel account username
and password, attributes of the domain linked with the subscription.
3. Select a service plan and add-ons.
4. Select the Proceed to customizing the subscription... checkbox.
5. Click OK.
238
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
The customer account and the subscription will be created, and the Panel will offer to
customize such subscription properties as resources (on page 210) and permissions (on
page 214). Customizing hosting, mail, DNS service parameters is not available in the
Server Administration Panel.
6. Customize the subscription properties.
7. Click Update & Lock.
The customized subscription will get locked for syncing, it will not be synced with the
service plan or add-ons in case they change. For details, refer to the section Syncing
Subscriptions and Plans. States of Subscriptions (on page 205).
 To subscribe a new customer to your services on specific terms (create custom
subscription):
1. Go to Customers, and click Add New Customer.
2. Specify the customer contact/billing information, Panel account username
and password, attributes of the domain linked with the subscription.
3. Select None next to the Service plan.
The subscription properties will be set according to the Panel default service plan.
4. Leave the Proceed to customizing the subscription... checkbox selected.
5. Click OK.
The customer account and their custom subscription will be created. For details on
custom subscriptions, refer to the section titled Relations between Subscriptions and
Service/Add-on Plans (on page 203).
The Panel will offer to customize such subscription properties as resources (on page 210)
and permissions (on page 214). Customizing hosting, mail, DNS service parameters is
not available in the Server Administration Panel.
6. Customize the subscription properties.
7. Click OK.
 To add a subscription to host your own websites and mail:
1. Go to Subscriptions, and click Add New Subscription.
2. Specify attributes of the domain provisioned with the subscription, service
plan and add-ons.
3. Optionally, select the Proceed to customizing the subscription... checkbox.
4. Click OK.
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
239
Changing Services Provided to Customers
The Panel offers several ways of changing the services provided to customers. They are as
follows:

Modifying an existing subscription:

Adding add-on plans. The subscription will be extended.

Switching the subscription to another service plan.

Customizing the subscription parameters. The subscription will provide a custom set
of resources and services, it will remain being associated with plans, but it will be
locked for syncing.
Note: Customizing only resources and permissions is available, other subscription
properties, such as the hosting, mail, and DNS services parameters cannot be
changed from the Server Administration Panel.

Unbinding the subscription from the plans and making custom changes. The
subscription will provide a custom set of resources and services, and will not be
associated with any service plans.
Note: Customizing only resources and permissions is available, other subscription
properties, such as the hosting, mail, and DNS services parameters cannot be
changed from the Server Administration Panel.

Creating a new subscription in addition to the one a customer already has.

Modifying the service plan. This operation affects all subscriptions associated with the
plan being changed, so it is recommended to use this way in case the plan needs an
upgrade because most of the subscribers start feeling a lack of resources.
Note: For details, refer to the section titled Understanding Service Plans and Subscriptions (on
page 201).
 To extend a subscription by adding add-on plan:
1. Go to Subscriptions > <Subscription Name>.
2. Click Change Plan.
3. Select required add-ons in the box titled Available and click >>.
4. Click OK.
Note: You can add add-ons to several subscriptions at once: Go to Subscriptions, select
target subscriptions in the list and click Change Plan.
 To switch a subscription to another service plan:
1. Go to Subscriptions > <Subscription Name>.
2. Click Change Plan.
3. Select new service plan.
240
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
4. Click OK.
Note: You can switch several subscriptions at once: Go to Subscriptions, select target
subscriptions in the list and click Change Plan.
 To customize a subscription and keep it associated with plans:
1. Go to Subscriptions > <Subscription Name>.
2. Click Customize.
3. Change the resources (on page 210) and permissions (on page 214)
provided with the subscription.
4. Click Update & Lock.
 To customize a subscription and unbind it from the plans
1. Go to Subscriptions > <Subscription Name>.
2. Click Change Plan.
3. Select None next to the Service plan.
4. Select the Proceed to customizing the subscription... checkbox.
5. Click OK.
6. Change the resources (on page 210) and permissions (on page 214)
provided with the subscription.
7. Click OK.
 To add a new subscription for a customer:
1. Go to Customers > <Customer Name>.
2. Click Add New Subscription.
3. Specify attributes of the domain provisioned with the subscription, service
plan and add-ons.
4. Optionally, select the Proceed to customizing the subscription... checkbox.
5. Click OK.
 To modify a plan:
1. Go to Service Plans and click the service plan name in the list.
2. Update the plan properties (on page 207).
3. Click Update & Sync.
Your changes will be applied, and all subscriptions associated with the plan will be
synced (on page 205).
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
241
Managing Customers
Aside from creating customer accounts (on page 237), you can do the following with
accounts of your customers:

Change contact information.

Change password and username a customer uses to access Control Panel.
Note: The Panel does not notify customers upon the login information change
automatically. What is more important is that a customer must provide their username
and e-mail address to retrieve their password. So be sure to update your customers on
login information changes, especially if you change their username. Otherwise, they will
not be able to use the Panel.

Suspend accounts.
Access to the Panel is blocked for suspended customers and Control Panel users that
they created. The customer's subscriptions are suspended, too, meaning that their
websites, FTP and mail services will no longer be accessible to the internet users.

Activate accounts.
Once an account is activated, all its subscriptions are activated, too, and all the services
start working properly.

Remove accounts.
Once a customer account is removed, all customer's subscriptions and websites are
removed as well.
If you installed the Customer and Business Manager component and configured it to work
with your Panel, then the following additional links are available in the Panel:

Business Manager.

Billing Details.

Invoices.


Payment History.
Generate Outstanding Invoices (in the More Business Operations menu).

Create Invoice (in the More Business Operations menu).

Credits (in the More Business Operations menu).

Billing Accounts (in the More Business Operations menu).
Use these links for managing customer accounts in Business Manager. To learn about
available operations, refer to the chapter Using Integrated Customer and Business Manager
(on page 252).
 To change a customer's contact information:
1. Go to Customers, and click the <Customer Name> in the list.
2. Click Edit Contact Info.
3. Update the information, and click OK.
242
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
 To change password and username a customer uses to access Control Panel:
1. Go to Customers, and click the <Customer Name> in the list.
2. Click Change Login Info.
3. Update password and username, and click OK.
 To suspend a customer account:
1. Go to Customers, and click the <Customer Name> in the list.
2. Click Suspend.
 To suspend several accounts at once:
1. Go to Customers.
2. (Optional) Filter out active accounts:
a. Click the
button next to the search field above the list.
This will open the list filter.
b. Under the Status filter, select Active.
3. Select target accounts in the list.
4. Click More Actions > Suspend.
 To activate a customer account:
1. Go to Customers, and click the <Customer Name> in the list.
2. Click Activate.
 To activate several accounts at once:
1. Go to Customers.
2. (Optional) Filter out suspended accounts:
a. Click the
button next to the search field above the list.
This will open the list filter.
b. Under the Status filter, select Suspended.
3. Select target accounts in the list.
4. Click More Actions > Activate.
 To remove customer accounts:
1. Go to Customers, and select the accounts you want to remove.
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
2. Click Remove.
3. Click Yes at the confirmation box.
243
244
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
Managing Service Subscriptions
To learn about subscriptions, refer to the section titled Understanding Service Plans and
Subscriptions (on page 201).
Aside from creating subscriptions (on page 237), you can do the following with service
subscriptions belonging to your customers, your resellers and yourself:

Change hosting settings of a subscription.
That is, the IP address on which the subscription's websites are hosted, and credentials
of system user account linked with the subscription (used to manage files and folders of
websites within the subscription, and to access the server via SSH or Remote Desktop).

Transfer one or several subscriptions to another user.
This means that you change owner of subscriptions, or, in other words, reassign
subscriptions to another user: another customer, reseller, or yourself. In this case, the
subscriptions are automatically unbound from their plans and become custom (on page
203).
Note: Since Panel 10.4, customers can allow auxiliary users to access only a specified
subscription within their hosting account. For this purpose, user roles have the
corresponding permission. When you transfer the subscription that has such attached
user role, the role with all its users is also transferred to a new subscriber.

Suspend subscriptions.
Websites, FTP and mail services of suspended subscriptions are no longer accessible to
the Internet users. Suspending a subscription manually may be useful in cases a website
hosted within the subscription gets attacked.

Activate subscriptions that were suspended manually.
Once a subscription is activated, all the services provided with it start working properly.

Renew an expired subscription.
The Panel does not renew subscriptions automatically, so it suspends a subscription
when the subscription expiration date comes.

Remove subscriptions.
If you installed the Customer and Business Manager component and configured it to work
with your Panel, then the following additional links are available in the Panel:

Business Manager.

Billing Details.

Upgrade.

Downgrade.

Add-ons
Use these links for managing subscriptions in Business Manager. To learn about available
operations, refer to the chapter Using Integrated Customer and Business Manager (on page
252).
Finding Subscriptions by a Domain Name or Alias
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
245
In order to perform operations on a subscription, you should first find it among other
subscriptions. Naturally the information you have about a subscription in question is not full,
say, it may be only the domain name hosted on your server. Even in this situation, it is easy
to find the required subscription using the Domains page in Server Administration Panel. The
page provides facilities to find a domain, a subdomain, a domain alias, a customer account,
or a company by name. On this page, you can find relations between domain names and
subscriptions and also get the following valuable information:

The hosting type associated with a domain name.

The indication if a domain name is an alias.
Moreover, you can instantly view the content of each website from the list.
 To change a subscription's hosting settings:
1. Go to Subscriptions, and click the <Subscription> in the list.
2. Click Change Hosting Settings.
3. Update the information, and click OK.
 To transfer a subscription to another user:
1. Go to Subscriptions, and click the <Subscription> in the list.
2. Click Change Subscriber.
3. Select a new subscriber and click Next >>.
4. Review the information about the changes to be made to the subscription
settings and click OK.
 To transfer several subscriptions to another user:
1. Go to Subscriptions.
2. Select the subscriptions you want to reassign.
3. Click Change Subscriber.
4. Select a new subscriber and click Next >>.
5. Review the information about the changes to be made to the subscription
settings and click OK.
 To suspend a subscription:
1. Go to Subscriptions, and click the <Subscription Name> in the list.
2. Click Suspend.
 To suspend several subscriptions at once:
1. Go to Subscriptions.
246
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
2. (Optional) Filter out active subscriptions:
a. Click the
button next to the search field above the list.
This will open the list filter.
b. Under the Status filter, select Active.
3. Select target subscriptions in the list.
4. Click Suspend.
 To activate a subscription:
1. Go to Subscriptions, and click the <Subscription Name> in the list.
2. Click Activate.
Note: Activating a subscription in this way is good only for the subscriptions that were
suspended manually. If you activate in such a way an expired subscription, it will be
automatically suspended on the next day. In such cases, renew subscriptions as described
below.
 To activate several subscriptions at once:
1. Go to Subscriptions.
2. (Optional) Filter out suspended subscriptions:
a. Click the
button next to the search field above the list.
This will open the list filter.
b. Under the Status filter, select Suspended.
3. Select target subscriptions in the list.
4. Click Activate.
Note: Activating subscriptions in this way is good only for the subscriptions that were
suspended manually. If you activate in such a way expired subscriptions, they will be
automatically suspended on the next day. In such cases, renew subscriptions as described
below.
 To renew an expired subscription:
1. Go to Subscriptions, and click the <Subscription Name> in the list.
2. Click Activate.
3. Click Customize.
4. On the Resources tab, set up a new expiration date, or select Unlimited.
5. Click Update & Lock.
6. Click Unlock & Sync.
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
247
 To remove subscriptions:
1. Go to Subscriptions, and select the ones you want to remove.
2. Click Remove.
3. Click Yes at the confirmation box.
Employing Resellers
To learn about the new hosting model which employs reseller plans and subscriptions, refer
to the section titled Understanding Plans and Subscriptions (on page 201).
In this section:
Creating Reseller Account/Subscription ............................................................ 247
Changing Reseller Subscription ........................................................................ 248
Creating Reseller Account/Subscription
A reseller subscription is inseparable from a reseller account. So, to create a reseller, you
create a reseller subscription. In common case, a reseller is subscribed to a reseller plan.
However, depending on the amount of your resellers and your intention to provide them with
different amounts of resources and services, you may choose one of the following ways or a
combination of them:

Have several reseller plans, and several resellers subscribed to each of them.
(Reseller subscriptions are associated with plans, and synced.)
This way is useful if you have many resellers with who you work on different terms, and
you wish that the terms are changed with least efforts, taking advantage of syncing (on
page 205) subscriptions with the associated plan.

Have one or several reseller plans, and resellers subscribed to them while some of
the subscriptions are modified and locked for syncing. (Reseller subscriptions are
associated with plans, some of them are synced and some are locked for syncing.)
This way is almost the same as the previous one, with the only difference: you want some
of your resellers to have subscriptions slightly different from the associated plan. In such
case, use the Proceed to customizing the subscription parameters option when creating a
reseller.

Have a few resellers with custom subscriptions (on page 203).
This way is good if you have a few resellers whose subscription properties are easier to
change manually, without having to create a set of plans. In such case, select none next
to Service plan when creating a reseller.
248
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
Changing Reseller Subscription
The Panel offers several ways of changing the resources and services allocated to resellers.
They are as follows:

Modifying the associated reseller plan. This operation affects all subscriptions associated
with the plan being changed, so it is recommended to use this way in case the plan needs
an upgrade because most of the subscribers start feeling a lack of resources or services.

Modifying the subscription:

Switching the subscription to another service plan.

Customizing the subscription parameters. The subscription will provide a custom set
of resources and services, it will remain being associated with plans, but it will be
locked for syncing.

Unbinding the subscription from the plan and making custom changes. The
subscription will provide a custom set of resources and services, and will not be
associated with a reseller plan.
 To modify a reseller plan:
1. Go to Service Plans.
2. Click the Reseller Plans tab and click the service plan name in the list.
3. Update the plan properties (on page 230).
4. Click Update & Sync.
Your changes will be applied, and all subscriptions associated with the plan will be synced
(on page 205).
 To switch a reseller subscription to another plan:
1. Go to Resellers > <Reseller Name>.
2. Click Change Plan.
3. Select new reseller plan.
4. Click OK.
 To customize a reseller subscription (resources and permissions) and keep it
associated with the plan:
1. Go to Resellers > <Reseller Name>.
2. Click Customize.
3. Change the resources (on page 231) and permissions (on page 232)
provided with the subscription.
4. Click Update & Lock.
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
249
 To customize a reseller subscription (IP addresses) and keep it associated with
the plan:
1. Go to Resellers > <Reseller Name>.
2. Click IP Addresses.
3. Change the IP addresses allocated to the subscription:

To allocate an IP address, click Add IP Address, select the address or addresses (to
select multiple IP addresses, press and hold the Control button on the keyboard and
left-click the required addresses) in the Vacant IPs box and click OK.

To revoke an IP address, select the respective checkbox and click Remove IP Address.
Confirm removal and click OK.

To assign an SSL certificate to an IP address, click the IP address you need, select
the required certificate from the SSL Certificate menu and click OK.
As soon as you add or remove IPs, the subscription will get locked for syncing with the
plan.
 To customize a reseller subscription and unbind it from the plan:
1. Go to Resellers > <Reseller Name>.
2. Click Change Plan.
3. Select None next to the New plan.
4. Select the Proceed to customizing the subscription... checkbox.
5. Click OK.
6. Change the resources (on page 231) and permissions (on page 232)
provided with the subscription.
7. Click OK.
250
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers
Adding Services to Your Offerings
In addition to the hosting services and features provided by the Panel, you can expand your
offerings by using the following means:

Install third-party applications packaged as Panel modules and include the services they
provide into your hosting plans.
When such a module is installed, the service provided by it is registered in the Panel and
is made available for inclusion into hosting plans by the server administrator and
resellers: The option corresponding to the new service is listed in hosting plan properties,
on the Additional Services tab.

Add custom options to plans.
If you, for example, run an online support service at http://premiumsupport.example.com, and want to include the support option into a service plan, you
should set up a custom plan option:
1. Go to Service Plans > Additional Services > Add Service.
2. Specify service name (Premium support), service description, and select the option
to place a button to Control Panel with the link to the online service
(http://premium-support.example.com).
After this is done, a new tab called Additional Services appears in hosting plan settings. It
shows your Premium support option which you or your resellers can select for provisioning
to customers.
 To add a service provided by an application packaged as a module:
Install the module according to the instructions provided in the section Extending Parallels
Plesk Panel Capabilities with Modules and Add-ons (on page 89), or use the instructions
provided by the module packager.
 To add a service as a custom plan option:
1. Go to Service Plans > Additional Services tab.
2. Click Add Service.
3. Specify the following:

Service name.

Service description.

Use custom button for the service. Select this checkbox to place a hyperlink to your online
service or a web application to subscriber's Control Panel.

URL attached to the button. Specify the Internet address where the user should be
directed after clicking the button. For example: http://premiumsupport.example.com.

Background image for the button. If you do not select an image, the Panel will use the
default image .
Serving Your Customers and Employing Resellers

Open URL in the Panel. Leave this checkbox cleared if you want the external web
resource to open in a new browser window or tab.

If you want the Panel to send the customer and subscription information with the
HTTP request, specify what information should be included:

Subscription ID.

Primary domain name associated with a subscription.

FTP account username and password.

Customer's account ID, name, e-mail, and company name.
251
4. Click OK.
 If you do not want to let your resellers use an additional service and provision
it to their customers:
1. Go to Service Plans > Additional Services tab.
2. Select a checkbox corresponding to the service and click Make Unavailable.
 To let resellers use an additional service and provision it to their customers:
1. Go to Service Plans > Additional Services tab.
2. Select a checkbox corresponding to the service and click Make Available.
 To remove a custom plan option from service plan properties:
1. Go to Service Plans > Additional Services tab.
2. Select a checkbox corresponding to the service and click Remove Service.
 To remove an additional service provided by a module:
Remove the module from the Panel.
CHAPTER 12
Using Customer & Business Manager
Customer & Business Manager (hereinafter referred to as Business Manager) is a
billing solution bundled with your Parallels Plesk Panel package. You can install it as
an additional component during or after installation of Parallels Plesk Panel.
Business Manager simplifies the process of signing up, provisioning, and billing new
customers according to the following scheme:
1. In Business Manager, you set up service plans and add-ons corresponding to your
service offerings, add the plans to an online store that can be configured to accept
all types of payments, and integrate the store into your website.
2. A user visiting your site selects one of your hosting plans and subscribes to the
services.
3. Business Manager processes the order. After the payment is received, it sets up a
user account and subscription in Parallels Plesk Panel, and notifies the new
customer by e-mail.
4. The customer logs in to Panel and starts using the web hosting, e-mail, and other
services provided by subscription.
5. Several days before the end of the billing period, Business Manager sends an
invoice to the customer stating the account balance and due payment date. On the
due date, Business Manager charges the due amount on the customer's card or
bank account, or uses another payment collection scheme that you select.
In addition to automated provisioning and billing, Business Manager offers the following
advantages:

Support for integration with payment systems, domain name registrars, and
certification authorities issuing SSL certificates.

Customizable online store.

Compliance with requirements for stores operating in the European Union
countries.
To help you get started with configuring Business Manager, refer to Parallels Plesk
Panel 10.4 Quick Start Guide to Customer and Business Manager.
For the comprehensive operating instructions for Business Manager, refer to the
Parallels Customer and Business Manager Administrator's Guide.
When you install Business Manager, it adds a set of controls to Panel navigation pane.
See the section Business Manager Navigation Menus in Panel (on page 254) for the
complete list of these controls and descriptions of them. Each of them opens a certain
page of Business Manager in the same window. To switch back to Panel, click Back to
Parallels Panel button at the top of Business Manager navigation pane.
Using Customer & Business Manager
253
To set up the billing of your customers, add the Panel plans, customers, and
subscriptions to Business manager. For instructions on how to do it, read the Adding
Panel Plans, Customer Accounts, and Subscriptions to Business Manager (on page 258)
section. After you do it, Business Manager controls appear on the pages of added
objects. Find the descriptions of these controls in the section Business Manager Controls
for Linked Objects. (on page 256)
In this chapter:
Business Manager Navigation Menus in Panel.................................................. 254
Business Manager Controls for Linked Objects ................................................. 256
Adding Subscriptions, Plans, and Customer Accounts to Business Manager .... 258
254
Using Customer & Business Manager
Business Manager Navigation Menus in
Panel
If Business Manager is installed, a set of links to the administrative areas of Business
Manager are added to Parallels Plesk Panel navigation pane. The table below
describes these links and provides the help reference for each of them.
Name
Description
Help link
Contains links to manage customer
Business
Operations menu accounts and service subscriptions.
Customers
Add, suspend, and remove
customer accounts, change
customer's billing and contact
information. Prepare invoices and
collect payments.
Administering
Customers
Subscriptions
View and change properties of
service subscriptions. Move
subscriptions to other service plans
by upgrading and downgrading
them.
Managing Subscriptions
Invoices
View invoices for customer
accounts.
Managing Invoices and
Payments
To-do Items
View items that may require your
attention or actions.
Contains links to view accounting
Business
Monitoring menu reports and work with invoices and
payments.
Accounting
View accounting reports.
Generating Accounting
Reports
Payments
Monitor and complete payment
operations.
Viewing Transactions
List
Events
View and manage system tasks
scheduled for execution.
Understanding Events
Reports
View reports on orders,
subscriptions, payments,
transactions, and invoices.
E-mails
View a list of automatically sent
e-mails and resend them if
needed.
Setting Up Automatic Emails
Using Customer & Business Manager
Business Setup
menu
Contains links to set up Business
Manager for serving your
customers.
Plans
Set up and manage service
Plans & Add-ons
plans for provisioning services to
your customers.
Online Stores
Create and manage online stores Managing Online Stores
where customers can subscribe
to your plans.
Discounts &
Promotions
Set up discounts and coupons to Promoting Plans With
promote your plans.
Coupons and Discounts
All Settings
Set up all aspects of Business
Manager and prepare it for
serving customers.
Getting Started with
Business Manager
255
256
Using Customer & Business Manager
Business Manager Controls for Linked
Objects
In the list of customer accounts that opens when you click the link Customers in the
Hosting Services group of the navigation pane, there are Business Manager links
corresponding to each customer record. Click these links if you want to manage
customer accounts, change billing and contact information, prepare invoices or collect
payments. For more information, refer to the Parallels Customer and Business
Manager Administrator's Guide, section Administering Customers.
In the customer account management page that opens when you click the link
Customers in the Hosting Services group of the navigation pane, and then click customer's
name, there are the following links:
Name
Description
Help link
Billing Details
View the summary information
about the customer's payments,
invoices, and purchased
services; suspend or cancel a
customer account.
Administering
Customers
Invoices
View invoices for the customer
account.
Managing Invoices
Payment History
View the history of customer's
payments.
Viewing Accounting
Totals
Generate Outstanding
Invoices (in the More
Business Operations
menu)
Create outstanding invoices on
demand.
Generating Invoices
Manually
Create Invoice (in the
More Business
Operations menu)
Create custom invoices for onetime charges.
Adding Custom OneTime Invoice
Credits (in the More
Business Operations
menu)
Deposit funds (add credits) into a Adding Credits to
customer account.
Billing Accounts (in the
More Business
Operations menu)
View, add and remove billing
accounts used for charging the
customer for the services.
Customer Account
Managing Billing
Accounts and Details
Using Customer & Business Manager
257
In the list of subscriptions that opens when you click the link Subscriptions in the Hosting
Services group of the navigation pane, there are Business Manager links corresponding to
each subscription. Click these links if you want to view and change properties of
service subscriptions, or assign other service plans to subscriptions by upgrading and
downgrading them. For more information, refer to the Parallels Customer and Business
Manager Administrator's Guide, section Managing Subscriptions.
In the subscription management page that opens when you click the link Subscriptions
in the Hosting Services group of the navigation pane, and then click the domain name
associated with a subscription, there are the following links:
Name
Description
Help link
Billing Details
View and change subscription properties, Subscription Details
upgrade or downgrade a subscription,
manage add-ons, transfer the subscription
to another customer, suspend or delete it.
Upgrade
Allocate more resources to the
subscription by upgrading it to another
service plan.
Downgrade
Reduce the amounts of allocated
resources by downgrading the
subscription to another service plan.
Add-ons
Change plan add-ons associated with the
subscription.
Upgrading and
Downgrading
Subscriptions
Viewing Add-ons with
Their Properties
In the list of hosting plans that opens when you click the link Service Plans in the Hosting
Services group of the navigation pane, there are Business Manager links corresponding to
each plan. Click these links if you want to view and change settings of hosting plans.
For more information, refer to the Parallels Customer and Business Manager
Administrator's Guide, chapter Managing Plan Settings.
Important: When using Business Manager with Parallels Plesk Panel, create and
manage hosting plans only through the Business Manager. Otherwise, your
customers will not be billed.
For information about setting up new hosting plans in Business Manager, refer to the
Parallels Customer and Business Manager Administrator's Guide, chapter Creating
Plans. Operations on reseller plans and reseller accounts are not currently supported
by Business Manager.
258
Using Customer & Business Manager
Adding Subscriptions, Plans, and
Customer Accounts to Business Manager
If you first install Panel and then, after some time, decide to automate your business
operations by installing Business Manager, one of your primary tasks will be to add the
existing subscriptions to Business Manager. This necessity also arises when you used
Panel with an alternative billing solution and then decided to switch to Business
Manager. In all these cases, you have existing subscriptions you want Business
Manager to maintain.
The process of adding subscriptions is complicated by their relations to service plans
and customer accounts, so you should add the related objects as well to ensure proper
operation of the system. First you should add the plans, then the accounts and finally
add the subscriptions. This procedure is flexible, the system lets you add objects alone,
but you should follow the order - plans, customer accounts, and subscriptions.
Once you add a Panel object to Business Manager, these objects become linked. The
linking means that all changes you make to the Business Manager object properties
will be applied to corresponding Panel object. Before adding an object, Business
Manager checks if it already exists in Business Manager. If the match is found, the two
objects become linked. If the match is not found, Business Manager creates a new
object and link the pair.
The matching algorithm works this way:

Plans match if they have same names.

Customer accounts match if they have same contact names and e-mails.

Subscriptions match if their service plans and subscriber accounts match.
To add Panel objects to Business manager, use the Add to Business Manager button on
the page with a list of objects you want to add: Service Plans, Customers, or Subscriptions
items of the Hosting Services group.
Before adding objects to Business Manager, please consider the following:

A customer account you add to BM must have the Phone number and Address fields
filled in. Therefore, to successfully add Panel accounts to Business Manager
ensure that these fields are filled in.

If an account you add has auxiliary user accounts of the Accountant role, Panel will
add these users as well. If these users do not have matching accounts in Business
manager, then they will be created with random passwords that they will receive by
e-mail.

When you link customer accounts, a password to the account in Business Manager
will be assigned to the account in Panel as well.
Using Customer & Business Manager

259
When you add a subscription to Business Manager, the system starts a new billing
cycle for it and issues the first invoice for at the start of the next billing cycle. For
example, if you add a subscription with one month billing cycle, the subscriber will
get the first invoice from Business Manager a month after the adding.
CHAPTER 13
Glossary
Add-on plan
An additional plan that may complement a service plan to which a user is subscribed. It
can be assigned to users for increasing disk space or bandwidth allotments. A single
user can be subscribed to a service plan and multiple add-on plans.
Reseller plan
A set of resources and services provided to resellers of hosting services. Resellers can
use the resources for hosting their own websites or for providing services to their
hosting customers.
Hosting plan
A set of resources and services provided to hosting service customers. Typically,
resources include disk space on the server (webspace) and bandwidth for hosting
websites. There are also add-on plans that can be assigned to users for increasing disk
space or bandwidth allotments.
Subscription
A record in the Panel that keeps information about which user account is subscribed to
which service plan.
Custom subscription
A subscription which is not associated with a service plan.
Webspace
A physical directory on the server allocated to a user in accordance with a service plan.
CHAPTER 14
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed
by Event Handlers
This section describes the parameters that can be used with handlers that you set up
for specific Panel events.
Important: All variables used for passing the parameters on Linux systems must be
typed in upper case (for example, NEW_USERNAME), and on Windows systems, in
lower case (for example, new_username).
262
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
In this chapter:
Administrator information updated ..................................................................... 263
Service stopped................................................................................................. 263
Service started .................................................................................................. 263
Service restarted ............................................................................................... 264
IP address created ............................................................................................ 264
IP address updated ........................................................................................... 264
IP address deleted ............................................................................................ 265
Session settings updated .................................................................................. 265
Customer account created ................................................................................ 265
Customer account updated ............................................................................... 266
Customer account deleted ................................................................................. 266
Customer account status updated ..................................................................... 266
Customer's interface preferences updated ........................................................ 267
Customer GUID updated ................................................................................... 267
Reseller account created ................................................................................... 267
Reseller account updated .................................................................................. 268
Reseller account deleted ................................................................................... 268
Reseller account status updated ....................................................................... 269
Reseller's interface preferences updated........................................................... 269
Reseller's IP pool updated ................................................................................. 269
Disk space limit for reseller account reached..................................................... 270
Traffic limit for reseller account reached ............................................................ 270
Disk space limit for subscription reached ........................................................... 270
Traffic limit for subscription reached .................................................................. 270
Default domain (the first domain added to a subscription/webspace) created.... 271
Default domain (the first domain added to a subscription/webspace) updated... 271
Default domain (the first domain added to a subscription/webspace) deleted .... 271
Subscription owner changed ............................................................................. 272
Default domain, status updated ......................................................................... 272
Default domain, DNS zone updated .................................................................. 272
Default domain, GUID updated.......................................................................... 273
Subdomain of created ...................................................................................... 273
Subdomain of a default domain updated ........................................................... 274
Subdomain of a default domain deleted ............................................................ 275
Default domain, alias created ............................................................................ 275
Default domain, alias updated ........................................................................... 275
Default domain, alias deleted ............................................................................ 276
Default domain, alias DNS zone updated .......................................................... 276
Reseller account limits updated ......................................................................... 277
Subscription limits updated ................................................................................ 277
Panel user logged in.......................................................................................... 278
Panel user logged out ....................................................................................... 278
Mail account created ......................................................................................... 279
Mail account updated ........................................................................................ 279
Mail account deleted ......................................................................................... 279
Mailing list created............................................................................................. 280
Mailing list deleted ............................................................................................. 280
Hosting settings created .................................................................................... 280
Hosting settings updated ................................................................................... 281
Hosting settings deleted .................................................................................... 282
Standard or frame forwarding hosting created ................................................... 283
Standard or frame forwarding hosting updated .................................................. 283
Standard or frame forwarding hosting deleted ................................................... 283
Web user account created ................................................................................. 284
Web user account updated ................................................................................ 284
Web user account deleted ................................................................................. 285
Web application installed ................................................................................... 285
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Administrator information updated
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Previously used value
New value
Notes
Login name
OLD_LOGIN_NAME
NEW_LOGIN_NAME
Required
Contact name
OLD_CONTACT_NAME
NEW_CONTACT_NAME
Required
Company name
OLD_COMPANY_NAME
NEW_COMPANY_NAME
Phone number
OLD_PHONE
NEW_PHONE
Fax
OLD_FAX
NEW_FAX
E- mail
OLD_EMAIL
NEW_EMAIL
Address
OLD_ADDRESS
NEW_ADDRESS
CIty
OLD_CITY
NEW_CITY
State/Province
OLD_STATE_PROVINCE NEW_STATE_PROVINCE
Postal/Zip code
OLD_POSTAL_ZIP_COD NEW_POSTAL_ZIP_COD
E
E
Country
OLD_COUNTRY
NEW_COUNTRY
Service stopped
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Previously used value
New value
Service name
OLD_SERVICE
NEW_SERVICE
Notes
Required
Service started
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Previously used value New value
Service name
OLD_SERVICE
NEW_SERVICE
Notes
Required
263
264
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Service restarted
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Previously used value
New value
Service name
OLD_SERVICE
NEW_SERVICE
Notes
Required
IP address created
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Previously used value
New value
IP address
OLD_IP_ADDRESS
NEW_IP_ADDRESS
IP mask
OLD_IP_MASK
NEW_IP_MASK
Interface
OLD_INTERFACE
NEW_INTERFACE
IP type (shared or
dedicated)
OLD_IP_TYPE
NEW_IP_TYPE
Notes
Required
IP address updated
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Previously used value
New value
IP address
OLD_IP_ADDRESS
NEW_IP_ADDRESS
IP mask
OLD_IP_MASK
NEW_IP_MASK
Interface
OLD_INTERFACE
NEW_INTERFACE
IP type (shared or
dedicated)
OLD_IP_TYPE
NEW_IP_TYPE
Notes
Required
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
IP address deleted
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
IP address
Notes
OLD_IP_ADDRESS
Require
d
Session settings updated
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Previously used value
Allowed period of
inactivity for all
Parallels Plesk
Panel users
Notes
New value
OLD_SESSION_IDLE_T NEW_SESSION_IDLE_T
IME
IME
Customer account created
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Login name
NEW_LOGIN_NAME
Required
Password
NEW_PASSWORD
Contact name
NEW_CONTACT_NAME
Company name
NEW_COMPANY_NAME
Phone
NEW_PHONE
Fax
NEW_FAX
E- mail
NEW_EMAIL
Address
NEW_ADDRESS
City
NEW_CITY
State/province
NEW_STATE_PROVINCE
Postal/zip code
NEW_POSTAL_ZIP_CODE
Country
NEW_COUNTRY
Required
265
266
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Customer account updated
Parameter name
and description
Environment variable name
Notes
Previously used value
New value
Login name
OLD_LOGIN_NAME
NEW_LOGIN_NAME
Password
OLD_PASSWORD
NEW_PASSWORD
Contact name
OLD_CONTACT_NAME
NEW_CONTACT_NAME
Company name
OLD_COMPANY_NAME
NEW_COMPANY_NAME
Phone
OLD_PHONE
NEW_PHONE
Fax
OLD_FAX
NEW_FAX
E- mail
OLD_EMAIL
NEW_EMAIL
Address
OLD_ADDRESS
NEW_ADDRESS
City
OLD_CITY
NEW_CITY
State/province
OLD_STATE_PROVINCE NEW_STATE_PROVINCE
Postal/zip code
OLD_POSTAL_ZIP_COD NEW_POSTAL_ZIP_COD
E
E
Country
OLD_COUNTRY
Required
Required
NEW_COUNTRY
Customer account deleted
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Login name
OLD_LOGIN_NAME
Notes
Required
Customer account status updated
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Previously used value
New value
Contact name
OLD_CONTACT_NAME
NEW_CONTACT_NAME
Notes
Required
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Login name
OLD_LOGIN_NAME
NEW_LOGIN_NAME
Status
OLD_STATUS
NEW_STATUS
Required
Customer's interface preferences updated
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Previously used value
New value
Notes
Contact name
OLD_CONTACT_NAME
NEW_CONTACT_NAME
Required
Login name
OLD_LOGIN_NAME
NEW_LOGIN_NAME
Required
Page size
OLD_LINES_PER_PAG NEW_LINES_PER_PAGE
E
Interface skin
OLD_INTERFACE_SKI NEW_INTERFACE_SKIN
N
Customer GUID updated
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Previously used value New value
Customer type
OLD_CLIENT_TYPE NEW_CLIENT_TYPE
Login name
OLD_LOGIN_NAME NEW_LOGIN_NAME
GUID
OLD_GUID
Notes
Required
NEW_GUID
Reseller account created
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Notes
Login name
NEW_LOGIN_NAME
Required
Contact name
NEW_CONTACT_NAME
Required
Password
NEW_PASSWORD
Company name
NEW_COMPANY_NAME
Phone
NEW_PHONE
267
268
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Fax
NEW_FAX
E- mail
NEW_EMAIL
Address
NEW_ADDRESS
City
NEW_CITY
State/province
NEW_STATE_PROVINCE
Postal/zip code
NEW_POSTAL_ZIP_CODE
Country
NEW_COUNTRY
Reseller account updated
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Previously used value
New value
Login name
OLD_LOGIN_NAME
NEW_LOGIN_NAME
Contact name
OLD_CONTACT_NAME NEW_CONTACT_NAME
Password
OLD_PASSWORD
Company name
OLD_COMPANY_NAME NEW_COMPANY_NAME
Phone
OLD_PHONE
NEW_PHONE
Fax
OLD_FAX
NEW_FAX
E- mail
OLD_EMAIL
NEW_EMAIL
Address
OLD_ADDRESS
NEW_ADDRESS
City
OLD_CITY
NEW_CITY
State/province
OLD_STATE_PROVIN NEW_STATE_PROVINCE
CE
Postal/zip code
OLD_POSTAL_ZIP_C NEW_POSTAL_ZIP_CODE
ODE
Country
OLD_COUNTRY
Notes
Required
NEW_PASSWORD
NEW_COUNTRY
Reseller account deleted
Parameter name
and description
Environment variable name
Notes
Login name
OLD_LOGIN_NAME
Required
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Reseller account status updated
Parameter name
and description
Environment variable name
Notes
Previously used value
New value
Contact name
OLD_CONTACT_NAME
NEW_CONTACT_NAME
Required
Login name
OLD_LOGIN_NAME
NEW_LOGIN_NAME
Required
Status
OLD_STATUS
NEW_STATUS
Reseller's interface preferences updated
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Previously used value New value
Notes
Contact name
OLD_CONTACT_NAM NEW_CONTACT_NAME
E
Required
Login name
OLD_LOGIN_NAME
Required
NEW_LOGIN_NAME
Ability to log in to OLD_ALLOW_MULTI NEW_ALLOW_MULTIPLE_S
PLE_SESSIONS
ESSIONS
the account from
multiple computers
(or browsers) at
once.
Interface language OLD_INTERFACE_L NEW_INTERFACE_LANGUA
ANGUAGE
GE
Interface skin
OLD_INTERFACE_S NEW_INTERFACE_SKIN
KIN
Reseller's IP pool updated
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Previously used value New value
Notes
Login name
OLD_LOGIN_NAME
NEW_LOGIN_NAME
Required
IP address
OLD_IP_ADDRESS
NEW_IP_ADDRESS
Required
Status
OLD_STATUS
NEW_STATUS
269
270
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Disk space limit for reseller account
reached
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Contact name
OLD_CONTACT_NAME
Required
Disk space limit
OLD_MAXIMUM_DISK_SPACE
Traffic limit for reseller account reached
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Contact name
OLD_CONTACT_NAME
Required
Traffic usage limit
OLD_MAXIMUM_TRAFFIC
Disk space limit for subscription reached
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Subscription's domain
name
OLD_DOMAIN_NAME
Required
Disk space limit
OLD_MAXIMUM_DISK_SPACE
Traffic limit for subscription reached
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Subscription's domain
name
OLD_DOMAIN_NAME
Required
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Traffic usage limit
OLD_MAXIMUM_TRAFFIC
Default domain (the first domain added to
a subscription/webspace) created
Parameter name
and description
Environment variable name
Notes
Domain name
NEW_DOMAIN_NAME
Required
Default domain (the first domain added to
a subscription/webspace) updated
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Previously used value New value
Domain name
OLD_DOMAIN_NAME NEW_DOMAIN_NAME
Notes
Required
Default domain (the first domain added to
a subscription/webspace) deleted
Parameter name
and description
Environment variable name
Notes
Domain name
NEW_DOMAIN_NAME
Required
271
272
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Subscription owner changed
Parameter name
and description
Environment variable name
Notes
Previously used value
New value
Subscription's
domain name
OLD_DOMAIN_NAME
NEW_DOMAIN_NAME
Owner's login
name
OLD_LOGIN_NAME
NEW_LOGIN_NAME
Default domain, status updated
This event cannot be tracked for the main site of a subscription. It can only be tracked
for additional websites.
Parameter
name and
description
Environment variable name
Previously used value
New value
Website's
domain
name
OLD_DOMAIN_NAME
NEW_DOMAIN_NAME
Website
status
OLD_STATUS
NEW_STATUS
Notes
Required
Default domain, DNS zone updated
Parameter name
and description
Environment variable name
Previously used value
Domain name
Notes
New value
OLD_DOMAIN_NAME NEW_DOMAIN_NAME
Required
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Default domain, GUID updated
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Previously used value New value
Notes
Domain name
OLD_DOMAIN_NAME NEW_DOMAIN_NAME
Required
Globally unique
identifier (GUID)
OLD_GUID
Required
NEW_GUID
Subdomain of created
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Subdomain name
NEW_SUBDOMAIN_NAME
Required
Parent domain name
NEW_DOMAIN_NAME
Required
FTP account login
NEW_SYSTEM_USER_TYPE
Subdomain owner's
login name
NEW_SYSTEM_USER
Hard disk quota
NEW_HARD_DISK_QUOTA
SSI support
NEW_SSI_SUPPORT
PHP support
NEW_PHP_SUPPORT
CGI support
NEW_CGI_SUPPORT
Perl support
NEW_MOD_PERL_SUPPORT
Python support
NEW_MOD_PYTHON_SUPPORT
ColdFusion support
NEW_COLDFUSION_SUPPORT
Apache ASP support
NEW_APACHE_ASP_SUPPORT
Only on Linux
platforms.
ASP support
NEW_ASP_SUPPORT
Only on Windows
platforms.
Hard quota on disk
space
NEW_HARD_DISK_QUOTA
Miva scripting support NEW_MIVA_SUPPORT
FastCGI support
NEW_MOD_FASTCGI_SUPPORT
SSL support
NEW_SSL_SUPPORT
273
274
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Subdomain of a default domain updated
Parameter name
and description
Environment variable name
Previously used value
Notes
New value
Subdomain name OLD_SUBDOMAIN_NAME NEW_SUBDOMAIN_NAME Required
Parent domain
name
OLD_DOMAIN_NAME
NEW_DOMAIN_NAME
Required
FTP account login OLD_SYSTEM_USER_TY NEW_SYSTEM_USER_TY
PE
PE
Subdomain
owner's login
name
OLD_SYSTEM_USER
NEW_SYSTEM_USER
Hard disk quota
OLD_HARD_DISK_QUOT NEW_HARD_DISK_QUOT
A
A
SSI support
OLD_SSI_SUPPORT
NEW_SSI_SUPPORT
PHP support
OLD_PHP_SUPPORT
NEW_PHP_SUPPORT
CGI support
OLD_CGI_SUPPORT
NEW_CGI_SUPPORT
Perl support
OLD_MOD_PERL_SUPPO NEW_MOD_PERL_SUPPO
RT
RT
Python support
OLD_MOD_PYTHON_SUP NEW_MOD_PYTHON_SUP
PORT
PORT
ColdFusion
support
OLD_COLDFUSION_SUP NEW_COLDFUSION_SUP
PORT
PORT
Apache ASP
support
OLD_APACHE_ASP_SUP NEW_APACHE_ASP_SUP Only on
PORT
PORT
Linux
platforms
.
ASP support
OLD_ASP_SUPPORT
Hard quota on
disk space
OLD_HARD_DISK_QUOT NEW_HARD_DISK_QUOT
A
A
Miva scripting
support
OLD_MIVA_SUPPORT
FastCGI support
OLD_MOD_FASTCGI_SU NEW_MOD_FASTCGI_SU
PPORT
PPORT
SSL support
OLD_SSL_SUPPORT
NEW_ASP_SUPPORT
NEW_MIVA_SUPPORT
NEW_SSL_SUPPORT
Only on
Windows
platforms
.
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Subdomain of a default domain deleted
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Notes
Parent domain
name
OLD_DOMAIN_NAME
Required
Subdomain
name
OLD_SUBDOMAIN_NAME
Required
Default domain, alias created
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Domain alias name
NEW_DOMAIN_ALIAS_NAME
Required
Synchronization of DNS NEW_DNS
zone with a primary
domain
Domain alias switched
on or off
NEW_STATUS
Web service for domain NEW_DOMAIN_ALIAS_WEB
alias is on or off
Mail service for domain NEW_DOMAIN_ALIAS_MAIL
alias is on or off
NEW_DOMAIN_ALIAS_TOMCAT
Support for accessing
web applications in Java
for domain alias visitors
(on or off)
Default domain, alias updated
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Previously used value New value
Notes
Domain alias name OLD_DOMAIN_ALIA NEW_DOMAIN_ALIAS_NAM Required
S_NAME
E
275
276
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Synchronization of OLD_DNS
DNS zone with a
primary domain
NEW_DNS
Domain alias
switched on or off
OLD_STATUS
NEW_STATUS
Web service for
domain alias is on
or off
OLD_DOMAIN_ALIA NEW_DOMAIN_ALIAS_WEB
S_WEB
Mail service for
domain alias is on
or off
OLD_DOMAIN_ALIA NEW_DOMAIN_ALIAS_MAI
S_MAIL
L
OLD_DOMAIN_ALIA NEW_DOMAIN_ALIAS_TOM
Support for
S_TOMCAT
CAT
accessing web
applications in
Java for domain
alias visitors (on or
off)
Default domain, alias deleted
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Domain alias name
OLD_DOMAIN_ALIAS_NAME
Required
Domain ID number
OLD_DOMAIN_ID
Default domain, alias DNS zone updated
Parameter name
and description
Environment variable name
Previously used value
Domain alias
name
Notes
New value
OLD_DOMAIN_ALIAS_N NEW_DOMAIN_ALIAS_N Required
AME
AME
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Reseller account limits updated
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Previously used value
New value
Contact name
OLD_CONTACT_NAME NEW_CONTACT_NAME
Login name
OLD_LOGIN_NAME
Maximum number
of domains
OLD_MAXIMUM_DOMA NEW_MAXIMUM_DOMAINS
INS
Maximum amount
of disk space
OLD_MAXIMUM_DISK NEW_MAXIMUM_DISK_SP
_SPACE
ACE
Maximum amount
of traffic
OLD_MAXIMUM_TRAF NEW_MAXIMUM_TRAFFIC
FIC
Maximum number
of Web users
OLD_MAXIMUM_WEBU NEW_MAXIMUM_WEBUSER
SERS
S
Maximum number
of databases
OLD_MAXIMUM_DATA NEW_MAXIMUM_DATABAS
BASES
ES
Maximum number
of mailboxes
OLD_MAXIMUM_MAIL NEW_MAXIMUM_MAILBOX
BOXES
ES
Mailbox quota
OLD_MAXIMUM_MAIL NEW_MAXIMUM_MAILBOX
BOX_QUOTA
_QUOTA
Maximum number
of mailing lists
OLD_MAXIMUM_MAIL NEW_MAXIMUM_MAIL_LI
_LISTS
STS
Maximum number
of Java
applications
OLD_MAXIMUM_TOMC NEW_MAXIMUM_TOMCAT_
AT_WEB_APPLICATI WEB_APPLICATIONS
ONS
NEW_LOGIN_NAME
Notes
Required
Account expiration OLD_EXPIRATION_D NEW_EXPIRATION_DATE
ATE
date
Subscription limits updated
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Previously used value
New value
Domain name
OLD_DOMAIN_NAME
NEW_DOMAIN_NAME
Maximum amount
of disk space
OLD_MAXIMUM_DISK_ NEW_MAXIMUM_DISK_S
SPACE
PACE
Maximum amount
of traffic
OLD_MAXIMUM_TRAFF NEW_MAXIMUM_TRAFFI
IC
C
Notes
Required
277
278
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Maximum number
of web users
OLD_MAXIMUM_WEBUS NEW_MAXIMUM_WEBUSE
ERS
RS
Maximum number
of databases
OLD_MAXIMUM_DATAB NEW_MAXIMUM_DATABA
ASES
SES
Maximum number
of mailboxes
OLD_MAXIMUM_MAILB NEW_MAXIMUM_MAILBO
OXES
XES
Mailbox quota
OLD_MAXIMUM_MAILB NEW_MAXIMUM_MAILBO
OX_QUOTA
X_QUOTA
Maximum number
of mailing lists
OLD_MAXIMUM_MAIL_ NEW_MAXIMUM_MAIL_L
LISTS
ISTS
Maximum number OLD_MAXIMUM_TOMCA NEW_MAXIMUM_TOMCAT
of java applications T_WEB_APPLICATION _WEB_APPLICATIONS
S
Expiration date
OLD_EXPIRATION_DA NEW_EXPIRATION_DAT
TE
E
Panel user logged in
Parameter name
and description
Contact name
Environment variable name
Notes
Previously used value
New value
OLD_CONTACT_NAME
NEW_CONTACT_NAME
Panel user logged out
Parameter name
and description
Contact name
Environment variable name
Notes
Previously used value
New value
OLD_CONTACT_NAME
NEW_CONTACT_NAME
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Mail account created
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
E-mail address
NEW_MAILNAME
Required (in the
format
address@example
.com)
Mail account updated
Parameter name
and description
Environment variable name
Notes
Previously used value New value
E-mail address
OLD_MAILNAME
NEW_MAILNAME
Mailbox
OLD_MAILBOX
NEW_MAILBOX
Password
OLD_PASSWORD
NEW_PASSWORD
Mailbox quota
OLD_MAILBOX_QUO NEW_MAILBOX_QUOTA
TA
Autoresponders
OLD_AUTORESPOND NEW_AUTORESPONDERS
ERS
Required (in
the format
address@exa
mple.com)
Mail account deleted
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
E-mail address
OLD_MAILNAME
Required (in the
format
address@example
.com)
279
280
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Mailing list created
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Domain name
NEW_DOMAIN_NAME
Required
Mailing list e-mail
address
NEW_MAIL_LIST_NAME
Required
Mailing list switched on
NEW_MAIL_LIST_ENABLED
Mailing list deleted
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Domain name
OLD_DOMAIN_NAME
Required
Mailing list e-mail
address
OLD_MAIL_LIST_NAME
Required
Mailing list switched on
OLD_MAIL_LIST_ENABLED
Hosting settings created
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Domain name
NEW_DOMAIN_NAME
Required
IPv4 address
NEW_IP_ADDRESS
IPv6 address
NEW_IPV6_ADDRESS
IP type
NEW_IP_TYPE
System user's login
name
NEW_SYSTEM_USER
System user's
password
NEW_SYSTEM_USER_PASSWORD
Access to the server
over SSH (on Linux
systems) or Remote
Desktop (on Windows
systems)
NEW_SYSTEM_SHELL
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
MS FrontPage support NEW_FP_SUPPORT
MS FrontPage over
SSL support
NEW_FPSSL_SUPPORT
MS FrontPage
authoring
NEW_FP_AUTHORING
MS FrontPage admin
login
NEW_FP_ADMIN_LOGIN
MS FrontPage admin
password
NEW_FP_ADMIN_PASSWORD
SSI support
NEW_SSI_SUPPORT
PHP support
NEW_PHP_SUPPORT
CGI support
NEW_CGI_SUPPORT
Perl support
NEW_MOD_PERL_SUPPORT
Apache ASP support
NEW_APACHE_ASP_SUPPORT
Only on
Linux
systems
ASP support
NEW_ASP_SUPPORT
Only on
Windows
systems
SSL support
NEW_SSL_SUPPORT
Web statistics program NEW_WEB_STATISTICS
Custom error
documents
NEW_CUSTOM_ERROR_DOCUMENTS
Hard quota on disk
space
NEW_HARD_DISK_QUOTA
Hosting settings updated
Parameter name
and description
Environment variable name
Previously used value
Notes
New value
Domain name
OLD_DOMAIN_NAME NEW_DOMAIN_NAME
IPv4 address
OLD_IP_ADDRESS
IPv6 address
OLD_IPV6_ADDRES NEW_IPV6_ADDRESS
S
IP type
OLD_IP_TYPE
System user
OLD_SYSTEM_USER NEW_SYSTEM_USER
System user's
password
OLD_SYSTEM_USER NEW_SYSTEM_USER_PASSW
_PASSWORD
ORD
NEW_IP_ADDRESS
NEW_IP_TYPE
Required
281
282
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Access to the
server over SSH
(on Linux
systems) or
Remote Desktop
(on Windows
systems)
OLD_SYSTEM_SHEL NEW_SYSTEM_SHELL
L
FP support
OLD_FP_SUPPORT
FP- SSL support
OLD_FPSSL_SUPPO NEW_FPSSL_SUPPORT
RT
FP authoring
OLD_FP_AUTHORIN NEW_FP_AUTHORING
G
FP admin login
OLD_FP_ADMIN_LO NEW_FP_ADMIN_LOGIN
GIN
FP admin
password
OLD_FP_ADMIN_PA NEW_FP_ADMIN_PASSWORD
SSWORD
SSI support
OLD_SSI_SUPPORT NEW_SSI_SUPPORT
PHP support
OLD_PHP_SUPPORT NEW_PHP_SUPPORT
CGI support
OLD_CGI_SUPPORT NEW_CGI_SUPPORT
Perl support
OLD_MOD_PERL_SU NEW_MOD_PERL_SUPPORT
PPORT
Apache ASP
support
OLD_APACHE_ASP_ NEW_APACHE_ASP_SUPPOR Only on
SUPPORT
T
Linux
systems
ASP support
OLD_ASP_SUPPORT NEW_ASP_SUPPORT
SSL support
OLD_SSL_SUPPORT NEW_SSL_SUPPORT
Web statistics
OLD_WEB_STATIST NEW_WEB_STATISTICS
ICS
Custom error
documents
OLD_CUSTOM_ERRO NEW_CUSTOM_ERROR_DOCU
R_DOCUMENTS
MENTS
Hard disk quota
OLD_HARD_DISK_Q NEW_HARD_DISK_QUOTA
UOTA
NEW_FP_SUPPORT
Only on
Windows
systems
Hosting settings deleted
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Domain name
OLD_DOMAIN_NAME
Required
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Standard or frame forwarding hosting
created
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Domain name
NEW_DOMAIN_NAME
IPv4 address
NEW_IP_ADDRESS
IPv6 address
NEW_IPV6_ADDRESS
Forwarding type
NEW_FORWARDING_TYPE
URL
NEW_URL
Notes
Required
Standard or frame forwarding hosting
updated
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Previously used value New value
Notes
Domain name
OLD_DOMAIN_NAME NEW_DOMAIN_NAME
IPv4 address
OLD_IP_ADDRESS NEW_IP_ADDRESS
IPv6 address
OLD_IPV6_ADDRES NEW_IPV6_ADDRESS
S
Forwarding type
OLD_FORWARDING_ NEW_FORWARDING_TYPE
TYPE
URL
OLD_URL
Required
NEW_URL
Standard or frame forwarding hosting
deleted
Parameter name
and description
Environment variable name
Notes
Domain name
OLD_DOMAIN_NAME
Required
283
284
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Forwarding type
OLD_FORWARDING_TYPE
Web user account created
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Domain name
NEW_DOMAIN_NAME
Required
Web user name
NEW_WEBUSER_NAME
Required
SSI support
NEW_SSI_SUPPORT
PHP support
NEW_PHP_SUPPORT
CGI support
NEW_CGI_SUPPORT
Perl support
NEW_MOD_PERL_SUPPORT
Python support
NEW_MOD_PYTHON_SUPPORT
Apache ASP support
NEW_APACHE_ASP_SUPPORT
Only on
Linux
systems
ASP support
NEW_ASP_SUPPORT
Only on
Windows
systems
Hard disk quota
NEW_HARD_DISK_QUOTA
Web user account updated
Parameter name
and description
Environment variable name
Previously used value
Notes
New value
Domain name
OLD_DOMAIN_NAME NEW_DOMAIN_NAME
Required
Web user name
OLD_WEBUSER_NAM NEW_WEBUSER_NAME
E
Required
SSI support
OLD_SSI_SUPPORT NEW_SSI_SUPPORT
PHP support
OLD_PHP_SUPPORT NEW_PHP_SUPPORT
CGI support
OLD_CGI_SUPPORT NEW_CGI_SUPPORT
Perl support
OLD_MOD_PERL_SU NEW_MOD_PERL_SUPPORT
PPORT
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Python support
OLD_MOD_PYTHON_ NEW_MOD_PYTHON_SUPPOR
SUPPORT
T
Apache ASP
support
OLD_APACHE_ASP_ NEW_APACHE_ASP_SUPPOR Only on
SUPPORT
T
Linux
systems
ASP support
OLD_ASP_SUPPORT NEW_ASP_SUPPORT
Hard disk quota
OLD_HARD_DISK_Q NEW_HARD_DISK_QUOTA
UOTA
Only on
Windows
systems
Web user account deleted
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Notes
Domain name
OLD_DOMAIN_NAME
Required
Web user name
OLD_WEBUSER_NAME
Required
Web application installed
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable
Health monitor parameter NEW_SITEAPP_NAME
(the same value for new
and old)
Notes
Required
Domain or subdomain
NEW_SITEAPP_DOMAIN_TYPE
Required
URL relative to the
domain/subdomain, by
which the application is
accessible on the Web
NEW_SITEAPP_INSTALL_PREFIX
Required
285
286
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Web application reconfigured
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable
Previously used value
Health monitor parameter OLD_SITEAPP_NAME
(the same value for new
and old)
Notes
New value
NEW_SITEAPP_NAME
Required
Domain or subdomain
OLD_SITEAPP_DOMAIN_T NEW_SITEAPP_DOMAIN_T Required
YPE
YPE
URL relative to the
domain/subdomain, by
which the application is
accessible on the Web
OLD_SITEAPP_INSTALL_ NEW_SITEAPP_INSTALL_ Required
PREFIX
PERFIX
Web application uninstalled
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable
Notes
Health monitor parameter OLD_SITEAPP_NAME
(the same value for new
and old)
Required
Domain or subdomain
OLD_SITEAPP_DOMAIN_TYPE
Required
URL relative to the
domain/subdomain, by
which the application is
accessible on the Web
OLD_SITEAPP_INSTALL_PREFIX
Required
Web application upgraded
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable
Previously used value
Notes
New value
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Health monitor parameter OLD_SITEAPP_NAME
(the same value for new
and old)
NEW_SITEAPP_NAME
Required
Domain or subdomain
OLD_SITEAPP_DOMAIN_T NEW_SITEAPP_DOMAIN_T Required
YPE
YPE
URL relative to the
domain/subdomain, by
which the application is
accessible on the Web
OLD_SITEAPP_INSTALL_ NEW_SITEAPP_INSTALL_ Required
PREFIX
PERFIX
License key updated
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
Previously used value
New value
Notes
License key
number
OLD_LICENSE
NEW_LICENSE
License key type
(Parallels Plesk
Panel, additional)
OLD_LICENSE_TYPE
NEW_LICENSE_TYPE
License key name OLD_LICENSE_NAME
(for additional
keys)
NEW_LICENSE_NAME
Required
License key expired
Parameter name and Environment variable name
description
License key
number
OLD_LICENSE
Notes
Required
Database server created
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Database server's IP NEW_DATABASE_SERVER
address
Notes
Required
287
288
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Database server updated
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Previously used value
Database server's
IP address
Notes
New value
OLD_DATABASE_SER NEW_DATABASE_SERVE Required
VER
R
Database server deleted
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Database server's IP OLD_DATABASE_SERVER
address
Notes
Required
Database created
Parameter name and description
Environment variable name
Notes
Database server's IP address
NEW_DATABASE_SERVER
Required
Database name
NEW_DATABASE_NAME
Required
Database deleted
Parameter name and description
Environment variable name
Notes
Database server's IP address
OLD_DATABASE_SERVER
Required
Database name
OLD_DATABASE_NAME
Required
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Database user account created
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Database server's IP NEW_DATABASE_SERVER
address
Required
NEW_DATABASE_ID
Database
identification number
Required
Database user name NEW_DATABASE_USER_NAME
Required
Database user
password
NEW_DATABASE_USER_PASSWORD
Database user account updated
Parameter name
and description
Environment variable name
Previously used value
Notes
New value
Database server's OLD_DATABASE_SER NEW_DATABASE_SERVER
VER
IP address
NEW_DATABASE_ID
Required
Database
identification
number
OLD_DATABASE_ID
Database user
name
OLD_DATABASE_USE NEW_DATABASE_USER_NA Required
R_NAME
ME
Database user
password
OLD_DATABASE_USE NEW_DATABASE_USER_PA
R_PASSWORD
SSWORD
Required
Database user account deleted
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Database server's IP OLD_DATABASE_SERVER
address
Required
OLD_DATABASE_ID
Database
identification number
Required
289
290
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Database user name OLD_DATABASE_USER_NAME
Required
OLD_DATABASE_USER_PASSWORD
Database user
password
Parallels Plesk Panel component updated
or added
Parameter name
and description
Environment variable name
Previously used value
Parallels Plesk
Panel
component
name
Notes
New value
OLD_PLESK_COMPONE NEW_PLESK_COMPONENT_N Required
NT_NAME
AME
Reseller plan created
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Reseller plan ID
NEW_TEMPLATE_ID
Required
Reseller plan updated
Parameter name
and description
Reseller plan
ID
Environment variable name
Notes
Previously used value
New value
OLD_TEMPLATE_ID
NEW_TEMPLATE_ID
Required
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Reseller plan deleted
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Reseller plan ID
OLD_TEMPLATE_ID
Required
Service plan of reseller created
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Plan ID
NEW_DOMAIN_TEMPLATE
Required
Service plan of reseller updated
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Plan ID
OLD_DOMAIN_TEMPLATE
Required
Service plan of reseller deleted
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Plan ID
OLD_DOMAIN_TEMPLATE
Required
Service plan of administrator created
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Plan ID
NEW_ADMIN_TEMPLATE
Required
291
292
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
Service plan of administrator updated
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Plan ID
OLD_ADMIN_TEMPLATE
Required
Service plan of administrator deleted
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Plan ID
OLD_ADMIN_TEMPLATE
Required
FTP account created
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Domain name
NEW_DOMAIN_NAME
Required
Home directory
NEW_HOME_DIRECTORY
Required
System user name
NEW_SYSTEM_USER
System user password NEW_SYSTEM_USER_PASSWORD
FTP account updated
Parameter
name and
description
Environment variable name
Previously used value
New value
Domain
name
OLD_DOMAIN_NAME
NEW_DOMAIN_NAME
Required
Home
directory
OLD_HOME_DIRECTORY
NEW_HOME_DIRECTORY
Required
Notes
Appendix A: Event Parameters Passed by Event Handlers
System user OLD_SYSTEM_USER
name
NEW_SYSTEM_USER
Required
System user OLD_SYSTEM_USER_PAS NEW_SYSTEM_USER_PASSW
SWORD
ORD
password
FTP account deleted
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable name
Notes
Domain name
OLD_DOMAIN_NAME
Required
Home directory
OLD_HOME_DIRECTORY
Required
System user name
OLD_SYSTEM_USER
System user password OLD_SYSTEM_USER_PASSWORD
Server health status changed
Parameter name and
description
Environment variable
Previously used value
Notes
New value
Health monitor parameter OLD_HEALTH_PARAMETER NEW_HEALTH_PARAMETER Required
(the same value for new
and old)
Parameter status
OLD_STATUS
NEW_STATUS
Required
293